Technical data

ManualsBrandsVertical ManualsComputer equipmentSUMMIT IP

Description / Programming &

Operations Guide

Release 1.0

November 2010

Summary of content (854 pages)

PAGE 1
Description / Programming & Operations Guide Release 1.
PAGE 2
Release 1.
PAGE 3
Vertical Communications, Inc. reserves the right to revise this publication and to make changes in content without notice. © 2010 by Vertical Communications, Inc. All rights reserved. This publication contains proprietary and confidential information of Vertical Communications, Inc.
PAGE 4
REVISION HISTORY Release Date 1.0 09-10 Release 1.0 Documentation Changes Initial Release Page No.
PAGE 5
Contents Chapter 1 Introduction Manual Application - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Organization - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Feature Information - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - System Capacities - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Chapter 2 1-1 1-1 1-1 1-2 Directory Number (DN) Terms - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-1 Basic Features - - - - -
PAGE 6
Contents TOC-2 Call Transfer, Station - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Call Transfer, CO/IP - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - CO/IP Access - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - CO/IP Call Time Restriction - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - CO/IP Call Warning Tone Timer - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - CO/IP Queuing - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Conference - - - - - - - - - - - - -
PAGE 7
Contents TOC-3 In-band (DTMF) Signaling - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-89 SMDI (Simplified Msg Desk Interface) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-92 Flexible Numbering Plan - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-96 Green Power Save - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-98 Headset Compatibility - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-98 Hold - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-100 Hold
PAGE 8
Contents TOC-4 Speed Dial Pause Insertion - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Station Speed Dial - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - System Speed Dial - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Station Call Coverage - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - System Groups - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Station Group - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Greeting/Queuing Tone Service - - - - - - - - - - - -
PAGE 9
Contents TOC-5 VMIB - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - VMIB-Auto Attendant - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - VMIB Voice Mail - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - System Voice Memo - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Wake-up Alarm - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Chapter 4 3-254 3-254 3-257 3-276 3-279 Intercom Direct Station Select/Busy Lamp Field (DSS/BLF) - - - - - - - - - - 4-1 Interc
PAGE 10
Contents TOC-6 Alternate Outgoing CO Service - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Digit Sending Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - CO COS - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - DID Name Service - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Incoming CO Line Holiday Service - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - DID/DISA Restriction - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - CO/IP LINE PRESET FORWARD - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
PAGE 11
Contents TOC-7 Auto Release of [Speaker] - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-4 Automatic Speaker Select - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-4 Background Music (BGM) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-6 Call Log Display - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-7 CO Line Name Display - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-8 One Time DND - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
PAGE 12
Contents TOC-8 EZ-Attendant - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - System Clock Set - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - USB Upgrade - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - USB DB Up/Download From/To USB - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Chapter 8 7-41 7-42 7-44 7-45 Single Line Telephone Broker Call - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-1 Hook-Flash Mode - - - - - - - - - - - -
PAGE 13
Contents TOC-9 ACD Call Indication - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-44 ACD Group Supervisor Functions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-50 ACD Group Call Traffic - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-59 Appendix A System Programming Tables Initialization - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A-1 Program Menu Structure - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A-2 Administration Menu Table - - - - -
PAGE 14
Contents TOC-10 STATION DATA - PGM Codes 120-152 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Station Type (PGM 120) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Station Port Attributes (PGM 121-124) - - - - - - - - - - - - - Station Flexible Button Assignment (PGM 126) - - - - - - - Station Number Information (PGM 130) - - - - - - - - - - - - Station Number Attributes - PGM 131-135 - - - - - - - - - - Station Class of Service (PGM 137) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Station Auto Attributes (PGM 138) - - - - - - - - - -
PAGE 15
Contents TOC-11 Station Group Greeting/Queuing Attributes (PGM 201) - - - A-68 Station Group Attributes (PGM 202) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A-71 Voice Mail Group Attributes (PGM 203) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A-72 Pick Up Group (PGM 204) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A-73 Page Group (PGM 205) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A-73 Command Call Group (PGM 206) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A-74 PTT Group (PGM 208) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
PAGE 16
Contents TOC-12 Executive-Executive Access (PGM 242) - - - - - - - - - - - - - A-105 TABLES DATA - PGM 250-269 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A-106 Toll Tables (PGM 250) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A-106 Digit Conversion Tables (PGM 251) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A-107 Digit Conversion Options (PGM 252) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A-109 Time Table Attributes (PGM 253) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A-110 Weekly Time Table (PGM 254) - - - - - - - - - - - - -
PAGE 17
Contents TOC-13 Net Basic Attribute (PGM 320) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Net Numbering Plan Table (PGM 321) - - - - - - - - - - - - ...
PAGE 18
Contents TOC-14 DEFAULT VALUES - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B-21 USER ENTRY GUIDES - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B-105 Alphanumeric Entry Chart - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B-105 Alternate Alphanumeric Entry Chart - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B-106 Index Release 1.
PAGE 19
Manual Application 1-1 Chapter 1: Introduction Chapter 1 Introduction This chapter provides a table that shows the system capacities available in the MBX IP System Software.
PAGE 20
System Capacities 1-2 Chapter 1: Introduction System Capacities The MBX IP Series is available in the configurations shown in the table below. Total port capacities range from the 50 channel at MBX IP-100 to 400 channel at MBX IP-300. SYSTEM CAPACITY CHART Items MBX IP-100 MBX IP-300 Rack No. 2 3 Slot No.
PAGE 21
System Capacities 1-3 Chapter 1: Introduction SYSTEM CAPACITY CHART Items MBX IP-100 MBX IP-300 Save Number Redial(SNR) 1 (32 digits) 1 (32 digits) Number of SMDR Records 5000 5000 Authorization Code Max. 12 Digits 180: Extension 400: System Max.
PAGE 22
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
PAGE 23
2-1 Chapter 2: Directory Number (DN) Chapter 2 Directory Number (DN) Directory Number (DN) is the telephone number for internal users, which can be used exclusively by only one station or can be shared by multiple stations. The basic idea of providing the DN feature is not only to assign one telephone number to one physical telephone, but also to allow one telephone number to be shared and used by multiple physical stations.
PAGE 24
2-2 Chapter 2: Directory Number (DN) RELATED PROGRAMMING System Data Numbering Plan, Station Number (PGM 112) … see details on page A-17 Station Data Station Number Type (PGM 130 - Flex 1) … see details on page A-32 MADN Member (PGM 130 - Flex 2) … see details on page A-32 Prime Number Button (PGM123 - Flex 1) … see details on page A-27 PGM 123 BTN PRIME NUMBER BTN -- among My-DN and several Sub-DNs which are assigned to station flex buttons, determines the first-seized DN when the user initiates a call.
PAGE 25
2-3 Chapter 2: Directory Number (DN) Receiving Calls A physical station can receive additional calls showing on DN buttons, or through other available DN numbers that are stored in that station, even while on a call. However, if the DN is in use, it is not possible to receive a call through that DN number. NOTE: the status of a physical station and each DN is maintained independantly. If the Station is idle, the normal ring will be provided. Otherwise, off-hook signaling is activated.
PAGE 26
2-4 Chapter 2: Directory Number (DN) Branch Line When a station is using a MADN-type DN, other stations cannot access the same DN. However, if a branch line option is set to the DN, another Station can access the busy DN interrupting its call and establishing a conference call for all users. Incoming Ring Option When multiple stations have the same DN button, each station can have a different ring delay option. • Immediate Ring: Ring signal is sent to station with no delay.
PAGE 27
Account Code 3-1 Chapter 3: System Features Chapter 3 System Features This chapter provides detailed information covering description and operation of the numerous features available in the MBX IP System Software. Account Code Station users may enter a non-verified variable length (up to 12 digits) identifier for tracking specific calls. The identifier or “Account Code” is output as part of the Station Message Detail Record (SMDR) for the call.
PAGE 28
Account Code 3-2 Chapter 3: System Features Using the programmed {ACCOUNT CODE} button prior to making a call: 1. Lift the handset. 2. Press the {account code} button; Intercom dial tone is heard. 3. Place the CO/IP call as normal. Using an {ACCOUNT CODE} button during a call: 1. Press the {account code} button; CO line is held and the station hears dial tone. 2. Dial the Account Code (1 to 12 digits). 3. Press ; Station is re-connected with CO line.
PAGE 29
Alarm Signal/Door Bell 3-3 Chapter 3: System Features Alarm Signal/Door Bell The system can be configured to recognize the status of an external contact (normally open or closed). The system will signal the assigned station when the contact activates. This capability is commonly employed to provide remote Alarm or Door Bell signals to the user. A station receives the Alarm Signal, either as a single tone burst repeated at 1-minute intervals or a continuous tone.
PAGE 30
Alarm Signal/Door Bell 3-4 Chapter 3: System Features To terminate an Alarm Signal while idle: Dial the {Sys Alarm Reset Feature Code}; a confirmation tone is received and the Alarm Signal is terminated. OR Press the programmed {ALARM STOP} Flex button. NOTE: If the alarm condition is cleared, the system will automatically rearm the alarm monitoring. ADMIN PROGRAMMING Station Data Alarm (PGM 121 - FLEX12) … see details on page A-25 PGM 121 ALARM -- enable to receive system alarm signal.
PAGE 31
Authorization Codes (Password) 3-5 Chapter 3: System Features Authorization Codes (Password) An Authorization Code is tied to a DN, and provides a means to control access to Walking COS, or DISA and may be required for outgoing CO/IP Lines based on the configuration of the database. When users dial a valid Authorization Code, the system invokes the Station COS. The Station Authorization Code includes the associated station number and the assigned code.
PAGE 32
Auto Call Release 3-6 Chapter 3: System Features System Attendant To assign an Authorization Code: 1. Press the [PGM] button. 2. Dial Attendant Station Program Code 033. 3. Dial Station number for a Station code. 4. Dial the Authorization Code. 5. Press the [SAVE] button. ADMIN PROGRAMMING Station Data Password (PGM 131 - FLEX 4) … see details on page A-33 PGM 131 BTN RANGE PASSWORD -- Password is employed to control access to the system resources and facilities.
PAGE 33
Automatic Pause Insertion 3-7 Chapter 3: System Features ADMIN PROGRAMMING Table Data System Ring Table: Normal Call Ring … use Web Admin (PGM 265) see details on page A-118 Howler Tone (PGM 121 - FLEX 7)… see details on page A-25 PGM 121 HOWLING TONE -- sets Anonymous Call Restrict service. BTN 7 RANGE 0: Off 1: On DEFAULT On Automatic Pause Insertion In addition to a manually entered Pause, the system will automatically pause dialing to allow for potential connection delays.
PAGE 34
Automatic Privacy/Branch Line 3-8 Chapter 3: System Features Automatic Privacy/Branch Line Privacy is insured in all communications on the system. If desired, the customer may elect to disable the Automatic Privacy feature, allowing an uninvited station to join in an existing external conversation. In such a case, a conference is established.
PAGE 35
Automatic Privacy/Branch Line 3-9 Chapter 3: System Features Auto Privacy (PGM 134 - FLEX 11) … see details on page A-36 PGM 134 BTN RANGE AUTO PRIVACY -- Enables auto privacy feature (to restrict the intrusion/call-wait/camp-on/OHVA in busy station) 11 0: Off 1: On DEFAULT Off System Data Intercom Busy One-Digit Service (PGM 237) … see details on page A-103 PGM 237 BTN RANGE 0:Disable 1:Enable DEFAULT STEP CALL -- determines if Step Call is enabled or disabled.
PAGE 36
Auto Service Mode Control 3-10 Chapter 3: System Features Auto Service Mode Control The service mode defines different ring assignments, COS and answering privileges for the system. The service mode can be controlled automatically through definitions in the Auto Ring Mode Selection Table, which defines the time of day for Day, Night and Timed shift modes. The Attendant may change the system mode selection from automatic to manual.
PAGE 37
Auto Service Mode Control 3-11 Chapter 3: System Features Weekly Time Table (PGM 254) … see details on page A-111 PGM 254 BTN RANGE DEFAULT Monday DAY/NIGHT/TIMED ring mode start times and TIMED mode end times. 1 0000-2359 Day: 9:00 Nite: 18:00 TDS: _-_ TDE: _-_ Tuesday DAY/NIGHT/TIMED ring mode start times and TIMED mode end times. 2 0000-2359 Day: 9:00 Nite: 18:00 TDS: _-_ TDE: _-_ Wednesday DAY/NIGHT/TIMED ring mode start times and TIMED mode end times.
PAGE 38
Automatic System Daylight Savings Time 3-12 Chapter 3: System Features RELATED FEATURES Direct Inward System Access (DISA) … see page 5-51 Day/Night/Timed Ring Mode … see page 7-37 CO Ring Assignment … see page 5-38 LBC (Loud Bell Control) … see page 3-115 Dialing Restrictions … see page 3-63 Automatic System Daylight Savings Time The system can automatically adjust for Daylight Saving Time (DST).
PAGE 39
Automatic System Time Synchronization 3-13 Chapter 3: System Features DST Enable (PGM 233 - FLEX 3) … see details on page A-97 DST Start & End Time … use Web Admin (PGM 233) PGM 233 BTN RANGE DEFAULT DST START TIME -- the DST start time. Web See DST Table 2nd Sunday of March Only at 2:00 AM DST END TIME -- the DST end time.
PAGE 40
Battery Back-up, Memory 3-14 Chapter 3: System Features ADMIN PROGRAMMING System Network Time/Date (PGM 223 – FLEX 5) … see details on page A-88 PGM 223 BTN NETWORK DATE/TIME USE -- If set to ON, the System updates the Date & Time with Network Date & Time when the System Date & Time is different.
PAGE 41
Call Forward 3-15 Chapter 3: System Features Call Forward User may have selected incoming calls re-route to other stations (local or networked), station groups, the VMIIB, or over a system CO/IP line (Off-Net). The user selects the type and condition under which calls will forward by entering a Call Forward code as follows: • Code 0, Remote Call Forward – forwards all calls to the station, except recalls, activated from a remote station, Call Forward, Follow-me.
PAGE 42
Call Forward 3-16 Chapter 3: System Features - An unlimited number of stations may be set-up in a Call Forward chain, forwarding calls from one station to the next. However, the Call Forward service counter is restricted by the ‘Multi-Call Forward Service Count’ attribute (tenant based). - No Answer Forward employs the Station No Answer Forward Timer. - The No Answer Call Forward Timer can be adjusted at the PGM 141, FLEX 4.
PAGE 43
Call Forward 3-17 Chapter 3: System Features Single Line Phone To activate Call Forward, Unconditional, Busy/No-Answer: 1. Lift the handset to receive Dial tone. 2. Dial {Call Forward feature code} 3. Dial 1-4 (Call Forward code) as desired. 4. Dial station or station group to receive calls. OR Dial the CO Group Access code and the desired external phone number. 5. Press hook-switch to save. 6. Replace the handset, return to idle. To activate Call Forward, Remote (Follow-me): 1. Lift the handset. 2.
PAGE 44
Call Forward 3-18 Chapter 3: System Features ADMIN PROGRAMMING Station Data Call Forward Access (PGM 132 FLEX 2) … see details on page A-34 PGM 132 BTN RANGE CALL FORWARD ACCESS -- enables Call Forward to be activated by the station.
PAGE 45
Call Forward, Pilot Hunt 3-19 Chapter 3: System Features Tenant Data Multi-Call Forward Service Center … see page A-131 PGM 280 MULTI-CALL FORWARD SERVICE COUNTER -- determines the Multi-Call forward count.
PAGE 46
Call Forward, Pilot Hunt 3-20 Chapter 3: System Features - The Pilot Hunt Ring access privilege can be assigned on a per Station basis; if the Pilot Hunt Ring access of the station is disabled, that station will not receive Pilot Hunt ringing. - If a user activates the call forward feature using the {Pilot Hunt Call Forward code}, it is applied to the Day Forward destination. OPERATION Digital & Single Line Phone To activate Call Forward, Unconditional or Busy/No Answer: 1.
PAGE 47
Call Forward, Pilot Hunt 3-21 Chapter 3: System Features Station Group Data Pilot Hunt Group (PGM 210 - 211) … see details on page A-77 PGM 210 Release 1.0 BTN RANGE DEFAULT CONDITION -- Determines call coverage condition for Pilot Hunt group. 1 All 0: ALL 1: Intercom 2: External SERVICE TYPE -- This entry defines Service Type. (Terminal/Circular) 2 0: Terminal 1: Circular Terminal TIME TABLE INDEX -- Time Table index. 3 1-9 1 MEMBER ASG --Assigns stations as members of a Pilot Hunt group.
PAGE 48
Call Forward, Preset 3-22 Chapter 3: System Features RELATED FEATURES Station Authorization Code … see page 3-5 DND … see page 3-76 Dialing Restriction … see page 3-63 Station Group … see page 3-150 Intercom Signaling Mode … see page 6-11 Call Forward, Preset … see page 3-22 Call Forward, Preset Call Forward, Preset calls to a Station are forwarded to a pre-determined destination assigned in the system database. Preset Call Forward can define separate treatment of CO/IP calls and intercom calls.
PAGE 49
Call Forward, Preset 3-23 Chapter 3: System Features - No Answer Forward employs the Station No Answer Forward timer. - If Station No Answer Preset Call Forward and CO Preset Forward Ring Table is set the same, the CO Preset Forward Ring Table precedes Station Preset Call Forward. OPERATION System When enabled, operation of Preset Call Forward is automatic.
PAGE 50
Call Park 3-24 Chapter 3: System Features RELATED FEATURES Call Forward… see page 3-15 DND … see page 3-76 Auto Attendant … see page 3-86 Preset Call Forward … see page 3-22 VMIB Integrated Auto Attd/Voice Mail … see page 3-254 Call Park A User may place (Park) an active intercom or CO/IP call in a special holding location (Park Orbit) for easy access from any station in the system. The system has 50 holding locations (Park Orbits).
PAGE 51
Call Park 3-25 Chapter 3: System Features Single Line Phone To park an active external call 1. Press the hook-switch. 2. Dial {Call Park Feature Code}. 3. Dial the Call Park No (00-49). 4. Return to idle. To retrieve a parked call 1. Lift the handset. 2. Dial {Call Park Feature Code} 3. Dial the Call Park No (00-49).
PAGE 52
Call Pick-Up 3-26 Chapter 3: System Features Call Pick-Up Directed Call Pick-Up A station may answer (Pick-Up) incoming and transferred intercom, CO and IP calls ringing at another station. All ringing calls are subject to Directed Call Pick-up except queued Callbacks. Digital phone users may assign a Flex button as a {DIRECTED CALL PICK-UP} button. CONDITIONS - To pick-up a CO/IP call, the station must have an idle appearance button.
PAGE 53
Call Pick-Up 3-27 Chapter 3: System Features ADMIN PROGRAMMING Numbering Data Feature Numbering Plan (PGM 113) … see details on page A-18 Station Group Data Station Data -- Pickup by DSS (PGM 124 - FLEX 9) … see details on page A-28 PGM 124 PICKUP BY DSS BUTTON -- this value determines the method of pickup when pressing DSS button.
PAGE 54
Call Pick-Up 3-28 Chapter 3: System Features Group Call Pick-Up A Station can answer (Pick-Up) incoming and transferred intercom, CO and IP calls ringing at another station in the same station group. All ringing calls, except Private Queue Callbacks, are subject to Pick-up by other stations in the same group. Digital phone users may assign a Flex button as a {GROUP CALL PICK-UP} button. CONDITIONS - To pick-up a CO/IP call, the station must have an idle appearance button.
PAGE 55
Call Pick-Up 3-29 Chapter 3: System Features ADMIN PROGRAMMING Numbering Data Feature Numbering Plan (PGM 113) … see details on page A-18 Station Group Data Station Group Attributes, Pick-up Option (PGM 200 - FLEX 5) … see details on page A-67 PGM 200 PICKUP OPTION -- stations can pickup group calls ringing at other stations in the group.
PAGE 56
Call Transfer 3-30 Chapter 3: System Features Call Transfer Call Transfer, Station CO/IP calls can be transferred to other stations on the same System. Calls can be transferred without announcing the call (unscreened), or with announcement (screened). When a call is transferred, the Transfer Recall Timer is initiated. If the timer expires before the call is answered, the Hold Recall process is initiated. CONDITIONS - The transferring station may camp on a call on to a busy station.
PAGE 57
Call Transfer 3-31 Chapter 3: System Features Single Line Phone While on a CO/IP call, to perform a Screened Call Transfer: 1. Press for hook-switch. 2. Dial the station to receive the transfer. 3. When answered or when splash tone is heard, announce the call. 4. Hang-up to complete the transfer. While on a CO/IP call, to perform an Unscreened Call Transfer: 1. Press for hook-switch. 2. Dial the station to receive the transfer. 3. Hang-up to complete the transfer.
PAGE 58
Call Transfer 3-32 Chapter 3: System Features OPERATION Digital Phone While on a CO/IP call, to perform a Screened Call Transfer: 1. Press [TRANS]. 2. Place a CO/IP call in the normal manner. 3. When answered, announce the call. 4. Hang-up to complete the transfer. While on a CO/IP call, to perform an Unscreened Call Transfer: 1. Press [TRANS]. 2. Place CO/IP call in the normal manner. 3. Hang-up to complete the transfer. Single Line Phone While on a CO/IP call, to perform a Screened Call Transfer: 1.
PAGE 59
Call Transfer 3-33 Chapter 3: System Features CO Line Data CO-to-CO Attributes (PGM 179) … see details on page A-63 PGM 179 BTN STATION OUTGOING CALL TRANSFER -- while stations are connected to outgoing CO call of first CO Group, the station can transfer the call to second CO group. 1 0: Off 1: On On OUTGOING CALL TRANSFER -- while ATD is connected to outgoing CO call of first CO Group, the ATD can transfer the call to second CO group.
PAGE 60
Call Transfer 3-34 Chapter 3: System Features Unsupervised Conference Extend (PGM 166) … see details on page A-52 PGM 166 BTN RANGE UNSUP CONF ENTEND -- If this feature is set to ON, unsupervised conference timer can be extended by dial feature code after warning tone is heard.
PAGE 61
Call Transfer 3-35 Chapter 3: System Features Incoming CO Alternate Destination (PGM 169) … see details on page A-56 PGM 169 BTN RANGE DEFAULT Incoming CO Alternataive DAY -- 1 Disconnect 1 sec NIGHT -- 2 TIMED -- 3 F1: Busy F2: No Answer F3: Invalid F4: Transfer No Answer F5: Recall No Answer F6: DND F7: Out Of Service F8: Error 1: Disconnect 2: Attendant 3: CO Ring 4: Alt Ring Table 5: Tone 6: Pilot HuntGroup Disconnect 1 sec Disconnect 1 sec Outgoing CO Alternate Destination (PGM 173) … se
PAGE 62
Call Transfer 3-36 Chapter 3: System Features PGM 173 BTN RANGE DEFAULT NO ANSWER PILOT HUNT GROUP -- The CO call is routed to Pilot Hunt Group of the original destination. 6 - - NO ANSWER RING -- The call is routed to the same destination again. 7 - - NO ANSWERThe CO call is routed to the transferred station again. Only possible for 'Transfer No Answer' case.
PAGE 63
CO/IP Access 3-37 Chapter 3: System Features PGM 220 BTN RANGE DEFAULT CCR INTER-DGT TMR -- Inter-digit timer used with Customer Call Routing function. 11 01-30 secs 03 WEB PSWD GUARD TMR -- If no data packets are received during a Web Admin connection for the Guard time, a password check will be initiated by the system.
PAGE 64
CO/IP Access 3-38 Chapter 3: System Features OPERATION Digital Phone To place an outgoing CO call: 1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button. 2. Press desired {CO} line, and enter {CO ACCESS CODE}. OR 3. Dial the CO line or CO Access Code. 4. Dial the desired number. To place an outgoing IP call: 1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button. 2. Press desired {CO} line, and enter {CO ACCESS CODE}. OR 3. Dial the CO line or CO Access Code. 4. Dial the desired number registered in H.
PAGE 65
CO/IP Access 3-39 Chapter 3: System Features ADMIN PROGRAMMING CO Line Data CO Group Access Code (PGM 180) … see details on page A-65 Release 1.0 PGM 180 BTN RANGE DEFAULT ACCESS CODE NAME -- When a CO Grp Access code is dialed or Flex Button is pressed; name is displayed on the station's LCD. 1 Max 16 chars - CO LINE CHOICE -- Decide to select to CO line priority to seize. NOTE: When Outgoing Group Number is not assigned, this option is not applied.
PAGE 66
CO/IP Call Time Restriction 3-40 Chapter 3: System Features CO Line Group (PGM 160 - FLEX 3-4) … see details on page A-47 PGM 160 BTN RANGE DEFAULT OUTGOING GRP NO -- Set CO Group Number to apply to outgoing calls. 3 01-72, none (MBX IP-300) 01 01-24, none (MBX IP-100) INCOMING GRP NO -- Set CO Group Number to apply to incoming calls. 4 01-72, none (MBX IP-300) 01 01-24, none (MBX IP-100) H.323 Data H.
PAGE 67
CO/IP Call Time Restriction 3-41 Chapter 3: System Features OPERATION System Operation of this feature is automatic when assigned: ADMIN PROGRAMMING Station Data Call Duration Restrict Access (PGM 134 - FLEX 4) … see details on page A-36 PGM 134 BTN RANGE CALL DURATION RESTRICT -- restricts CO Call Duration to station. 4 0:Disable 1:Enable DEFAULT Disable Tenant Data Call Duration Restriction (PGM 284-285) … see details on page A-135 Release 1.
PAGE 68
CO/IP Call Time Restriction 3-42 Chapter 3: System Features PGM 285 BTN RANGE DEFAULT LOCAL CALL TONE RPT-TIMER -- Determines the Tone Repeat timer of Local calls. 1 010-254 020 LONG CALL TONE RPT TMR --Determines the Tone Repeat timer of Long Distance calls. 2 010-254 020 INTNATION CALL TONE RPT -- Determines the Tone Repeat timer of International calls. 3 010-254 020 DEDICATED CALL TONE RPT -- Determines the Repeat timer of Dedicated Line calls.
PAGE 69
CO/IP Call Warning Tone Timer 3-43 Chapter 3: System Features CO/IP Call Warning Tone Timer Stations can receive a tone indicating the elapsed time of a CO/IP call has reached the CO Warning Tone time (timer expiration). A warning tone is presented to the call parties notifying that the Warning Tone Timer is about to expire. CONDITIONS - Warning tone is received 15 seconds prior to expiration of the timer and can be repeated every tone repeat time.
PAGE 70
CO/IP Call Warning Tone Timer 3-44 Chapter 3: System Features PGM 284 BTN RANGE DEFAULT INTERNAT AFTER R-TIMEDetermines the operation of International calls after the Restriction timer expires. 5 0: Single tone 0: Single tone 1: Repeat tone 2: Single tone & Drop DEDICATED CALL AFTER R-TM -- Determines the operation of TIE calls after the Restriction timer expires.
PAGE 71
CO/IP Queuing 3-45 Chapter 3: System Features Local Call Prefix Table (PGM 286) … see details on page A-137 Long Distance Call Prefix Table (PGM 287) … see details on page A-137 International Call Prefix Table (PGM 288)… see details on page A-137 RELATED FEATURES CO/IP Call Time Restriction … see page 3-40 CO/IP Queuing When CO/IP lines are busy, permitted users can request to be placed in queue awaiting availability of the CO/IP line or a CO/IP line in the same group.
PAGE 72
CO/IP Queuing 3-46 Chapter 3: System Features To cancel the queue from the queued station: Press the [MSG/CALLBK] button, the [MSG/CALLBK] LED extinguishes. Single Line Phone To request to be placed in queue while receiving the “All Lines Busy” signal: 1. Press the hook-switch. 2. Enter the {Call Back Feature code}. To cancel the queue from the queued station: 1. Lift the handset. 2. Enter the {Call Back Cancel Feature code}.
PAGE 73
Conference 3-47 Chapter 3: System Features RELATED FEATURES CO/IP Access … see page 3-37 Conference Conference supports communication between multiple parties (up to 13 per conference). The following table lists conference capacities for the MBX IP 100/300 systems. NOTE: There are 133 extra TDM channels for the Conference feature.
PAGE 74
Conference 3-48 Chapter 3: System Features OPERATION Digital Phone To set-up a Conference Room: 1. Enter the {Create-Conference-Room Feature} Code. 2. Dial the desired Conference Room number (571-579). 3. If desired, enter a password for the Conference Room (Max. 6 digits). 4. Press [SAVE] to establish the Room. To join a Conference Room: 1. Dial the Conference Room Number. 2.
PAGE 75
Conference 3-49 Chapter 3: System Features To join a Conference Room: 1. Lift the handset. 2. Dial the Conference Room Number. 3. Dial the Conference Room password and for end mark if the password is less than 6-digits (if password is 6-digits, dialing is not needed). * * To delete a Conference Room: 1. Lift the handset. 2. Dial {Conference Room Delete Code}. 3. Dial the Conference Room number (1-9). 4.
PAGE 76
Conference 3-50 Chapter 3: System Features Multi-Party Voice Conference The system allows multiple internal and external parties to be connected on a call, in conference mode. CONDITIONS - The [CONF] button will remain illuminated at the phones that are temporarily out of conference for the duration of the conference. - If the system receives a disconnect signal and no internal parties remain in the conference, the conference will be terminated and all remaining parties will be disconnected.
PAGE 77
Conference 3-51 Chapter 3: System Features 11. Repeat steps 3 and 4 above to add additional conference parties (up to 13 total per conference). To get out from a conference temporarily: Press the [CONF] button, the [CONF] button LED will flash. To return to a conference call: Press the flashing [CONF] button. Single Line Phone To establish an ad-hoc conference: ("Conference Member Manual Add" is set ON) 1. Establish the first call. 2.
PAGE 78
Conference 3-52 Chapter 3: System Features ADMIN PROGRAMMING Station Data Conference Access (PGM 133 - FLEX 2) … see details on page A-35 PGM 133 BTN CONFERENCE ACCESS -- enable Conference call.
PAGE 79
Conference 3-53 Chapter 3: System Features 3. Talking on a second call, press the [CONF] button. Then, 3-party conference will be established. RELATED FEATURES Multi-Party Voice Conference … see page 3-50 Unsupervised Conference A Digital phone user may establish a conference with external parties and exit the conference while allowing the external parties to converse privately without supervision from the user.
PAGE 80
Conference 3-54 Chapter 3: System Features To reenter the Supervised Conference: Press the flashing [CONF] button. Conf Party To extend the Unsupervised Conference from a connected party: Dial the Timer extension multiplier (1-9). ADMIN PROGRAMMING Station Data Conference Access (PGM 133 - FLEX 2) … see details on page A-35 PGM 133 CONFERENCE ACCESS -- enable Conference call.
PAGE 81
Customer Site Name 3-55 Chapter 3: System Features Numbering Data Unsupervised Conference Extend Code (PGM 113) … see details on page A-19 BTN 45 FEATURE (PGM 113) Unsupervised Conf Extend REMARK 5## RELATED FEATURES Multi-Party Voice Conference … see page 3-50 HARDWARE Digital Phone to establish Unsupervised Conference Customer Site Name A Customer Name, up to 24 characters, may be entered into the system database. The name will be displayed on the SMDR and database outputs as well as during Admin.
PAGE 82
Data Line Security 3-56 Chapter 3: System Features Data Line Security Data transmitted over CO lines is subject to distortion and errors if system tones such as Camp-On, Call Wait and Override are applied during transmission. To eliminate such errors, stations that use analog data (modems or Fax) can be assigned to block incoming system tones. CONDITIONS - Stations or an Attendant attempting to Camp-On or Override a station with Data Line Security will receive an error tone.
PAGE 83
Delayed CO/IP Ring 3-57 Chapter 3: System Features OPERATION System When assigned, Delay Ring operation is automatic. ADMIN PROGRAMMING CO Line Data CO Station Ring Assignment (PGM 167) … see details on page A-54 Release 1.0 PGM 167 BTN RANGE DEFAULT SERVICE TYPE -- If service type is set as 0-2, ring option is applied to ring assigned stations. Otherwise, if service type is set to 3, feature code is activated on incoming call.
PAGE 84
Delayed Auto Attendant 3-58 Chapter 3: System Features Delayed Auto Attendant An incoming CO/IP call can be routed to the VMIB Auto Attendant either immediately upon detection or after a delay time (up to 90 seconds). This allows other stations assigned for immediate ringing the opportunity to be answered before the call is routed to the Auto Attendant.
PAGE 85
Diagnostic/Maintenance 3-59 Chapter 3: System Features PGM 167 BTN RANGE DEFAULT FEATURE DELAY -- If Service type is set to Feature code, it can be delayed. 3 00-30 00 100 (0) -- Assigned station and delay value can be displayed. Volume Up/Down key is used to scroll data. 4 - - MEMBER ASSIGN -- To change station's ring assign status, enter desired station range.
PAGE 86
Dial-By-Name 3-60 Chapter 3: System Features Dial-By-Name A name, up to 16 characters, may be assigned to each Station and System Speed dial. In addition, each station may be assigned a 16-character name. When assigned, a user may place an intercom call to another station or select a Station or System Speed dial using the name. The user selects from one of three Dial-by-Name directories and enters characters employing 2 dial pad buttons for each character.
PAGE 87
Dial-By-Name 3-61 Chapter 3: System Features To use Dial by Name on a three-line phone: 1. Press the {DIR} Soft button. 2. Dial the desired directory: 1 – Station Speed 2 – System Speed 3 – Station Name. 3. Search the directory using the [VOL UP]/[VOL DOWN] button or by entering characters. 4. Press the [SAVE] button to place the call. To program the station user name: 1. Press the [PGM] button. 2. Dial 12 {User Name Program code}. 3.
PAGE 88
Dial Pulse to Tone Switchover 3-62 Chapter 3: System Features Dial Pulse to Tone Switchover On a pulse dial CO line, the user can request the system to change the signaling mode from pulse to DTMF, allowing the user to access outside facilities that require DTMF signals such as banking services, voice mail, etc. CONDITIONS - In a Speed Dial, the digits. - This command is only recognized for analog pulse dial CO lines. - Dial pulse to tone switchover is not available in the Redial features.
PAGE 89
Dialing Restrictions 3-63 Chapter 3: System Features Dialing Restrictions Class of Service Dialing privileges can be assigned for each DN at a Station and CO line (up to 16 privileges). The Class of Service (COS) feature is applied in the following cases: • When an internal station dials out through a CO line, • When an external caller tries to make another external call using DISA or DID.
PAGE 90
Dialing Restrictions 3-64 Chapter 3: System Features OPERATION System The assigned COS is applied automatically by the system. ADMIN PROGRAMMING Station Station COS (PGM 137) … see details on page A-39 PGM 137 BTN RANGE DEFAULT DAY COS -- Station’s COS in Day mode. 1 00-15 1 NIGHT COS -- Station’s COS in Night mode. 2 00-15 1 TIMED COS -- Station’s COS in Timed mode. 3 00-15 1 CO/IP CO COS (PGM 177) … see details on page A-63 PGM 177 BTN RANGE DEFAULT DAY COS -- CO COS in Day mode.
PAGE 91
Dialing Restrictions 3-65 Chapter 3: System Features CO Line Data Toll Exception Table (PGM 250) … see details on page A-106 PGM 250 BTN RANGE DEFAULT ALLOW TABLE -- allow digits. 1 Max 16 digits - DENY TABLE -- deny digits. 2 Max 16 digits - TENANT -- Tenant groups to apply the table entry.
PAGE 92
Dialing Restrictions 3-66 Chapter 3: System Features Table Data System Time Table (PGM 253) … see details on page A-110 PGM 253 BTN RANGE DEFAULT TIME ZONE COMMENT-- defines the comment of the Time Table. 1 32 characters none SYSTEM TIME ZONE -- defines the Time Zone of the Time Table 2 0-73 0: Sys Time DAYLIGHT SAVINGS -- defines Daylight Saving Time of Time Table. 3 On/Off Off RING MODE -- defines the ring mode of Time Table.
PAGE 93
Dialing Restrictions 3-67 Chapter 3: System Features PGM 254 BTN RANGE DEFAULT Friday DAY/NIGHT/TIMED ring mode start times and TIMED mode end times. 5 0000-2359 Day: 9:00 Nite: 18:00 TDS: _-_ TDE: _-_ Saturday DAY/NIGHT/TIMED ring mode start times and TIMED mode end times. 6 0000-2359 Day: 9:00 Nite: 18:00 TDS: _-_ TDE: _-_ Sunday DAY/NIGHT/TIMED ring mode start times and TIMED mode end times.
PAGE 94
Dialing Restrictions 3-68 Chapter 3: System Features Temporary Station COS/Lock A User or an Attendant can temporarily change the Station COS preventing unauthorized toll dialing from the station (ex., “locking the station”). When locked, the station will still be allowed to place internal calls and Emergency number calls. CONDITIONS - The Station is restored to the Station COS as appropriate for the active service mode (Day, Night, or Timed). OPERATION Digital Phone To activate Temporary COS: 1.
PAGE 95
Dialing Restrictions 3-69 Chapter 3: System Features 4. Dial Authorization Code. 5. Press the hook-switch. System Attendant To activate Temporary COS: 1. Press the [PGM] button. 2. Dial 031, {Temp COS code}. 3. Enter the Station range. 4. Press the [SAVE] button. To restore the assigned COS: 1. Press the [PGM] button. 2. Dial 032, {Restore COS code}. 3. Enter the Station range. 4. Press the [SAVE] button.
PAGE 96
Dialing Restrictions 3-70 Chapter 3: System Features System Toll Exception Table (PGM 250) … see details on page A-107 PGM 250 ALLOW TABLE -- allow digits. BTN 1 RANGE Max 16 digits DEFAULT - DENY TABLE -- deny digits. 2 Max 16 digits - TENANT -- Tenant groups to apply the table entry. 3 1-9 (MBX IP 300) 1-5 (MBX IP 100) - Walking COS A User may temporarily override Toll Restriction at a Station to make Toll Calls from a normally Toll Restricted station.
PAGE 97
Dialing Restrictions 3-71 Chapter 3: System Features 4. Dial the Station Authorization code (password). 5. Dial * (end mark). 6. Place call as normal. ADMIN PROGRAMMING Station Station COS (PGM 137) … see details on page A-39 PGM 137 BTN RANGE DEFAULT DAY COS -- Station’s COS in Day mode. 1 00-15 1 NIGHT COS -- Station’s COS in Night mode. 2 00-15 1 TIMED COS -- Station’s COS in Timed mode.
PAGE 98
Differential Ring 3-72 Chapter 3: System Features RELATED FEATURES Class of Service … see page 3-63 Auto Service Mode Control … see page 3-10 Day/Night/Timed Ring Mode … see page 7-37 Authorization Codes (Password) … see page 3-5 Differential Ring Differential Ring provides one of 4 different audible Ring signals to be assigned to a Digital Phone, allowing users to determine which phone is ringing and the type of call (Intercom or CO/IP).
PAGE 99
Digit Conversion 3-73 Chapter 3: System Features ADMIN PROGRAMMING Station Differential Ring (PGM 124 - FLEX 3-4) … see details on page A-28 PGM 124 BTN RANGE DEFAULT ICM DIFF RING ID -- set the intercom differential ring ID – usually 1-4 is valid. 3 000-254 On CO DIFF RING ID -- set the CO line differential ring ID – usually 1-4 is valid.
PAGE 100
Digit Conversion 3-74 Chapter 3: System Features - The following features have higher priority over digit conversion: AND (Automatic Network Dialing) Automatic CO Seize - In Call log, dialed digit is displayed on the station's LCD. - The Digit Conversion Table can be applied by Apply Option (All/Station/CO Line/Disable) OPERATION Digit Conversion is applied automatically according to ADM programming.
PAGE 101
Digit Conversion 3-75 Chapter 3: System Features Release 1.0 PGM 251 BTN RANGE DAY CHANGED -- The CO Group Access Code and digits to be sent to PX in Day when the dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is 'FOLLOW DNT'.
PAGE 102
Do Not Disturb (DND) 3-76 Chapter 3: System Features PGM 251 BTN RANGE DEFAULT LCR TIME INDEX -- LCR Time Table Index. 17 1-9, none none NAME -- When DID destination starts to ring, the name is displayed on the ringing station's LCD. 18 Max 16 digits - APPLY OPTION -- The Apply Option can be applied according to the caller. 19 0:All 1:Station 2:CO Line 3:Diable 0:All PGM 252 BTN RANGE DEFAULT DISPLAY CONV.
PAGE 103
Do Not Disturb (DND) 3-77 Chapter 3: System Features OPERATION Digital Phone To activate DND for a P-DN (Prime Directory Number): Press the [DND] button; the [DND] button LED illuminates. To remove DND for a P-DN (Prime Directory Number): Press the [DND] button; the [DND] button LED extinguishes. To activate DND for a S-DN (Sub Directory Number): 1. Press {S-DN} button. 2. Dial the {DND Feature Code}; the {S-DN} button LED illuminates. To remove DND for a S-DN (Sub Directory Number): 1.
PAGE 104
Door Open 3-78 Chapter 3: System Features Door Open The hardware is equipped with a relay that activates an External Control Contact. The contact can be assigned to one of several functions including a Door Open Contact; the contact is connected to a door-lock release mechanism. When a Station receives the Door Bell signal, the Station User may dial the Door Open code to activate the contact. CONDITIONS - One relay contact is available. - The contacts are rated at 1 amp, 24 VDC.
PAGE 105
Door Phone 3-79 Chapter 3: System Features System External Contact Control (PGM 228) … see details on page A-90 Door Open Timer (PGM 222 - FLEX 1) … see details on page A-87 PGM 222 BTN RANGE DEFAULT DOOR OPEN TMR -- Sets the minimum contact closure time required to activate the contact assigned as a door open contact.
PAGE 106
Door Phone 3-80 Chapter 3: System Features OPERATION To call an intercom box, perform the following Steps: 1. Lift the handset or press the [MON] button. 2. Dial the Station number of intercom box, or press the programmed flexible button for the Intercom box. 3. After answering the call from the Intercom box, announce the call. To place a call from an intercom box: Press the [CALL] button and assigned station will ring.
PAGE 107
Emergency Call 3-81 Chapter 3: System Features Emergency Call Regardless of Station dialing restrictions (COS), the user may dial assigned Emergency numbers as needed. CONDITIONS - The CO Line Group Access Code and digits to be dialed should be assigned to the emergency changed digit. - If the dialed number for the Emergency code is the same as the Numbering code including station in the system, the Emergency code has the preference.
PAGE 108
Executive/Secretary by DN (Directory Number) 3-82 Chapter 3: System Features Executive/Secretary by DN (Directory Number) Executive/Secretary feature can be achieved by utilizing the DN (Directory Number) feature of the system (refer to DN). For example, when a DN is set as MADN, calls for an Executive can be routed to that DN. The DN can be programmed on a flex button at the Executive station with a "no ring" option.
PAGE 109
Executive/Secretary by Exec/Sec Assignment 3-83 Chapter 3: System Features 6. Assign Secretary station flex button as Telephone number {Forced Hands free code} + {Executive station number} to use when Secretary Intercom calls the Executive.
PAGE 110
Executive/Secretary by Exec/Sec Assignment 3-84 Chapter 3: System Features CONDITIONS - An Executive can have up to 3 Secretaries. - If the Secretary is busy when a call is received for the Executive, the caller will receive busy tone. - If an Executive has multiple Secretaries, a Secretary can be selected by 'Secretary Choice' option. There are three options, 1) First Idle 2) Longest Idle. - An Executive cannot be a Secretary to another Executive.
PAGE 111
Executive/Secretary by Exec/Sec Assignment 3-85 Chapter 3: System Features Station Group Executive/Secretary Assign (PGM 241) … see details on page A-104 PGM 241 BTN RANGE DEFAULT EXECUTIVE NUMBER -- Assigns Executive station. 1 - - SECRETARY ASSIGN -- Assigns Secretary stations; enter secretary station range, or press FLEX 1-3 and enter station number to assign. 2 FLEX 1-3 - ICM CALL TO EXEC -- Determines call forwarding when Executive/Secretary is in use.
PAGE 112
External Auto Attendant/Voice Mail 3-86 Chapter 3: System Features Executive/ Executive Access (PGM 242) … see details on page A-105 HARDWARE Digital Phone External Auto Attendant/Voice Mail AA/VM Group The system provides support for an adjunct Auto Attendant/Voice Mail system via connection to SLT ports. When a call arrives for the External AA/VM Group, the system will search the group for an idle port and deliver the call.
PAGE 113
External Auto Attendant/Voice Mail 3-87 Chapter 3: System Features VM Group Assignment (PGM 200) … see details on page A-67 PGM 200 BTN RANGE DEFAULT GROUP TYPE -- this entry defines the type of station group. 1 0:Not Assign 1: Terminal 2: Circular 3: Ring 4: Longest Idle 5: Voice Mail Not Assign GROUP NAME -- this entry defines the name of a group. 2 Max 16 chars - TENANT NO -- this entry assigns a tenant of a station group.
PAGE 114
External Auto Attendant/Voice Mail 3-88 Chapter 3: System Features PGM 203 BTN RANGE DEFAULT SMDI TYPE -- This entry defines SMDI Type. 6 0: Type 1 1: Type 2 Type 1 SMDI CLI INFO -- This entry defines SMDI CLI Information. If this is enable, system sends SMDI with CLI. 7 0: Off 1: On Off Voice Mail Dialing Table (PGM 269) … see details on page A-119 PGM 269 BTN RANGE VOICE MAIL 1 -- Put Mail code sent when the voice mail is to receive call to record a message.
PAGE 115
External Auto Attendant/Voice Mail 3-89 Chapter 3: System Features RELATED FEATURES In-band (DTMF) Signaling … page 3-89 SMDI (Simplified Msg Desk Interface) … page 3-92 HARDWARE External AA/VM system In-band (DTMF) Signaling The system may employ in-band signaling to communicate with an External AA/VM system. When a call is routed to the AA/VM SLT port, the system will send DTMF signals informing the AA/VM of the characteristics of the call.
PAGE 116
External Auto Attendant/Voice Mail 3-90 Chapter 3: System Features PGM 200 BTN RANGE DEFAULT TENANT NO -- this entry assigns a tenant of a station group. 3 1-9 (MBX IP-300) 1-5 (MBX IP-100) 1 TIME TABLE IDX -- Time Table index, 4 1-9 1 PICKUP OPTION -- stations can pickup group calls ringing at other stations in the group. 5 0: Disable 1: All Call 2: Intercom 3: External Disable MEMBER ASSIGN -- this entry assigns stations as members of a station group.
PAGE 117
External Auto Attendant/Voice Mail 3-91 Chapter 3: System Features Table Voice Mail Dialing Table (PGM 269) … see details on page A-119 Release 1.0 PGM 269 BTN RANGE VOICE MAIL 1 -- Put Mail code sent when the voice mail is to receive call to record a message. 1 0: Prefix 1: Suffix Any digits P# VOICE MAIL 2 -- Get Mail code sent when the voice mail is to playback recorded messages.
PAGE 118
External Auto Attendant/Voice Mail 3-92 Chapter 3: System Features System Voice Mail Interface Select (PGM 223 - FLEX 3) … see details on page A-88 PGM 223 BTN VM SMDI ENABLE -- If it is set to "ON, system interfaces SMDI protocol with external Voice Mail, If 'OFF', system interfaces In-band message with external Voice Mail.
PAGE 119
External Auto Attendant/Voice Mail 3-93 Chapter 3: System Features Message Field Definitions Field Description Values cr Carriage Return -- lf Line Feed -- MD Message Desk -- ggg Message Desk Number, AA/VN system Default=001 Mmm Message Desk terminal Range=0001-9999 VM port A Action Code -- xxx…x Called Station Number or Station Calling the VM Group -- yy…y Calling Station Number -- Sp ASCII Space Character -- ^Y End of SMDI Message Control + Y (0x19) The following table p
PAGE 120
External Auto Attendant/Voice Mail 3-94 Chapter 3: System Features CONDITIONS - Selection of SMDI or in-band signaling can be modified using Admin. Programming (refer to Admin. Programming Manual). - Only one AA/VM Group can be defined in the system; multiple definitions may cause erroneous system operation. - The calling number will display with SMDI CLI INFO attribute (PGM203 - FLEX 7).
PAGE 121
External Auto Attendant/Voice Mail 3-95 Chapter 3: System Features VM Group Attribute Assignment (PGM 203) … see details on page A-72 PGM 203 BTN RANGE DEFAULT VM PUT MAIL INDEX -- for external analog Voice Mail groups, an index to the Voice Mail Dial Table, which contains the "Put Mail" dial code. 1 1-9 1 VM GET MAIL INDEX -- for external analog Voice Mail groups, an index to the Voice Mail Dial Table, which contains the "Get Mail" dial code.
PAGE 122
Flexible Numbering Plan 3-96 Chapter 3: System Features Flexible Numbering Plan User access to System resources and features is accomplished using Feature codes or Flexible buttons. The Administrator can select from one of seven different standard Numbering Plans, and if desired, can assign codes for individual functions in the Flexible Numbering Plan. The feature codes are defined in the System's Flexible Numbering Plan (refer to Appendix B).
PAGE 123
Flexible Numbering Plan 3-97 Chapter 3: System Features Prefix Numbering Plan (PGM 111) … see details on page A-17 PGM 111 BTN RANGE PREFIX CODE -- leading preceding digits of some numbering plan code. 1 1-8 digits MORE DIGITS -- number of digits following the 2 (0-4) REMARK Prefix code length + more digit can be 8 at max. Prefix code.
PAGE 124
Green Power Save 3-98 Chapter 3: System Features Green Power Save The system can disable the power of a Digital Phone or SLT (Single Line Telephone) installed in the DTIB/SLIB/DSIU at night or during holiday mode. The power On/Off can be controlled by Web Admin manually or automatically according to the assigned power On/Off time. CONDITIONS - SLT (Single Line Telephone) is supported on DSIU, while Digital Phone is not supported. - If phone power is disabled, calls cannot be placed and received.
PAGE 125
Headset Compatibility 3-99 Chapter 3: System Features OPERATION Digital Phone To change operation from Speakerphone to Headset: 1. Press the [PGM] button. 2. Dial 61 {Headset select code}. 3. Dial the appropriate selection: 0: Headset 1: Speakerphone 2: Ear-Microphone 4. Press the [SAVE] button. To change the device to receive ring signals: 1. Press the [PGM] button. 2. Dial 62 {Ring select code}. 3. Dial the appropriate selection: 1: Speakerphone 2: Headset 3: Both. 4. Press the [SAVE] button.
PAGE 126
Hold 3-100 Chapter 3: System Features Speakerphone/Headset (PGM 121 - FLEX 2) … see page A-25 PGM 121 BTN RANGE HEADSET MODE -- selects Speakerphone mode, Headset mode or Ear Mic Mode. 2 0:Speaker 1:Headset 2:E-MIC DEFAULT Speaker RELATED FEATURES Speakerphone … see page 6-19 Paging … see page 4-16 Hold The user can place a CO/IP line or Station on Hold during a phone conversation. CONDITIONS - After placing ca call on Hold, the station returns to an idle state and the user can make another call.
PAGE 127
Hold 3-101 Chapter 3: System Features To retrieve the Held CO call: Lift the handset; the Station is connected with the held party. ADMIN PROGRAMMING Numbering Plan Feature Numbering Plan (PGM 113) … see details on page A-18 Hold Recall When a user places a CO/IP call on hold, a hold timer is activated. If the timer expires, the held call will recall at the station for the duration of the I-Hold Recall timer.
PAGE 128
Hold 3-102 Chapter 3: System Features ADMIN PROGRAMMING CO Line Data Incoming CO Alternate (PGM 169) … see page A-55 PGM 169 BTN RANGE DEFAULT Incoming CO Alternataive DAY -- 1 Disconnect 1 sec NIGHT -- 2 TIMED -- 3 F1: Busy F2: No Answer F3: Invalid F4: Transfer No Answer F5: Recall No Answer F6: DND F7: Out Of Service F8: Error 1: Disconnect 2: Attendant 3: CO Ring 4: Alt Ring Table 5: Tone 6: Pilot HuntGroup Disconnect 1 sec Disconnect 1 sec Outgoing CO Alternate (PGM 173) … see page A-60
PAGE 129
Hold 3-103 Chapter 3: System Features PGM 173 BTN RANGE DEFAULT NO ANSWER TONE -- If destination is set to Tone, the Error / Busy tone is heard. 5 - - NO ANSWER PILOT HUNT GROUP -- The CO call is routed to Pilot Hunt Group of the original destination. 6 - - NO ANSWER RING -- The call is routed to the same destination again. 7 - - NO ANSWERThe CO call is routed to the transferred station again. Only possible for 'Transfer No Answer' case.
PAGE 130
Hold 3-104 Chapter 3: System Features ADMIN PROGRAMMING Station Data Automatic Hold Access (PGM 123 - FLEX 3) l … see page A-27 PGM 123 BTN PRIME NUMBER BTN -- among My-DN and several Sub-DNs which are assigned to station flex buttons, determines the first-seized DN when the user initiates a call.
PAGE 131
Hot Desk 3-105 Chapter 3: System Features RELATED FEATURES Hold Recall … see page 3-101 Hot Desk Digital Phones can be assigned as Hot Desk (Dummy Terminal) phones allowing Users (Agents) to login to the System. The Hot Desk will become active and will take on the attributes defined for the Agent's Station number. When the Agent logs off, the Hot Desk phone becomes inactive and the Agent's calls can be forwarded to the User-entered destination.
PAGE 132
Hot Desk 3-106 Chapter 3: System Features To login to the System through an inactive Hot Desk Station: 1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button. 2. Dial the {Hot Desk Feature Code}. 3. Dial the Agent's Station number and password. 4. Dial * or press [SAVE] button; the agent will be logged in. To logout through the active Hot Desk: 1. Dial the {Hot Desk Feature Code}. 2. Dial the call forward destination for Agent calls (Dial '#' to delete existing a call forward destination) 3.
PAGE 133
In-Room Indication 3-107 Chapter 3: System Features Hot Desk Agent Number (PGM 131 - FLEX 8) … see details on page A-33 PGM 131 HOTDESK AGENT NUMBER-- sets wake-up time. BTN 8 RANGE 0: Off 1: On DEFAULT Off System Timer Hot Desk Logout Timer (PGM 220 - FLEX 2) … see details on page A-85 PGM 220 HOT-DESK LOGOUT TMR -- Determines the amount of time the attendant receives recall after which the system will disconnect the call.
PAGE 134
IP Trans-coding 3-108 Chapter 3: System Features To Active or Deactivate In-Room Indication: Press the {DN} button; the DND status of the DN will toggle and the LED signal will be changed at the same time.
PAGE 135
Last Number Redial (LNR) 3-109 Chapter 3: System Features CONDITIONS - The system codec for the VOIB can be changed anytime within an IP call. - The VOIB DSP can generate and detect in-band DTMF and Call Progress tones in support of DISA functionality. - For complex trans-coding (g.723/g.729), the VOIB DSP will require 2 channels. OPERATION System IP Trans-coding is automatic.
PAGE 136
Last Number Redial (LNR) 3-110 Chapter 3: System Features OPERATION Digital Phone To use LNR using [REDIAL] button: 1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button. 2. Press the [REDIAL] button. 3. Press the [VOL UP]/[VOL DOWN] button to highlight the desired number. 4. Press [SAVE] or [REDIAL] to dial the number highlighted. To use LNR with [SPEED] button: 1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEED] button. 2. Dial . * Single Line Phone To use LNR: 1. Lift the handset. 2.
PAGE 137
Least Cost Routing (LCR) 3-111 Chapter 3: System Features Least Cost Routing (LCR) The LCR feature is supported using digit-conversion; the rule can be set differently according to the Day/Night/Timed mode or LCR Time. If digit conversion is enabled, the System will seize the CO/IP line after digit-conversion is completed. Meanwhile, the Dummy Dial tone can be provided if programmed. CONDITIONS - The digit conversion apply rule is applied to bin base of digit conversion table.
PAGE 138
Least Cost Routing (LCR) 3-112 Chapter 3: System Features PGM 251 BTN D1/T2 CHANGED -- The CO Group Access Code and digits to be sent to PX in 'Day 1/Time 2' when the dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is 'FOLLOW LCR'. 8 Max 16 digits - D1/T3 CHANGED -- The CO Group Access Code and digits to be sent to PX in 'Day 1/Time 3' when the dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is 'FOLLOW LCR'.
PAGE 139
Linked Station Pairs/Group 3-113 Chapter 3: System Features Digit Conversion option (PGM 252) … see details on page A-109 PGM 252 BTN RANGE DEFAULT DISPLAY CONV. DIGIT -- If it is set to ON, the station LCD is updated to the dialed digits when alerting message is received from the PX after dialing. 1 On/Off Off PRINT CONV. DIGIT -- If it is set to ON, the dialed digits are printed to the SMDR.
PAGE 140
Linked Station Pairs/Group 3-114 Chapter 3: System Features OPERATION This is automatically supported by the system database. ADMIN PROGRAMMING Station Prime Number Button (PGM 123 - FLEX 1) … see details on page A-27 PGM 123 BTN PRIME NUMBER BTN -- among My-DN and several Sub-DNs which are assigned to station flex buttons, determines the first-seized DN when the user initiates a call.
PAGE 141
Loud Bell Control (LBC) 3-115 Chapter 3: System Features Loud Bell Control (LBC) The hardware is equipped with a relay that activates an External Control Contact. The contact is assigned to one of several functions including a Loud Bell Control. If used as a Loud Bell Control, the contact will activate when: • External Page is accessed • Assigned Station receives a call (LBC) CONDITIONS - A Single-Assign Directory Number (SADN) can be assigned for the LBC feature.
PAGE 142
Mobile Extension 3-116 Chapter 3: System Features Mobile Extension A mobile phone may be registered to a station allowing the mobile phone to place and receive calls through the system. DID calls are sent to the user's Phone and the active registered mobile phone simultaneously. Mobile phone users can access the facilities of the system to place internal and external calls as well as activate/access features.
PAGE 143
Mobile Extension 3-117 Chapter 3: System Features To register a mobile phone number: 1. Press the [PGM] button. 2. Dial 52 {Mobile Extension Registration code}. 3. Dial mobile phone index (1 or 2). 4. Dial the mobile phone number with CO access code. 5. Press the [SAVE] button. To place a call from the mobile extension using the system: 1. Dial the DID number of the station, the system will check the CLI information, answer the call and the user will receive intercom dial tone. 2.
PAGE 144
Mobile Extension 3-118 Chapter 3: System Features Mobile Extension Number Attributes (PGM 146) … see details on page A-44 PGM 146 BTN RANGE DEFAULT MOBILE EXT 1 ENABLE -- Enables mobile extension ability. 1 0: Off 1: On Off MOBILE EXT 1 NUMBER -- Mobile extension number. 2 Max 24 digits - MOBILE EXT 1 CLI -- Mobile extension CLI number. 3 Max 24 digits - MOBILE EXT 2 ENABLE -- Enables Second mobile extension ability. 4 0: Off 1: On MOBILE EXT 2 NUMBER -- Second Mobile extension number.
PAGE 145
Multiple Language Selection 3-119 Chapter 3: System Features Multiple Language Selection With the VMIB, the system can support three (3) languages simultaneously. Prompts in the desired languages are loaded into the VMIB memory along with the Language Selection prompts. To assure the proper language is employed, the Language Selection prompt is played when an incoming call is assigned to be answered by a DID, DISA, Auto Attendant or Station Hunt group announcement.
PAGE 146
Multiple Language Selection 3-120 Chapter 3: System Features ADMIN PROGRAMMING Station Data Station VMIB Prompt Language Index (PGM 145) … see details on page A-43 PGM 145 PROMPT LANGUAGE INDEX -- Selected language type prompt is played to the user when accessing the VMIB. BTN RANGE DEFAULT 2 1-3 1 CO Data CO VMIB Prompt Language Index (PGM 161 - FLEX 8) … see details on page A-48 PGM 161 PROMPT LANGUAGE -- VMIB Prompt Index.
PAGE 147
Multiple Voice Mailbox Support 3-121 Chapter 3: System Features Multiple Voice Mailbox Support A station can access any Voice Mailbox by dialing the {VMIB Access} code, the mailbox number and password. Phone users may assign one or more Flex buttons to access a specific mailbox. OPERATION Digital Phone To access a Voice Mailbox: 1. Lift handset or press the [SPEAKER]. 2. Dial the {VMIB Access} Code 3. Dial mailbox (station) number. 4. Dial the mailbox(station) password 5.
PAGE 148
Music-On-Hold (MOH) 3-122 Chapter 3: System Features Music-On-Hold (MOH) When a call is placed on Hold, the System will deliver audio from the defined MOH source. In this way, the connected user can determine that the connection is still active. The system has connections for one music source. The MOH can be either an internal or external source connected to either of the MOH inputs. Additionally, a message recorded in the VMIB can be employed as MOH along with Background Music (BGM).
PAGE 149
Music-On-Hold (MOH) 3-123 Chapter 3: System Features ADMIN PROGRAMMING Table Data Tone Table … use Web Admin (PGM 290 - FLEX 49-61) System Data Music Source (PGM 229) … see details on page A-91 PGM 229 BTN RANGE DEFAULT ICM BOX MUSIC CH -- assigns the music source for ICM BOX.
PAGE 150
Network Management System (NMS) 3-124 Chapter 3: System Features RELATED FEATURES Hold … see page 3-100 Multiple Language Support … see page 3-119 HARDWARE External Music source is connected to MPB music source input. Network Management System (NMS) The Network Management System (NMS) is a Web-based application for monitoring and managing multiple systems using standard Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).
PAGE 151
Network Security & Priority 3-125 Chapter 3: System Features Network Security & Priority The System supports several security and priority protocols. Characteristics that can be established are: • IEEE 802.1p/Q, VLAN - sets Virtual LAN tag and priority for Ethernet frame • Diffserv - sets Diffserv Code Point priority for IP packet • IPSec - enables IPSec to establish IPSec tunnel and encryption of IP packet • SRTP - enables Secure RTP for RTP packet payload using AES (Advanced Encryption Service).
PAGE 152
One Digit Service 3-126 Chapter 3: System Features One Digit Service When a User calls a Station and receives a Busy signal, the User can access the following features by dialing one digit: • Camp-on • Call Wait • Voice Over • Intrusion • Pilot Hunt Call Camp-On Camp-On is used to notify a Busy Station that a call is waiting to be answered. The busy station is notified of the waiting call by a Camp-On tone. The camp-on station is placed in the Hold state while waiting.
PAGE 153
One Digit Service 3-127 Chapter 3: System Features Tenant Data Intercom Busy One-Digit Attributes (PGM 237 - FLEX 1) … see details on page A-103 PGM 237 BTN INTERCOM BUSY ONE-DIGIT SERVICE -- determines if step call is enabled or disabled. 1 RANGE 0:Disable 1:Enable DEFAULT Disable Call Wait Call Wait is used to notify a busy station that a call is waiting to be answered. The busy station is notified of the waiting call by a Call Wait tone. For Digital Phone users, the [HOLD] button LED will flash.
PAGE 154
One Digit Service 3-128 Chapter 3: System Features To answer a Call Wait after receiving the Call Wait indication: Press the hook-switch; the first active call is placed on Hold, and the station is connected with the Call Waiting station. ADMIN PROGRAMMING System Data Call Wait Access (PGM 133 - FLEX 7) … see details on page A-34 PGM 133 BTN CALL WAIT ACCESS -- enable to leave a call wait when a called station does not answer or in DND state.
PAGE 155
Pre-defined & Custom Text Display Messages 3-129 Chapter 3: System Features RELATED FEATURES Do Not Disturb (DND) … see page 3-76 Intercom Call (ICM Call) … see page 4-2 Voice Over … see page 6-33 Pre-defined & Custom Text Display Messages When not available, a user can pre-select a text message to be shown on the LCD of an incoming caller’s Digital Phone display.
PAGE 156
Pre-defined & Custom Text Display Messages 3-130 Chapter 3: System Features CONDITIONS - - Alphanumeric characters are displayed as they are entered. Display Message is cancelled if the User activates DND or Call Forward. Custom Text Display Messages and Display Message status are stored in non-volatile memory to protect against loss during power failure. Incoming Caller Station will display the message.
PAGE 157
Pre-defined & Custom Text Display Messages 3-131 Chapter 3: System Features To define the User Custom Text Message ( ): * 1. Press the [PGM] button. 2. Dial 42 {Custom Message program code}. 3. Enter the Message contents (up to 16 characters, refer to Alphanumeric Entry Chart on page B-105). 4. Press the [SAVE] button; confirmation tone is heard and the new User Custom Text Display Message is stored.
PAGE 158
Pre-defined & Custom Text Display Messages 3-132 Chapter 3: System Features System Attendant To activate Display Messages for other stations: 1. Press the [PGM] button. 2. Dial 051 {Attendant Display Message code}. 3. Dial the desired Station range. 4. To scroll through the available messages, press [VOL UP]/[VOL DOWN] button. 5. Dial the Message number (0-9, or * for User's Custom Message). 6. Dial auxiliary input (hh:mm, mm:dd, etc. as needed). 7. Press the [SAVE] button.
PAGE 159
Registering IP Devices & Fractional Module Tables 3-133 Chapter 3: System Features Registering IP Devices & Fractional Module Tables Registration with MAC Address Using the defined MAC address registration, the system allows IP Phones, DTIM and SLTM devices with matching MAC addresses to register regardless of the Database Protection Switch (DPS) position. OPERATION Registration is automatic.
PAGE 160
Registering IP Devices & Fractional Module Tables 3-134 Chapter 3: System Features DTIM/SLTM Registration Table (PGM 107) … see details on page A-14 PGM 107 BTN RANGE REMARK MAC ADDRESS -- Used to register a DTIM to the System, by entering its MAC Address. (Refer to Alphanumeric Dial Pad entries on page B-105.) 1 - - STA RANGE (VIEW) -- Once a connection is made to the System, the Station number assigned to DTIM/SLTM will be displayed.
PAGE 161
Registering IP Devices & Fractional Module Tables 3-135 Chapter 3: System Features Registration with ID/Password The System can be programmed to register a Phontage or SIP Phone using an ID & Password. Devices with matching ID & Password can be registered regardless of the Database Protection Switch position. OPERATION Registration is automatic.
PAGE 162
Registering IP Devices & Fractional Module Tables 3-136 Chapter 3: System Features PGM 107 BTN RANGE REMARK IP ADDRESS -- Displays the IP Address of the IP phone/Phontage. 3 - - F/W IP ADDRESS -- Displays the Firewall IP Address of the IP phone/Phontage. 4 - - RTP SECURITY -- Enable RTP Security. 5 - - Logical Slot Assignment (PGM 104 - FLEX 2) … see details on page A-12 PGM 104 MAX NO. OF IP PHONE -- that can be registered to the System.
PAGE 163
Registering IP Devices & Fractional Module Tables 3-137 Chapter 3: System Features Registration with Station Number System allows IP Phone registration if the IP Phone Station number matches the Station number designated regardless of the Database Protection Switch position. CONDITIONS - By default, the IP Phone Registration by STA Number is ON. OPERATION Registration is automatic.
PAGE 164
Registering IP Devices & Fractional Module Tables 3-138 Chapter 3: System Features System Attribute (PGM 223) … see details on page A-88 PGM 223 BTN RANGE DEFAULT WEB ADM PSWD ENCRYPTION -- The Web Admin password can be encrypted for security using RC-6 block encryption A Java VM must be installed on the user's PC. 1 0: Off 1: On 0: Off PULSE DIAL BREAK RATIO -- The break/make ratio for pulse dialing through analog CO line.
PAGE 165
Remote Device Zone Management 3-139 Chapter 3: System Features Remote Device Zone Management Remote devices, in particular those not reachable by the System, are managed by grouping devices by various characteristics in a Zone. Placing devices into Zones simplifies management allowing definition of common characteristics to the devices within the zone.
PAGE 166
Remote Services, Managed Net 3-140 Chapter 3: System Features CONDITIONS - The managed network must provide appropriate security, bandwidth and QoS. OPERATION Operation of this feature is automatic. ADMIN PROGRAMMING System Info IP Phone/Phontage Registration Table (PGM 106) … see details on page A-13 PGM 106 BTN RANGE REMARK MAC ADDRESS -- Used to register an IP Phone to the System, by entering its MAC Address.
PAGE 167
Revertible Ring 3-141 Chapter 3: System Features PGM 107 BTN RANGE REMARK F/W IP ADDRESS -- Displays the Firewall IP Address of the IP phone/Phontage. 4 - - RTP SECURITY -- Enable RTP Security. 5 - - Logical Slot Assignment (PGM 103 - FLEX 2) … see details on page A-12 PGM 103 STATION BOARD BTN RANGE REMARK 2 88 (SIP Phone) 99 (IP Phone or Phontage) - Revertible Ring This feature can be used to identify the extension DN especially when a SLT is in use.
PAGE 168
Speed Dial 3-142 Chapter 3: System Features Speed Dial Speed Dial Pause Insertion A pause dialing command may be inserted in a Station or System Speed Dial number. When encountered, the System will stop dialing the Speed Dial number for the assigned "pause" duration. Multiple pauses ([HOLD] button depressions) may be inserted into a Speed Dial number. CONDITIONS - Timed pause is used only with analog CO lines. OPERATION System When set, Pause operation is automatic.
PAGE 169
Speed Dial 3-143 Chapter 3: System Features RELATED FEATURES Station Speed Dial … see page 3-143 System Speed Dial … see page 3-146 Station Speed Dial Each User can store commonly dialed numbers for easy access using Station Speed Dial bins. Each Station has access to 50 Speed Dial numbers. Each Speed Dial number can be up to 24 digits in length and may include special instruction codes. Special instruction codes are: • Flash as 1st digit: Activates dial tone detect.
PAGE 170
Speed Dial 3-144 Chapter 3: System Features To program a Station Speed Dial number: 1. Press the [PGM] button. 2. Press the [SPEED] button. 3. Dial the Speed Dial bin number. 4. Dial {CO/IP Line/Group Access code}. 5. Enter the number to be stored. 6. Press the [SAVE] button. 7. If desired, enter a name (refer to the Alphanumeric Entry Chart on page B-105). 8. Press the [SAVE] button. To program a Station Speed Dial number using the 3-soft-key (LCD display phones): 1. Press the {DIR} Soft key. 2.
PAGE 171
Speed Dial 3-145 Chapter 3: System Features To program a Station Speed Dial number: 1. Dial {SLT Programming code}. 2. Dial {SLT Speed Dial access code}. 3. Dial the Speed Dial bin number. 4. Dial the {CO/IP Group Access code}. 5. Dial the number to be stored. 6. Press for hook-switch. 7. If desired, enter a name (refer to Alphanumeric Entry Chart on page B-105). 8. Press for hook-switch.
PAGE 172
Speed Dial 3-146 Chapter 3: System Features RELATED FEATURES Dial-by-Name … see page 3-60 Last Number Redial (LNR) … see page 3-109 Dial Pulse to Tone Switchover … see page 3-62 Saved Number Redial (SNR) … see page 6-18 Speed Dial Pause Insertion … see page 3-142 System Speed Dial … see page 3-146 System Speed Dial Commonly dialed numbers can be stored by the System Attendant or by the Administrator using Web Admin. for easy access to Stations allowed use of System Speed Dial bins.
PAGE 173
Speed Dial 3-147 Chapter 3: System Features Single Line Phone To dial using a System Speed Dial: 1. Lift handset. 2. Dial {SLT Speed Dial access code}. 3. Dial the desired bin number Attendant To program a System Speed Dial number: 1. Press the [PGM] button. 2. Press the [SPEED] button. 3. Dial the Speed Dial bin number 4. Dial the {CO/IP Group Access code}. 5. Dial the number to be stored. 6. Press the [SAVE] button. 7. If desired, enter a name (refer to the Alphanumeric Entry Chart on page B-105). 8.
PAGE 174
Speed Dial 3-148 Chapter 3: System Features ADMIN PROGRAMMING Station Data Speed Access (PGM 134 - FLEX 1) page A-36 PGM 134 SPEED ACCESS -- gives station speed dial bins access authority. BTN RANGE 1 0:Disable 1:Enable DEFAULT Enable Table Data System Speed Dial Table (PGM 257) page A-113 PGM 257 BTN RANGE DEFAULT SYS SPD DIAL -- The System Speed Dial Digits. 1 Max 32 digits - SYS SPD NAME -- The System Speed Dial Name. 2 Max 16 characters - TOLL FREE -- Assignment to apply toll free.
PAGE 175
Station Call Coverage 3-149 Chapter 3: System Features Station Call Coverage The DN button at a Station can be set for incoming calls only by disabling outgoing calls. If the MADN-type DN button has a delayed ring option, the button will operate as a call coverage button. This feature must be programmed by the Administrator; individual users cannot set this feature. OPERATION If Programmed, Station Call Coverage is automatic.
PAGE 176
System Groups 3-150 Chapter 3: System Features Station Group Stations can be grouped so incoming calls may be routed to an idle station in the group. The different types of Station Groups are described: Release 1.0 • Terminal Group – Calls to a station in a Terminal Station Group that encounter an unavailable or go unanswered will be routed through the hunt process. The call will proceed to the next listed station in the group until reaching the last listed station.
PAGE 177
System Groups 3-151 Chapter 3: System Features CONDITIONS - Station Group calls are not routed to member stations that are in DND. - A call transferred to a Station Group will follow the routing for the group and will not initiate the Transfer Recall process. - Calls to a Station Group receive either a ring-back tone or MOH while queued to the group. - Calls can be routed to the defined Overflow destination according to Forward type, Station, Group, etc.
PAGE 178
System Groups 3-152 Chapter 3: System Features Station Group Executive/Secretary Assign (PGM 241) … see details on page A-104 PGM 241 BTN RANGE DEFAULT EXECUTIVE NUMBER -- Assigns Executive station. 1 - - SECRETARY ASSIGN -- Assigns Secretary stations; enter secretary station range, or press FLEX 1-3 and enter station number to assign. 2 FLEX 1-3 - ICM CALL TO EXEC -- Determines call forwarding when Executive/Secretary is in use. SECRETARY: all internal calls to the Exec.
PAGE 179
System Groups 3-153 Chapter 3: System Features Station Group (PGM 200) … see details on page A-67 PGM 200 BTN RANGE DEFAULT GROUP TYPE -- this entry defines the type of station group. 1 0:Not Assign 1: Terminal 2: Circular 3: Ring 4: Longest Idle 5: Voice Mail Not Assign GROUP NAME -- this entry defines the name of a group. 2 Max 16 chars - TENANT NO -- this entry assigns a tenant of a station group.
PAGE 180
System Groups 3-154 Chapter 3: System Features PGM 201 BTN RANGE DEFAULT GREETING TONE NO -- This entry defines greeting tone number in case greeting type is normal. 3 01-19 Not Assigned GREETING PRT/ANNC -- This entry defines greeting prompt / annc. Number in case greeting type is PROMPT/ANNC. 4 001-255 Not Assigned GREETING REPEAT NO -- This entry defines greeting repeat number. 5 000-100 3 GREETING RPT DELAY -- This entry defines the pause timer before greeting repeat.
PAGE 181
System Groups 3-155 Chapter 3: System Features PGM 201 BTN RANGE DEFAULT SECOND Q. TYPE -- This entry defines the type of second queuing tone. 15 1. Normal 2. Prompt 3. Annc 4. INT MOH 5. EXT MOH 6: VMIB MOH1 7: VMIB MOH2 8: VMIB MOH3 9: VMIB MOH4 10:SLT MOH1 11:SLT MOH2 12:SLT MOH3 13:SLT MOH4 14:SLT MOH5 4 SECOND Q. TIMER -- This entry defines the timer for forward destination.
PAGE 182
System Groups 3-156 Chapter 3: System Features PGM 202 BTN RANGE DEFAULT FORWARD TYPE -- This entry defines forward type. 0. Not used 1. Unconditional: a call is routed to a forward destination unconditionally. 2. Queuing overflow: a call is routed to a forward destination when a queue is overflow. 3.Tmeout: a call is routed to a forward destination when a timeout timer is expired. 4. All: a call is routed to a forward destination when a queue is overflow or Timeout timer is expired.
PAGE 183
System Groups 3-157 Chapter 3: System Features PGM 203 BTN RANGE DEFAULT VM NO ANSWER INDEX -- For external analog Voice Mail groups, an index to the Voice Mail Dial Table, which contains the "No answer" dial code. 4 1-9 4 VM DISCONNECT -- For external analog Voice Mail groups, an index to the Voice Mail Dial Table, which contains the "Disconnect" dial code. 5 1-9 9 SMDI TYPE -- This entry defines SMDI Type.
PAGE 184
System Groups 3-158 Chapter 3: System Features RELATED FEATURES Executive/Secretary … see page 3-83 Music On Hold … see page 3-122 Call Forward … see page 3-15 VMIB Integrated … see page 3-254 Auto Attd/Voice Mail … see page 3-254 HARDWARE Digital Phone Greeting/Queuing Tone Service The System can provide a Greeting tone or Queuing tone when a call is routed to Station Group. When a call is routed to Station Group, the pre-assigned Greeting or Queuing Tone will be provided to the caller.
PAGE 185
System Groups 3-159 Chapter 3: System Features ADMIN PROGRAMMING Tenant Data Release 1.
PAGE 186
System Groups 3-160 Chapter 3: System Features Attendant Group Attribute (PGM 271-272) … see details on page A-122 PGM 271 BTN GREETING TYPE -- Determines the type of Greeting Tone to be used. 1 1: Normal 2: Prompt 3: Annc 4: INT MOH 5: EXT MOH 6: VMIB MOH1 7: VMIB MOH2 8: VMIB MOH3 9: VMIB MOH4 10:SLT MOH1 11:SLT MOH2 12:SLT MOH3 13:SLT MOH4 14:SLT MOH5 1: Normal GREETING PLAY -- Determines the Greeting Play time.
PAGE 187
System Groups 3-161 Chapter 3: System Features PGM 271 Release 1.0 BTN RANGE DEFAULT QUEUING TYPE -- Determines the type of Queuing Tone. 7 1. Normal 2. Prompt 3. Annc 4. INT MOH 5. EXT MOH 6: VMIB MOH1 7: VMIB MOH2 8: VMIB MOH3 9: VMIB MOH4 10:SLT MOH1 11:SLT MOH2 12:SLT MOH3 13:SLT MOH4 14:SLT MOH5 4 QUEUING TIMER -- Determines the Greeting/Queuing Timeout Timer. 8 010-300 (sec) 030 QUEUING TONE NO -- Determines the Queuing Tone number used when Queuing Type is set to Normal.
PAGE 188
System Groups 3-162 Chapter 3: System Features PGM 271 BTN SECOND Q. TYPE -- This entry defines the type of second queuing tone. 14 1: Normal 2: Prompt 3: Annc 4: INT MOH 5: EXT MOH 6: VMIB MOH1 7: VMIB MOH2 8: VMIB MOH3 9: VMIB MOH4 10: SLT MOH1 11: SLT MOH2 12: SLT MOH3 13: SLT MOH4 14: SLT MOH5 4: INT MOH SECOND Q. TIMER -- This entry defines the timer for forward destination.
PAGE 189
System Groups 3-163 Chapter 3: System Features PGM 272 BTN RANGE DEFAULT FORWARD TYPE -- Determines the Forward type to use. 0: Not used 1: Unconditional - call is routed to a forward destination unconditionally. 2: Queuing overflow - call is routed to a forward destination when a queue overflows. 3: Queuing timeout - call is routed to a forward destination when queuing time expires. 4: Queuing all - call is routed to a forward destination when a queue overflows or queuing time expires.
PAGE 190
System Groups 3-164 Chapter 3: System Features CCR Service with Queuing Announcement The System can provide CCR Service during queuing announcement according to the CCR option.
PAGE 191
System Groups 3-165 Chapter 3: System Features ADMIN PROGRAMMING Tenant Data Station Group Attribute (PGM 201-202) … see details on page A-68 and page A-71 PGM 201 BTN RANGE GREETING TYPE -- this entry defines the type of greeting tone. 1 1: Normal 2: Prompt 3: Annc 4: INT MOH 5: EXT MOH 6: VMIB MOH1 7: VMIB MOH2 8: VMIB MOH3 9: VMIB MOH4 10: SLT MOH1 11: SLT MOH2 12: SLT MOH3 13: SLT MOH4 14: SLT MOH5 1 GREETING PLAY -- this entry defines greeting play time.
PAGE 192
System Groups 3-166 Chapter 3: System Features PGM 201 BTN RANGE QUEUING TYPE -- This entry defines the type of queuing tone. 7 1. Normal 2. Prompt 3. Annc 4. INT MOH 5. EXT MOH 6: VMIB MOH1 7: VMIB MOH2 8: VMIB MOH3 9: VMIB MOH4 10:SLT MOH1 11:SLT MOH2 12:SLT MOH3 13:SLT MOH4 14:SLT MOH5 3 QUEUING TIMER -- This entry defines the timer for queuing forward or second queuing announcement. 8 000-300 (secs) 30 QUEUING TONE NO -- This entry defines queuing tone number in case queuing type is normal.
PAGE 193
System Groups 3-167 Chapter 3: System Features PGM 201 BTN RANGE SECOND Q. TYPE -- This entry defines the type of second queuing tone. 15 1. Normal 2. Prompt 3. Annc 4. INT MOH 5. EXT MOH 6: VMIB MOH1 7: VMIB MOH2 8: VMIB MOH3 9: VMIB MOH4 10:SLT MOH1 11:SLT MOH2 12:SLT MOH3 13:SLT MOH4 14:SLT MOH5 4 SECOND Q. TIMER -- This entry defines the timer for forward destination. 16 000-300 (secs) 30 SECOND TONE NO -- This entry defines second queuing tone number in case queuing type is normal.
PAGE 194
System Groups 3-168 Chapter 3: System Features PGM 202 BTN RANGE DEFAULT FORWARD TYPE -- This entry defines forward type. 0. Not used 1. Unconditional: a call is routed to a forward destination unconditionally. 2. Queuing overflow: a call is routed to a forward destination when a queue is overflow. 3.Tmeout: a call is routed to a forward destination when a timeout timer is expired. 4. All: a call is routed to a forward destination when a queue is overflow or Timeout timer is expired.
PAGE 195
System Groups 3-169 Chapter 3: System Features CCR Table (PGM 260) … see details on page A-115 PGM 260 CCR TABLE -- The destination of CCR input digit; the destination can be a Station number, Station group number or Feature code. NOTE: For Feature codes, refer to the Numbering Plan for the applicable codes.
PAGE 196
System Groups 3-170 Chapter 3: System Features To use Queuing Overflow or Timeout as Forward Destination: 5. Dial the {Station Group Number}. 6. The Call is Queued when all Member Stations are in Busy mode. NOTE: The Call will be routed to the Forward destination when Queuing Time expires or Max. Queue is overflowed.
PAGE 197
System Groups 3-171 Chapter 3: System Features PGM 201 BTN RANGE QUEUING TYPE -- This entry defines the type of queuing tone. 7 1. Normal 2. Prompt 3. Annc 4. INT MOH 5. EXT MOH 6: VMIB MOH1 7: VMIB MOH2 8: VMIB MOH3 9: VMIB MOH4 10:SLT MOH1 11:SLT MOH2 12:SLT MOH3 13:SLT MOH4 14:SLT MOH5 3 QUEUING TIMER -- This entry defines the timer for queuing forward or second queuing announcement. 8 000-300 (secs) 30 QUEUING TONE NO -- This entry defines queuing tone number in case queuing type is normal.
PAGE 198
System Groups 3-172 Chapter 3: System Features PGM 201 BTN RANGE SECOND Q. TYPE -- This entry defines the type of second queuing tone. 15 1. Normal 2. Prompt 3. Annc 4. INT MOH 5. EXT MOH 6: VMIB MOH1 7: VMIB MOH2 8: VMIB MOH3 9: VMIB MOH4 10:SLT MOH1 11:SLT MOH2 12:SLT MOH3 13:SLT MOH4 14:SLT MOH5 4 SECOND Q. TIMER -- This entry defines the timer for forward destination. 16 000-300 (secs) 30 SECOND TONE NO -- This entry defines second queuing tone number in case queuing type is normal.
PAGE 199
System Groups 3-173 Chapter 3: System Features Release 1.0 PGM 202 BTN RANGE FORWARD TYPE -- This entry defines forward type. 0. Not used 1. Unconditional: a call is routed to a forward destination unconditionally. 2. Queuing overflow: a call is routed to a forward destination when a queue is overflow. 3.Tmeout: a call is routed to a forward destination when a timeout timer is expired. 4. All: a call is routed to a forward destination when a queue is overflow or Timeout timer is expired.
PAGE 200
System Groups 3-174 Chapter 3: System Features Pilot Hunt Group A Station can be grouped for Pilot Hunt Feature. Users may select incoming calls in the group to re-route to other stations (local or networked), station groups, the VMIB according to ring mode (Day/Night/Timed). A member of the Pilot Hunt Group may have Pilot Hunt Ring Access authority set for call coverage on another member Station in a group.
PAGE 201
System Groups 3-175 Chapter 3: System Features Busy Service (PGM 131 - FLEX 5) … see details on page A-33 PGM 131 BTN RANGE BUSY SVC-- when an SLT extension attempts to transfer a CO call to a CO line it is blocked and the call is released.
PAGE 202
System Groups 3-176 Chapter 3: System Features PGM 173 BTN RANGE DEFAULT NO ANSWER CO RING ASSIGN -- The CO call is routed according to Ring Assign Table. (see PGM 167) 3 - - NO ANSWER ALT RING TBL -- If destination is set to Alt Ring Table and the Table index is assigned, the CO call is routed according to Alt Ring Table. (See PGM 181) 4 01-80 - NO ANSWER TONE -- If destination is set to Tone, the Error / Busy tone is heard.
PAGE 203
System Groups 3-177 Chapter 3: System Features Pilot Group Forward Attributes (PGM 211) … see details on page A-18 PGM 211 BTN RANGE DEFAULT DAY FORWARD TYPE -- determines Day time seting for Call Forward type. 1 Not Used 0: Not Used 1: Uncond 2: Busy 3: No Ans 4: Busy/ No Ans DAY FORWARD DESTINATION -- determines Day time seting for Forward destination. 2 Max. 8 digits NIGHT FORWARD TYPE -- determines the Night time seting for Call Forward type.
PAGE 204
System Groups 3-178 Chapter 3: System Features Pick Up Group A Station can be assigned to a Call Pick-Up group and may pick-up (answer) calls to other stations in the group employing the System’s Group Call Pick-Up feature. Station Groups can be added as Pick -Up Groups with Pick-Up Attributes. Pick-up Groups can be set to pick-up all calls, internal calls only or external calls only. OPERATION To use Group Call Pickup: Dial the {Group Call Pick Up} feature code. To use Direct Call Pickup: 1.
PAGE 205
System Groups 3-179 Chapter 3: System Features Group Pick-Up Code (PGM 113) … see details on page A-19 BTN 33 FEATURE (PGM 113) Group Call Pickup REMARK 564 RELATED FEATURES Group Call Pick-Up … see page 3-28 Push To Talk (PTT) Group Each Phone can be assigned as a member of one or more of the System Push-To-Talk (PTT) groups. The Phone user may log-in or log-out of any one, or all PTT groups to which it is assigned.
PAGE 206
System Groups 3-180 Chapter 3: System Features ADMIN PROGRAMMING Station Group PTT Group (PGM 208) Numbering Plan … see details on page A-75 PGM 208 PTT MEMBER ASG -- this entry assigns stations as members of a PTT group.
PAGE 207
System Groups 3-181 Chapter 3: System Features To initiate a Command Group Conference: 1. Dial the {Conference Command Group Call} feature code. 2. Enter the Command Group number.
PAGE 208
System Groups 3-182 Chapter 3: System Features Numbering Plan Interphone Group Access Code (PGM 113) … see details on page A-20 BTN 56 FEATURE (PGM 113) Inter-Phone Group Access REMARK 534 Paging Group A Station is permitted to access page facilities for each Paging Group, to connect and transmit voice announcements to any or all System Paging Groups. CONDITIONS - Only SADN can be assigned as the member of a Paging Group. - SIP Station cannot be assigned as member of a Paging Group.
PAGE 209
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) 3-183 Chapter 3: System Features Station Group Page Group (PGM 205) … see details on page A-73 PGM 205 PAGE MEMBER ASG -- assign stations as members of a Page group.
PAGE 210
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) 3-184 Chapter 3: System Features CONDITIONS - If enabled, Call Cost display begins after the SMDR Start Timer expires, or at receipt of the first Call Meter Pulse. - Once connected to the system, the call duration includes the total time the call is connected including periods when the call is on hold, in queue, etc.
PAGE 211
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) 3-185 Chapter 3: System Features System Data SMDR Cost per Unit Pulse (PGM 232 - FLEX 8) …see details on page A-94 PGM 232 BTN RANGE CURRENCY UNIT -- The unit of currency used for call cost can be identified with 3 alpha characters for easy reference. 8 Max 3 characters DEFAULT - SMDR Fraction (PGM 232 - FLEX 9) …see details on page A-94 PGM 232 BTN COST PER PULSE -- When metering is provided by the PSTN, the cost per metering pulse can be assigned.
PAGE 212
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) 3-186 Chapter 3: System Features • 5-digit pulse metering count field • 10-digit call cost field • 12-digit account code field OPERATION System For real-time SMDR, records are output after completion of the call. System Attendant To print SMDR records (based on Station range): 1. Press the [PGM] button. 2. Dial 011 {SMDR Print code}. 3. Enter the desired station range. 4. Press the [SAVE] button. To delete stored SMDR records (based on Station range): 1.
PAGE 213
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) 3-187 Chapter 3: System Features To delete All SMDR records (all of SMDR): 1. Press the [PGM] button. 2. Dial 016 {SMDR delete code}. 3. Press the [SAVE] button. ADMIN PROGRAMMING System SMDR Attributes (PGM 232) … see details on page A-94 PGM 232 Release 1.0 BTN RANGE DEFAULT SMDR SERVICE -- SMDR Service Option. On-Line / Off-Line SMDR / SMDR-Interface / Email Service .
PAGE 214
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) 3-188 Chapter 3: System Features PGM 232 BTN LONG DIST CALL DGT CNT -- Dialed numbers, which exceed the assigned LD Digit count, are considered long distance calls for SMDR. 7 07-15 07 CURRENCY UNIT -- The unit of currency used for call cost can be identified with 3 alpha characters for easy reference. 8 Max 3 characters - COST PER PULSE -- When metering is provided by the PSTN, the cost per metering pulse can be assigned.
PAGE 215
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) 3-189 Chapter 3: System Features PGM 232 BTN TRANSFER CHARGE -1. NORMAL CHARGING: When Attendant make outgoing call and transfer this call to another station, the transferred will follow the Transfer Charge Mode. 2. ATD CHARGING: When Attendant makes outgoing call and transfers this call to another station, the call is charged to the Attendant. 3.
PAGE 216
System Admin Programming 3-190 Chapter 3: System Features PGM 232 BTN - SMDR MAIL AUTO SEND MODE -- If the SMDR buffer is full, the system can automatically send a notification by e-mail. Web Only - SMDR MAIL AUTO DELETE MODE -- Deletes SMDR records after sending e-mail.
PAGE 217
System Admin Programming 3-191 Chapter 3: System Features ADMIN PROGRAMMING Station Admin. Access (PGM 121 - FLEX 5) …see details on page A-25 PGM 121 BTN RANGE DEFAULT KEYSET ADMIN -- when an SLT extension attempts to transfer a CO call to a CO line it is blocked and the call is released. 5 0:Disable 1:Enable PGM 226 BTN RANGE USER PASSWORD -- Includes configurable database access in Web Admin., and cannot access Keyset Administration functions.
PAGE 218
System Admin Programming 3-192 Chapter 3: System Features CONDITIONS - Admin. Access Authority is defined only in Web Admin.; it cannot be defined using Keyset Admin. - Admin. Access Authority applies to all Admin. access whether accessed via a Digital Phone, ISDN or IP channels. OPERATION Detailed operation of Admin. access and assigning access authority for each level is given in the Admin. Programming Manual.
PAGE 219
System Admin Programming 3-193 Chapter 3: System Features Web Administration The System database can be accessed and modified using a Digital Phone, the LAN interface or an ISDN PRI line. Both the LAN and ISDN access the System Web server delivers the database as a set of Web pages to the a Web browser. Under the proper conditions, both also allow for remote access to the System database. • For remote access with a LAN interface, the System must be assigned a remotely accessible IP address.
PAGE 220
System Admin Programming 3-194 Chapter 3: System Features PGM 108 BTN RANGE REMARK ROUTER IP ADDR -- IP Address of router for external network (WAN/IP) access. Required for shared voice and data LAN and remote Web access. 3 - 10.10.10.254 FIREWALL IP ADDR -- When the system is installed behind a NAPT server, the fixed IP Address provided by the NAPT server must be assigned in this field. Also, use this IP address for the MFIM address in remote devices. 4 - 0.0.0.
PAGE 221
System Admin Programming 3-195 Chapter 3: System Features PGM 235 BTN RANGE DEFAULT PPP USER ID 1 -- System accepts this PPP ID 1. 3 Max 12 characters None PPP PASSWORD 1 -- The password entered is used to authorize PPP ID 1. 4 Max 12 characters None PPP USER ID 2 -- System accepts this PPP ID 2. 5 Max 12 characters None PPP PASSWORD 2 -- The password entered is used to authorize PPP ID 2.
PAGE 222
System DECT 3-196 Chapter 3: System Features System DECT The MBX IP System supports office building mobility employing Digital Enhanced Cordless Telecommunications (DECT). The DECT Base stations (GDC-400B/GDC-600B) connect to the Wireless Telephone Interface Module (WTIB). The WTIB manages up to 8 base stations; up to 2 WTIBs may be installed in the System.
PAGE 223
System Networking 3-197 Chapter 3: System Features ... Under normal circumstances, the Central MBX IP system controls devices in the Local MBX IP System. However, should the WAN connection between the Central system and remote devices fail, the Local MBX IP-System will assume Call Server responsibility for the local devices. The Local MBX IP-System provides local survivability and may provide PSTN back-up service (Fail-over) for internal calls that normally route over the WAN, based on configuration.
PAGE 224
System Networking 3-198 Chapter 3: System Features ... CM Attributes (PGM 331) … see details on page A-148 e CH REGISTER REQ -- determines if the LM will attempt registration it m 1 with the CM; must be set to ON for proper registration. is hCM t CH IP ADDRESS -- This field defines the IP address of the that 2 will be used by the LM.
PAGE 225
e m ti System Networking ...
PAGE 226
System Networking 3-200 Chapter 3: System Features ADMIN PROGRAMMING Numbering Plan System Numbering Plan (PGM 111) … see details on page A-17 PGM 111 BTN RANGE PREFIX CODE -- leading preceding digits of some numbering plan code. 1 1-8 digits MORE DIGITS -- number of digits following the 2 (0-4) REMARK Prefix code length + more digit can be 8 at max. Prefix code.
PAGE 227
System Networking 3-201 Chapter 3: System Features Voice Network Numbering Plan (PGM 321) … see details on page A-146 PGM 321 BTN RANGE DEFAULT NUMBER TYPE -- Select Number Type 1 0: Net 1: Transit Net NUM PLAN CODE -- 'X' means any digits can be inserted between 0-9. (Select 'MUTE" button to input X).
PAGE 228
System Networking 3-202 Chapter 3: System Features - When the System detects a fatal error from the Network, the System sends digit streams to the Network using the Alternate Dial bin (not a Net Call). - The CO Call Restriction Timer is also applied to Net Call (PGM180 - FLEX 14). OPERATION To configure Net Call Numbering Plan programming: Press [PGM] + 111 (Prefix Code) + (1) + Prefix code for Networking Numbering + [SAVE] To perform a Net Call: 1.
PAGE 229
System Networking 3-203 Chapter 3: System Features ADMIN PROGRAMMING Numbering Plan System Numbering Plan (PGM 111) … see details on page A-17 PGM 111 BTN RANGE PREFIX CODE -- leading preceding digits of some numbering plan code. 1 1-8 digits MORE DIGITS -- number of digits following the 2 (0-4) REMARK Prefix code length + more digit can be 8 at max. Prefix code. CO Line Data CO Line Attribute (PGM 160) … see details on page A-47 PGM 160 Release 1.
PAGE 230
System Networking 3-204 Chapter 3: System Features PGM 160 BTN RLS TIMING -- If Release Timing is set to first release, CO line is released when one party release the call. If Caller or Called Release is set, CO line is released when caller or called party released the call. 8 0: First Release 1: Caller Release 2: Called Release First RLS INC/OUT MODE -- Each CO lines can be set to only incoming call is allowed or outgoing is allowed only.
PAGE 231
System Networking 3-205 Chapter 3: System Features CO Line Attribute (PGM 161) … see details on page A-48 PGM 161 BTN RANGE DEFAULT CO SERVICE MODE -- Determines if SIP/PRI, H.323/BRI or Qsig is selected for each VOIP(or ISDN) lines. 1 1: SIP/PRI 2: H.323 3: Qsig 4: T1 PRI 5: T1 Qsig SIP/PRI DROP TYPE -- LCO line drop type. 2 0:Loop 1:Polarity Reverse Loop FLASH TYPE -- LCO line Flash type. 3 0:Loop 1:Ground Loop FLASH TMR -- CO Flash Timer.
PAGE 232
System Networking 3-206 Chapter 3: System Features PGM 320 BTN RANGE DEFAULT NET CONP ENABLE -- Reserved for future usage. 3 0:Off 1:On Off NET SIGNAL METHOD -- Select the information element type for QSIG supplementary service message. 4 0:UUS 1:FAC UUS NET CC RETAIN -- If this value is set to ON, the signaling of call completion retain mode is executed. Used for networking supplementary signaling type of the call completion.
PAGE 233
System Networking 3-207 Chapter 3: System Features PGM 321 BTN RANGE DEFAULT VOIP CPN INFO -- 1: 001 VOIP CPN INFO 1 2: 001 VOIP CPN INFO 2 3: 001 VOIP CPN INFO 3 4: 001 VOIP CPN INFO 4 7 - - BLF SYSTEM IP -- IP Address of BLF Server used only when MBX IP is configured with other systems for Voice Networking 8 - 0.0.0.0 BLF SYSTEM PORT -- UDP port for sending BLF message to BLF Manager. 9 - 9500 FIREWALL ROUTING -- Select IP address (Firewall IP address or Non-firewall IP address).
PAGE 234
System Networking 3-208 Chapter 3: System Features OPERATION To perform a Screened Transfer to another Station on a different Networked System: 1. Press the [TRANS] button at a Station during a CO Line conversation; the CO line is placed on Exclusive Hold. 2. Dial the destination Station number on another System to transfer the call; the Station on the other System receives a ring signal. 3.
PAGE 235
System Networking 3-209 Chapter 3: System Features CO to CO Attribute (PGM 179) … see details on page A-63 PGM 179 BTN STATION OUTGOING CALL TRANSFER -- while stations are connected to outgoing CO call of first CO Group, the station can transfer the call to second CO group. 1 0: Off 1: On On OUTGOING CALL TRANSFER -- while ATD is connected to outgoing CO call of first CO Group, the ATD can transfer the call to second CO group.
PAGE 236
System Networking 3-210 Chapter 3: System Features Voice Network Network Basic Attribute (PGM 320) … see details on page A-145 PGM 320 BTN RANGE DEFAULT NET ENABLE -- Enable Networking function. 1 0:Off 1:On Off NET CNIP ENABLE -- The name of the calling station is sent to the called System between MBX IP systems. CNIP is displayed at the called party Stations display based on the programming. 2 0:Off 1:On On NET CONP ENABLE -- Reserved for future usage.
PAGE 237
System Networking 3-211 Chapter 3: System Features PGM 321 BTN RANGE DEFAULT AND DIGIT -- AND (Automatic Network Dialing) Digit 4 10 digits - DIGIT REPEAT -- Determine if AND digit is included in the SETUP message or not.
PAGE 238
System Networking 3-212 Chapter 3: System Features Voice Network Network Basic Attribute (PGM 320) … see details on page A-145 PGM 320 BTN RANGE DEFAULT NET ENABLE -- Enable Networking function. 1 0:Off 1:On Off NET CNIP ENABLE -- The name of the calling station is sent to the called System between MBX IP systems. CNIP is displayed at the called party Stations display based on the programming. 2 0:Off 1:On On NET CONP ENABLE -- Reserved for future usage.
PAGE 239
System Networking 3-213 Chapter 3: System Features PGM 321 BTN RANGE DEFAULT AND DIGIT -- AND (Automatic Network Dialing) Digit 4 10 digits - DIGIT REPEAT -- Determine if AND digit is included in the SETUP message or not.
PAGE 240
System Networking 3-214 Chapter 3: System Features • A voice message cannot be left even though the VMIM/VSF is installed at a local System. • If the Call Originator does not answer the Call Back ring within Net Timer, the call will be cleared. • There are two modes: Connection Mode and Connectionless Mode; this can be set at PGM 320 - FLEX 8. OPERATION To perform a CCBS (Call Back): 1. Dial the Station of the other System. 2.
PAGE 241
System Networking 3-215 Chapter 3: System Features PGM 320 BTN RANGE DEFAULT NET CC RETAIN -- If this value is set to ON, the signaling of call completion retain mode is executed. Used for networking supplementary signaling type of the call completion. 5 0:Off 1:On Off BLF USAGE -- Used to set Networking BLF service. 6 0:Off 1:On Off TCP PORT FOR BLF -- TCP Port for sending BLF message to BLF Manager. 7 9000-9999 9000 UDP PORT FOR BLF -- UDP Port for sending BLF message to BLF Manager.
PAGE 242
System Networking 3-216 Chapter 3: System Features PGM 321 BTN RANGE DEFAULT BLF SYSTEM PORT -- UDP port for sending BLF message to BLF Manager. 9 - 9500 FIREWALL ROUTING -- Select IP address (Firewall IP address or Non-firewall IP address). If the destination system is in same VPN then Non-firewall IP address should be sent. Otherwise the firewall IP address should be sent.
PAGE 243
System Networking 3-217 Chapter 3: System Features PGM 237 BTN RANGE DEFAULT DIGIT 1 -- when accessing a busy tone, User may dial for one of the one-touch services.
PAGE 244
System Networking 3-218 Chapter 3: System Features To answer the Call Offer: 1. Press the flashing CO line button while receiving a muted ring. OR 2. The muted ring is changed to a normal CO ring the current call is disconnected; the offered call then can be answered. ADMIN PROGRAMMING Voice Network Network Basic Attribute (PGM 320) … see details on page A-145 PGM 320 BTN RANGE DEFAULT NET ENABLE -- Enable Networking function.
PAGE 245
System Networking 3-219 Chapter 3: System Features Network Numbering Plan (PGM 321) … see details on page A-146 PGM 321 BTN RANGE DEFAULT NUMBER TYPE -- Select Number Type 1 0: Net 1: Transit Net NUM PLAN CODE -- 'X' means any digits can be inserted between 0-9. (Select 'MUTE" button to input X).
PAGE 246
System Networking 3-220 Chapter 3: System Features Feature Numbering Plan (PGM 113) … see details on page A-18 System Data Intercom Busy One-Digit Service (PGM 237) … see details on page A-103 PGM 237 BTN RANGE 0: Disable 1: Enable DEFAULT STEP CALL -- determines if Step Call is enabled or disabled. 1 Disable DIGIT 1 -- when accessing a busy tone, User may dial for one of the one-touch services.
PAGE 247
System Networking 3-221 Chapter 3: System Features 3. Make a Net Call to another Station on another node. 4. Press the [CONF] button when the 3rd party answers. 5. The second call is placed on Hold and an ICM Dial tone is provided. 6. Press the [CONF] button again at the Master Station; all parties will be connected. To clear a Net Conference: 1. Any Station in the Net Conference can hang-up during the conference. 2.
PAGE 248
System Networking 3-222 Chapter 3: System Features PGM 320 BTN RANGE DEFAULT DURATION OF BLF STS -- Duration for sending the BLF status message to the BLF Server. 9 01-99 10 BLF MANAGER IP -- IP Address of BLF Server used only when 0 MBX IP is configured with other systems for Voce Networking (Reserved). 10 - 0.0.0.
PAGE 249
System Networking 3-223 Chapter 3: System Features Message Waiting Indication (MWI) Message Waiting Indication (MWI) is the same as Calling Line Indication (CLI) message wait service. On a normal ISDN call, a Station can leave a Message Wait for an unavailable station on another node (CLI message wait must be enabled). MWI is indicated by the CLI message on the Station LCD panel.
PAGE 250
System Networking 3-224 Chapter 3: System Features PGM 320 BTN RANGE DEFAULT NET CONP ENABLE -- Reserved for future usage. 3 0:Off 1:On Off NET SIGNAL METHOD -- Select the information element type for QSIG supplementary service message. 4 0:UUS 1:FAC UUS NET CC RETAIN -- If this value is set to ON, the signaling of call completion retain mode is executed. Used for networking supplementary signaling type of the call completion.
PAGE 251
System Networking 3-225 Chapter 3: System Features PGM 321 BTN RANGE DEFAULT VOIP CPN INFO -- 1: 001 VOIP CPN INFO 1 2: 001 VOIP CPN INFO 2 3: 001 VOIP CPN INFO 3 4: 001 VOIP CPN INFO 4 7 - - BLF SYSTEM IP -- IP Address of BLF Server used only when MBX IP is configured with other systems for Voice Networking 8 - 0.0.0.0 BLF SYSTEM PORT -- UDP port for sending BLF message to BLF Manager. 9 - 9500 FIREWALL ROUTING -- Select IP address (Firewall IP address or Non-firewall IP address).
PAGE 252
System Networking 3-226 Chapter 3: System Features OPERATION To activate Net Call Forward: 1. Lift handset, or press the [Speaker] button. 2. Dial {Net Call Forward code}. 3. Dial 0 (Remote Forward). 4. Dial the Station Number to forward calls (register). 5. Enter the Station password. 6. Press * or # key. 7. Select Net Call Forward Type (1:Unconditional, 2:Busy, 3:No Answer). 8. Dial the Net Call Forward Station Number on another node. 9. Press the [SAVE] button. To deactivate Net Call Forward: 1.
PAGE 253
System Networking 3-227 Chapter 3: System Features PGM 320 BTN RANGE DEFAULT NET SIGNAL METHOD -- Select the information element type for QSIG supplementary service message. 4 0:UUS 1:FAC UUS NET CC RETAIN -- If this value is set to ON, the signaling of call completion retain mode is executed. Used for networking supplementary signaling type of the call completion. 5 0:Off 1:On Off BLF USAGE -- Used to set Networking BLF service.
PAGE 254
System Networking 3-228 Chapter 3: System Features PGM 321 BTN RANGE DEFAULT BLF SYSTEM IP -- IP Address of BLF Server used only when MBX IP is configured with other systems for Voice Networking 8 - 0.0.0.0 BLF SYSTEM PORT -- UDP port for sending BLF message to BLF Manager. 9 - 9500 FIREWALL ROUTING -- Select IP address (Firewall IP address or Non-firewall IP address). If the destination system is in same VPN then Non-firewall IP address should be sent.
PAGE 255
System Networking 3-229 Chapter 3: System Features PGM 177 BTN RANGE DEFAULT DAY COS -- CO COS in Night mode. 2 00-15 0 DAY COS -- CO COS in Timed mode. 3 00-15 0 Voice Network Network Basic Attribute (PGM 320) … see details on page A-145 PGM 320 Release 1.0 BTN RANGE DEFAULT NET ENABLE -- Enable Networking function. 1 0:Off 1:On Off NET CNIP ENABLE -- The name of the calling station is sent to the called System between MBX IP systems.
PAGE 256
System Networking 3-230 Chapter 3: System Features Network Numbering Plan (PGM 321) … see details on page A-146 PGM 321 BTN RANGE DEFAULT NUMBER TYPE -- Select Number Type 1 0: Net 1: Transit Net NUM PLAN CODE -- 'X' means any digits can be inserted between 0-9. (Select 'MUTE" button to input X).
PAGE 257
System Networking 3-231 Chapter 3: System Features CONDITIONS - To use CO transit-out, the Sub-System User must seize the CO Line. - The Original Station COS will receive toll restriction as configured. - The Outside Caller will hear a busy tone if a Networking Path is not available during the Transit-Out attempt. OPERATION To use CO Transit-Out, perform the following: 1. A Station of a Sub-System seizes a CO line. 2.
PAGE 258
System Networking 3-232 Chapter 3: System Features PGM 179 BTN RANGE OUTGOING CALL TRANSFER RELEASE TYPE -- if outgoing CO call can be transferred to other CO call, release type can be set. If set to None, it is not disconnected. 3 0: None 1: Release after Release Timer None OUTGOING CALL TRANSFER RELEASE TIME -- if an outgoing CO call is transferred to CO call and CO - to - CO call is started, the call is disconnected after release time, when release type is set to 'Rls after Rls Time'.
PAGE 259
System Networking 3-233 Chapter 3: System Features PGM 180 BTN RANGE DEFAULT OUTGOING GRP NO -- Determines the CO Group number used to seize. NOTE: If not assigned, the access code is used as LOOP key. 3 01-72 (MBX IP-300) Not assigned to the 01-24 (MBX IP-100) first access code. 01-72 (MBX IP-300) 01-24 (MBX IP-100) is assigned sequentially from the second access code AND DGT -- Automatic Network Dialing (AND) digit is sent after CO line seized.
PAGE 260
System Networking 3-234 Chapter 3: System Features PGM 320 BTN RANGE DEFAULT NET CONP ENABLE -- Reserved for future usage. 3 0:Off 1:On Off NET SIGNAL METHOD -- Select the information element type for QSIG supplementary service message. 4 0:UUS 1:FAC UUS NET CC RETAIN -- If this value is set to ON, the signaling of call completion retain mode is executed. Used for networking supplementary signaling type of the call completion.
PAGE 261
System Networking 3-235 Chapter 3: System Features PGM 321 BTN RANGE DEFAULT VOIP CPN INFO -- 1: 001 VOIP CPN INFO 1 2: 001 VOIP CPN INFO 2 3: 001 VOIP CPN INFO 3 4: 001 VOIP CPN INFO 4 7 - - BLF SYSTEM IP -- IP Address of BLF Server used only when MBX IP is configured with other systems for Voice Networking 8 - 0.0.0.0 BLF SYSTEM PORT -- UDP port for sending BLF message to BLF Manager. 9 - 9500 FIREWALL ROUTING -- Select IP address (Firewall IP address or Non-firewall IP address).
PAGE 262
System Networking 3-236 Chapter 3: System Features ADMIN PROGRAMMING Voice Network Network Basic Attribute (PGM 320) … see details on page A-145 PGM 320 BTN RANGE DEFAULT NET ENABLE -- Enable Networking function. 1 0:Off 1:On Off NET CNIP ENABLE -- The name of the calling station is sent to the called System between MBX IP systems. CNIP is displayed at the called party Stations display based on the programming. 2 0:Off 1:On On NET CONP ENABLE -- Reserved for future usage.
PAGE 263
System Networking 3-237 Chapter 3: System Features PGM 321 BTN RANGE DEFAULT CO GROUP NO -- CO Group Number 3 01-72 - AND DIGIT -- AND (Automatic Network Dialing) Digit 4 10 digits - DIGIT REPEAT -- Determine if AND digit is included in the SETUP message or not.
PAGE 264
System Networking 3-238 Chapter 3: System Features OPERATION If programmed, Attendant Call operation is automatic. ADMIN PROGRAMMING Tenant Data Attendant Attribute (PGM 272 - FLEX 3 - FLEX 5) … see details on page A-124 PGM 272 BTN RANGE DEFAULT FORWARD TYPE -- Determines the Forward type to use. 0: Not used 1: Unconditional - call is routed to a forward destination unconditionally. 2: Queuing overflow - call is routed to a forward destination when a queue overflows.
PAGE 265
System Networking 3-239 Chapter 3: System Features Digit Conv. Table (PGM 251, PGM 252) … see details on page A-107 Release 1.0 PGM 251 BTN RANGE DEFAULT APPLY T-TYPE -- The Apply time type to be applied when the dialed digit is dialed. 1 0:Unconditional 1:Follow DNT 2: Follow LCR Unconditional DIALED DIGITS -- The dialed digits. 2 Max 16 digits - UNCOND CHANGED -- The CO Group Access Code and digits to be sent to PX when the dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is 'unconditional'.
PAGE 266
System Networking 3-240 Chapter 3: System Features PGM 251 BTN RANGE D3/T1 CHANGED -- The CO Group Access Code and digits to be sent to PX in 'Day 3/Time 1' when the dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is 'FOLLOW LCR'. 13 Max 16 digits - D3/T2 CHANGED -- The digits to be dialed in 'Day 3/Time 2' when the dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is 'FOLLOW LCR'.
PAGE 267
System Networking 3-241 Chapter 3: System Features PGM 320 BTN RANGE DEFAULT NET CONP ENABLE -- Reserved for future usage. 3 0:Off 1:On Off NET SIGNAL METHOD -- Select the information element type for QSIG supplementary service message. 4 0:UUS 1:FAC UUS NET CC RETAIN -- If this value is set to ON, the signaling of call completion retain mode is executed. Used for networking supplementary signaling type of the call completion.
PAGE 268
System Networking 3-242 Chapter 3: System Features PGM 321 BTN RANGE DEFAULT VOIP CPN INFO -- 1: 001 VOIP CPN INFO 1 2: 001 VOIP CPN INFO 2 3: 001 VOIP CPN INFO 3 4: 001 VOIP CPN INFO 4 7 - - BLF SYSTEM IP -- IP Address of BLF Server used only when MBX IP is configured with other systems for Voice Networking 8 - 0.0.0.0 BLF SYSTEM PORT -- UDP port for sending BLF message to BLF Manager. 9 - 9500 FIREWALL ROUTING -- Select IP address (Firewall IP address or Non-firewall IP address).
PAGE 269
System Networking 3-243 Chapter 3: System Features ADMIN PROGRAMMING Voice Network Network Basic Attribute (PGM 320 - FLEX 6-10) … see details on page A-146 PGM 320 BTN RANGE DEFAULT BLF USAGE -- Used to set Networking BLF service. 6 0:Off 1:On Off TCP PORT FOR BLF -- TCP Port for sending BLF message to BLF Manager. 7 9000-999 9 9000 UDP PORT FOR BLF -- UDP Port for sending BLF message to BLF Manager.
PAGE 270
System Networking 3-244 Chapter 3: System Features Centralized Voice Mail This function can support that all voice mail occurred in all systems can be recorded in an external VMS. CONDITIONS - The number of the centralized VMS should use the representative number of voice mail group created in master system. - The numbering plan including the representative of mail access assigned in master system should be included in the numbering plan of QSIG group in slave system.
PAGE 271
System Networking 3-245 Chapter 3: System Features DECT Mobility When one DECT is registered to more than two networked systems at the same time and the user of DECT moves to another networked system, the incoming call to DECT will be routed to the appropriate networked system automatically. CONDITIONS - DECT mobility information is sent through the LAN port of MPB. - The physical port number of the DECT should be same as on whole systems.
PAGE 272
Traffic Analysis 3-246 Chapter 3: System Features Traffic Analysis The System monitors, stores and periodically or upon request outputs various traffic statistics covering System resources. The output from the System can be used to: • Monitor and evaluate system performance • Observe usage trends and recommend possible corrective actions, • Determine possible trunk problems (ex., blocking level too high), and/or • Recommend System upgrades.
PAGE 273
Traffic Analysis 3-247 Chapter 3: System Features To print a CO Group Traffic Report: 1. Press the [PGM] button. 2. Dial 023 {CO Group Traffic Report code}. 3. Select Day Information (0: Yesterday, 1: Today) 4. Press the [SAVE] button. ADMIN PROGRAMMING System Data RS-232 Port Settings (PGM 230) … see details on page A-92 PGM 230 BTN RANGE DEFAULT BAUD RATE -- Establishes the BAUD rate for the RS-232 serial port.
PAGE 274
System Time Management 3-248 Chapter 3: System Features PGM 231 BTN RANGE DEFAULT TRAFFIC -- Defines the serial port or TCP channel used for the TRAFFIC report output. 5 0-5 COM TRACE -- Defines the serial port or TCP channel used for the Trace output. 6 0-5 COM ADMIN -- Defines the serial port or TCP channel used for the ADMIN Report output.
PAGE 275
System Time Management 3-249 Chapter 3: System Features ADMIN PROGRAMMING Table Data System Time Table (PGM 253) … see details on page A-110 PGM 253 BTN RANGE DEFAULT TIME ZONE COMMENT-- defines the comment of the Time Table. 1 32 characters none SYSTEM TIME ZONE -- defines the Time Zone of the Time Table 2 0-73 0: Sys Time DAYLIGHT SAVINGS -- defines Daylight Saving Time of Time Table. 3 On/Off Off RING MODE -- defines the ring mode of Time Table.
PAGE 276
System Time Management 3-250 Chapter 3: System Features PGM 254 BTN RANGE DEFAULT Friday DAY/NIGHT/TIMED ring mode start times and TIMED mode end times. 5 0000-2359 Day: 9:00 Nite: 18:00 TDS: _-_ TDE: _-_ Saturday DAY/NIGHT/TIMED ring mode start times and TIMED mode end times. 6 0000-2359 Day: 9:00 Nite: 18:00 TDS: _-_ TDE: _-_ Sunday DAY/NIGHT/TIMED ring mode start times and TIMED mode end times.
PAGE 277
System Database Backup To USB 3-251 Chapter 3: System Features System Database Backup To USB The system database can be downloaded to USB memory card automatically on MPB based on programmed intervals.
PAGE 278
Tenant Group 3-252 Chapter 3: System Features CONDITIONS - A Station denied access will return an Error tone when attempting to make a call to a particular Tenant Group. - Tenant does not affect the Station Numbering Plan in the system; all stations in the System must have different Station numbers even if they are assigned to different Tenancy groups. - When the Attendant of a Tenant Group sets Day/Night/Timed mode, it will affect only the assigned Tenant Group.
PAGE 279
Universal Answer (UA) 3-253 Chapter 3: System Features Universal Answer (UA) UA allows a user to be alerted via an external loud bell and answer defined CO/IP calls by dialing a UA code. While primarily intended for alternate answering, UA will also function in other modes providing UA in all service modes. Calls will appear on the {CO}/{IP} appearance or a {DN} button. An External Control Contact can be assigned to activate an external Loud Bell to alert users of incoming calls.
PAGE 280
VMIB Integrated Auto Attd/Voice Mail 3-254 Chapter 3: System Features CO Line Data Universal Answer (PGM 166 - FLEX 7) … see details on page A-52 PGM 166 BTN UNIVERSAL ANSWER -- If this feature is set to ON, any station to answer a call on the CO Line by dialing the Universal Answer feature code.
PAGE 281
VMIB Integrated Auto Attd/Voice Mail 3-255 Chapter 3: System Features • Conference Room • Net number In addition, the System will monitor digits for a Station number; if the User dials a Station number, the Auto-Attendant will complete an unsupervised call transfer to the station. CONDITIONS - There are no individual time limits on Auto-Attendant announcements. - The external caller may experience a Ring-Back tone before playback of a VMIB announcement.
PAGE 282
VMIB Integrated Auto Attd/Voice Mail 3-256 Chapter 3: System Features 5. Enter the Language number (1-3, if supported); the announcement “Press the # key to record,” will be presented. If there is already a recorded message in the number dialed, the corresponding message will be played. 6. Dial ‘#’. 7. After the beep-tone, record message. 8. Press the [SAVE] button to stop recording and save the message. To delete a recording: 1. Press the [PGM] button. 2. Dial 062 {Message Record code}. 3.
PAGE 283
VMIB Integrated Auto Attd/Voice Mail 3-257 Chapter 3: System Features VMIB Voice Mail Message Storage When a station activates Call Forward to the {VMIB Access Feature Code}, the call is transferred to a VMIB mailbox or a transferred call recalls to the VMIB, the call is handled by the System’s Voice Mail application. The caller can connect with the called Station User Greeting followed by a beep tone. A remote Caller can record a message and hang-up or dial for further options.
PAGE 284
VMIB Integrated Auto Attd/Voice Mail 3-258 Chapter 3: System Features System Data VMIB-Message Minimum Record Timer (PGM 220 - FLEX 7) … see details on page A-85 PGM 220 CO RECALL NO ANS TMR -- No answer timer for recall CO ring BTN RANGE DEFAULT 7 001-600 (seconds) 30 VMIB-Message Maximum Record Timer (PGM 220 - FLEX 8) … see details on page A-85 PGM 220 BTN RANGE DEFAULT CO FWD NO ANSWER TMR -- No answer timer for forward CO ring 8 001-600 (seconds) 30 Numbering Plan VMIB Access Code (PGM
PAGE 285
VMIB Integrated Auto Attd/Voice Mail 3-259 Chapter 3: System Features PGM 145 BTN RANGE DEFAULT REC-MSG BACKUP STA -- When station has new voice mail saved on the VM internal boards, this information is reported to the assigned Phontage number. Phontage user can backup saved voice mail from VM internal boards to the hard disk of the Phontage program-installed PC. 6 - - BACKUP MSG DELETE -- When enabled, Phontage user can delete all voice mail in VM internal boards.
PAGE 286
VMIB Integrated Auto Attd/Voice Mail 3-260 Chapter 3: System Features OPERATION Digital Phone To assign a {VMAILBOX} Flex button: Press [PGM] + {FLEX} + Button Feature Type(1) + {VMIB Access Feature Code} + [SAVE] To retrieve Voice Mail locally: 1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button 2. Press [MSG/CALLBK] button. 3. Dial 2 to select VMIB Messages; the Mail Box & Password prompts will be played. 4.
PAGE 287
VMIB Integrated Auto Attd/Voice Mail 3-261 Chapter 3: System Features Single Line Phone To retrieve Voice Mail locally: 1. Lift the handset. 2. Dial the {VMIB Access Feature Code}; the Mailbox & Password will be presented sequentially. 3. Enter the Mailbox number (Station number) and corresponding password; if entry is valid, the Number of Messages prompt will be presented. 4.
PAGE 288
VMIB Integrated Auto Attd/Voice Mail 3-262 Chapter 3: System Features PGM 145 BTN RANGE DEFAULT TWO WAY RECORD ACCESS -- When allowed, the station can activate the Two-way record feature to record a conversation. 4 0:Disable 1:Enable Disable TWO-WAY RECORD DEVICE -- Determines the save location of Two-Way recorded wav files: VM Boards, or Phontage. When Phontage is selected, recorded wav files are saved on the hard disk of the Phontage program-installed PC.
PAGE 289
VMIB Integrated Auto Attd/Voice Mail 3-263 Chapter 3: System Features Remote Message Retrieval The System permits remote Users access to their Mailbox. After accessing the VMIB Voice Mail, operation follows the local procedures. CONDITIONS - The conditions associated with Message Retrieval and Message Retrieval Options apply. - The conditions associated with DISA/DID apply. OPERATION Remote Caller To access Voice Mailbox from a remote location: 1. Lift the handset. 2.
PAGE 290
VMIB Integrated Auto Attd/Voice Mail 3-264 Chapter 3: System Features PGM 145 BTN RANGE DEFAULT TWO-WAY RECORD DEVICE -- Determines the save location of Two-Way recorded wav files: VM Boards, or Phontage. When Phontage is selected, recorded wav files are saved on the hard disk of the Phontage program-installed PC. 5 - VM Boards REC-MSG BACKUP STA -- When station has new voice mail saved on the VM internal boards, this information is reported to the assigned Phontage number.
PAGE 291
VMIB Integrated Auto Attd/Voice Mail 3-265 Chapter 3: System Features Message Retrieval Options The user may dial the digit 9 to receive the VM Long Options prompt while in the Voice Mailbox, including during or after a Voice Message or System Prompt except when an option has been selected that requires user dialing. The VM Long Options prompt is: "To play New Messages, press 1. To play Saved Messages, press 2. To set Station Forwarding, press 7 (available only for remote access).
PAGE 292
VMIB Integrated Auto Attd/Voice Mail 3-266 Chapter 3: System Features CONDITIONS - The User must begin dialing within the CCR Analysis timer in response to a system prompt; if the timer expires, the User will receive an error tone and the System will disconnect the call. - When the call sender option results in an external call, dialing restrictions will be applied based on the Station COS.
PAGE 293
VMIB Integrated Auto Attd/Voice Mail 3-267 Chapter 3: System Features PGM 145 BTN RANGE DEFAULT TWO-WAY RECORD DEVICE -- Determines the save location of Two-Way recorded wav files: VM Boards, or Phontage. When Phontage is selected, recorded wav files are saved on the hard disk of the Phontage program-installed PC. 5 - VM Boards REC-MSG BACKUP STA -- When station has new voice mail saved on the VM internal boards, this information is reported to the assigned Phontage number.
PAGE 294
VMIB Integrated Auto Attd/Voice Mail 3-268 Chapter 3: System Features E-Mail Notification The System stores VMIB voice messages and sends an e-mail to the e-mail address associated with the station as notification of the new e-mail. The voice message is attached to the e-mail as a .wav file. CONDITIONS - Voice Messages are stored in the VMIB as well as being attached to the e-mail. The Voice Message must be deleted from the VMIB even if the e-mail is deleted.
PAGE 295
VMIB Integrated Auto Attd/Voice Mail 3-269 Chapter 3: System Features PGM 108 BTN RANGE REMARK FIREWALL IP ADDR -- When the system is installed behind a NAPT server, the fixed IP Address provided by the NAPT server must be assigned in this field. Also, use this IP address for the MFIM address in remote devices. 4 - 0.0.0.0 DNS IP ADDR -- IP Address of Domain Name Server, which MBX IP will use to resolve URLs to an IP address. The DNS provides the resolution after receiving the name from MBX IP.
PAGE 296
VMIB Integrated Auto Attd/Voice Mail 3-270 Chapter 3: System Features PGM 145 BTN RANGE DEFAULT BACKUP MSG DELETE -- When enabled, Phontage user can delete all voice mail in VM internal boards. 7 0: Disable 1: Enable Disable VMIB MSG TYPE -- Messages stored in the VMIB may be retrieved in either a FIFO (first-in-first-out) or LIFO (last-in-first-out) order based on this entry. 8 0: LIFO 1: FIFO LIFO VMIB NEW MSG NO -- Display the number of new messages.
PAGE 297
VMIB Integrated Auto Attd/Voice Mail 3-271 Chapter 3: System Features OPERATION To program Mailbox settings while using the Voice Mailbox: Press 8 (Mailbox settings), the Mailbox Setting prompt is presented. To modify the Password: 1. Dial 2, the Password Entry prompt will be presented (“Please enter your new password and press # when finished."). 2.
PAGE 298
VMIB Integrated Auto Attd/Voice Mail 3-272 Chapter 3: System Features Call Forward from VMIB External Users can activate or deactivate Call Forward for their station. Pressing 7 while retrieving messages will return the Mailbox Set Forward prompt. CONDITIONS - If the User is external (remote), the User must begin dialing within the CCR Analysis time and dial subsequent digits within the VMIB Inter-Digit Timer; if not the call is released. - Mailbox Set Forward is only available for External Users.
PAGE 299
VMIB Integrated Auto Attd/Voice Mail 3-273 Chapter 3: System Features PGM 145 BTN RANGE DEFAULT TWO WAY RECORD ACCESS -- When allowed, the station can activate the Two-way record feature to record a conversation. 4 0:Disable 1:Enable Disable TWO-WAY RECORD DEVICE -- Determines the save location of Two-Way recorded wav files: VM Boards, or Phontage. When Phontage is selected, recorded wav files are saved on the hard disk of the Phontage program-installed PC.
PAGE 300
VMIB Integrated Auto Attd/Voice Mail 3-274 Chapter 3: System Features Delete All VM Messages All User VM Messages can be deleted using the {Delete All VM Delete} feature code. OPERATION To delete all a user’s VM Messages: 1. Dial {Delete All VM Delete} feature code. 2. Enter User’s Authorization code. 3. Dial 1 (Delete All).
PAGE 301
VMIB Integrated Auto Attd/Voice Mail 3-275 Chapter 3: System Features ADMIN PROGRAMMING System Data Direct VM Transfer Code (PGM 113) … see details on page A-21 BTN 89 FEATURE (PGM 113) Direct VM Transfer REMARK 683 NomadSP Message Backup and Delete MBX IP Softphone (NomadSP or UCS Clients) can be notified of voice mail for a Registered Station on MIB boards. Softphone users can check their own voice mail and hear recorded voice mail of registered stations.
PAGE 302
VMIB Integrated Auto Attd/Voice Mail 3-276 Chapter 3: System Features Backup Message Delete (PGM145 - FLEX 7) … see details on page A-43 PGM 145 BTN RANGE BACKUP MSG DELETE -- When enabled, Phontage user can delete all voice mail in VM internal boards. 7 0: Disable 1: Enable DEFAULT Disable System Voice Memo This feature provides several general Voice Memos to provide the System Time and Date as well as Station number, and settings over the Digital Phone speaker or the handset for SLTs.
PAGE 303
VMIB Integrated Auto Attd/Voice Mail 3-277 Chapter 3: System Features Single Line Phone To hear Date & Time Prompt: 1. Lift the handset. 2. Dial {System Voice Memo Announcing Date/Time code}. 3. Announcement for Time is heard, “Date is May 2nd.Time is xx:xx pm.” To hear Station Number Prompt: 1. Lift the handset. 2. Dial {System Voice Memo Announcing Station Number code}. 3. Announcement for Station is heard, “This is station 150.” To hear Station Settings: 1. Lift the handset. 2.
PAGE 304
VMIB Integrated Auto Attd/Voice Mail 3-278 Chapter 3: System Features ADMIN PROGRAMMING Station Data Station VMIB Attributes (PGM 145) … page A-43 PGM 145 BTN RANGE DEFAULT VMIB ACCESS -- Permits station access to VMIB. 1 0: Disable 1: Enable Disable PROMPT LANGUAGE INDEX -- Selected language type prompt is played to the user when accessing the VMIB. 2 1-3 1 AUTO-RECORD SERVICE -- Determines if user can record a conversation with another user (internal/external).
PAGE 305
Wake-up Alarm 3-279 Chapter 3: System Features Wake-up Alarm This feature allows a User or Attendant to set a Wake-Up time or desired time to be alerted. When the time is reached, the System will signal with an audible and visual notification. CONDITIONS - When receiving a Wake-Up signal, lifting the handset will return Wake-Up Answer Tone. - The Wake-Up alarm ring signal follows the Ring Table.
PAGE 306
Wake-up Alarm 3-280 Chapter 3: System Features To erase Wake-Up Alarm: 1. Press the [PGM] button. 2. Dial 046 {Attendant Station Program code}. 3. Dial the desired Station range; for a single station, enter the same station number twice. 4. Press [SAVE] button. Digital Phone To register Wake-Up Alarm: 1. Press the [PGM] button. 2. Dial 13 {Set Wake-up code}. 3. Dial Time for Alarm (hh:mm). 4. For a Daily (Repeating Alarm), dial #. 5. Press [SAVE] button.
PAGE 307
Wake-up Alarm 3-281 Chapter 3: System Features To erase Wake-Up Alarm: 1. 2. 3. 4. Lift the handset. Dial the {Program Mode Access} code; confirmation tone is heard. Dial 14 {Erase Wake-up code}. Press Hook-flash, and a conformation tone is provided. ADMIN PROGRAMMING Station Data Wake-Up Time (PGM 134 - FLEX 8) … page A-36 PGM 134 BTN WAKE UP SET -- sets wake-up time.
PAGE 308
Wake-up Alarm 3-282 Chapter 3: System Features Tenant Data Wake-Up Retry Count (PGM 280 - FLEX 5) … page A-131 PGM 280 BTN WAKE UP RETRY COUNT -- determines the Wake Up retry count. 5 RANGE 0-5 DEFAULT 3 Wake-Up Retry Time (PGM 280 - FLEX 6) … page A-131 PGM 280 BTN WAKE UP RETRY TIME -- determines the Wake Up retry time (min). 6 Release 1.
PAGE 309
Direct Station Select/Busy Lamp Field (DSS/BLF) 4-1 Chapter 4: Intercom Chapter 4 Intercom This chapter provides detailed information covering description and operation of the Intercom features available in the MBX IP System Software. Direct Station Select/Busy Lamp Field (DSS/BLF) When a Flex button on a Digital Phone or DSS Console is assigned as a {DSS} button, it also serves as a Busy Lamp Field (BLF). The LED indicates the status of the associated Station or System facility.
PAGE 310
Intercom Call (ICM Call) 4-2 Chapter 4: Intercom OPERATION Digital Phone To assign a {DSS} button to a Flex button on a Digital Phone or a DSS Console: Press [PGM] + {FLEX} + Button Feature Type(1) + {Station Number} + [SAVE]. DSS/BLF operation is automatic for assigned Flex buttons.
PAGE 311
Intercom Call (ICM Call) 4-3 Chapter 4: Intercom Operation Digital Phone To place an Intercom call: 1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button to receive the ICM dial tone. 2. Dial Station number or press the {DSS} button. 3. For Ring-Back tone, await answer. OR 4. For Intercom splash-tone, speak and await answer. SLT To place an intercom call: 1. Lift the handset to receive ICM dial tone. 2. Dial Station number. 3. For Ring-Back tone, await answer. OR 4.
PAGE 312
Intercom Call Hold 4-4 Chapter 4: Intercom System Data LED Color/Flash Rate (PGM 234) … see details on page A-98 Inter Digit Timer (PGM 222 - FLEX 3) … see details on page A-87 PGM 222 BTN RANGE DEFAULT INTER DIGIT TMR -- Sets the maximum allowed time between user dialed digits; at expiration, the user will receive an error-tone.
PAGE 313
Intercom Caller Controlled ICM Signaling 4-5 Chapter 4: Intercom 3. Replace the handset. To retrieve the held ICM call: Lift the handset; station is connected with the Held party.
PAGE 314
Intercom Lock-out 4-6 Chapter 4: Intercom PROGRAMMING Station Data Forced Handsfree Access (PGM 132 - FLEX 1) … see details on page A-34 PGM 132 BTN RANGE DEFAULT FORCED HANDFREE ACCESS -- when placing an intercom call, a user can change the ICM signaling mode, Tone Ring to Hands free answer mode or Hands free answer to Tone Ring mode.
PAGE 315
Intercom Step Call 4-7 Chapter 4: Intercom PROGRAMMING Station Data Howler Tone (PGM 121 - FLEX 7)… see details on page A-25 PGM 121 HOWLING TONE -- sets Anonymous Call Restrict service. BTN 7 RANGE 0: Off 1: On DEFAULT On Tenant Data Dial Tone … use Web Admin (PGM 290 - FLEX 1-2) Intercom Step Call When the Busy Tone is received on a dialed Intercom call, the User may place a call to another Station by dialing the last digit of the Station number.
PAGE 316
Intercom Transfer 4-8 Chapter 4: Intercom Step Call (PGM 237 - FLEX 1) PGM 237 BTN STEP CALL -- determines if Step Call is enabled or disabled. 1 RANGE 0: Disable 1: Enable DEFAULT Disable Intercom Transfer Users can Transfer an active Intercom call to other Stations in the System. Intercom calls can be Transferred after announcing the call (Screened) or without announcing the call (Unscreened).
PAGE 317
Intercom Transfer 4-9 Chapter 4: Intercom While on an Intercom call, to perform an Unscreened call transfer: 1. Press the [TRANS] button. 2. Dial the Station to receive the call. 3. Hang-up, and return to Idle. OR 1. Press the {DSS/BLF} button for the desired Station. 2. Hang-up, and return to Idle. SLT To perform a Screened transfer of an active Intercom call: 1. Press the Hook-switch. 2. Dial the Station to receive the call. 3. When answered, or on Splash tone, announce the call. 4.
PAGE 318
INTRUSION 4-10 Chapter 4: Intercom INTRUSION A Station User can Intrude upon an active Station conversation. If assigned, when the Station Intrudes an Intrusion Tone is provided, and a conference is established among the Intrusion Station, and the Station and CO/IP party. CONDITIONS • A Station must be enabled for Intrusion feature to work. • If the Called Station has the Auto Privacy option set to ON then the call cannot be Intruded upon. OPERATION To perform an Intrusion: 1.
PAGE 319
Message Wait/Call Back 4-11 Chapter 4: Intercom Message Wait/Call Back Short Message Service (SMS) The Short Message Service (SMS) provides the ability to send and receive text messages to and from Digital Phones equipped with a display including the Phontage, UCS Client, and the WLAN Phone. The text can be comprised of words, numbers, or an alphanumeric combination, and each short message can be up to 100 characters in length when a Latin-based alphabet is used.
PAGE 320
Message Wait/Call Back 4-12 Chapter 4: Intercom Phontage UCS Client Station Message Wait/Call Back When a Called Station does not answer or is in DND, a Station User can activate a Message Wait Indication (MWI) to request a Call Back. A Station may receive a MWI from any number of other Stations in the System. The Station receiving the MWIs can return the calls using the [MSG/CALLBK] button. When a Busy Station is called, the Calling User may request to be placed in a queue to receive a Call Back.
PAGE 321
Message Wait/Call Back 4-13 Chapter 4: Intercom Digital Phone To leave a Message Wait: 1. While receiving a Ring Back tone or No answer on a Call Announce (H or P mode). 2. Press the [MSG/CALLBK] button; a confirmation tone will be heard. 3. On Hang-up, the MWI is activated. To leave a Message Wait: 1. While receiving a DND tone, press the [MSG/CALLBK] button; a confirmation tone will be heard. 2. On Hang-Up, the MWI is activated. To leave a Call Back (queue for a station): 1.
PAGE 322
Message Wait/Call Back 4-14 Chapter 4: Intercom SLT To leave a MWI: 1. While receiving a Ring Back tone or No Answer on a Call Announce (H or P mode), press the Hook-Switch. 2. Dial the {Message Wait/Call Back code}. 3. Hang-up, the MWI is activated. To leave a MWI: 1. While receiving a DND tone, press the Hook-Switch. 2. Dial the {Message Wait/Call Back code}. 3. Hang-Up, the MWI is activated. To retrieve a Station Message Wait: Dial the {Message Wait/Call Back Answer code}.
PAGE 323
Message Wait/Call Back 4-15 Chapter 4: Intercom Message Wait Reminder Tone In addition to the [MSG/CALLBK] button LED, the Digital Phones can be sent a tone as a periodic reminder to the user of MWIs in queue. This tone is sent to the Station only while Idle, and is heard over the Speaker. CONDITIONS - The interval between tones can be 00 to 60 minutes; the 00 setting will disable the MWI Reminder Tone. - The Reminder Tone will continue repeating notification until all messages have been retrieved.
PAGE 324
Paging 4-16 Chapter 4: Intercom Paging Internal/External & All Call Page A Station that is set-up for using the Page features, can connect and transmit voice announcements to any or all of the System Internal/External Page Zones. Stations are grouped into “Zones” to receive Pages directed at each Zone. Stations not assigned to any Zone will not receive a Page including All Call Pages. A Page Ring will be provided to the Page Zone(s) prior to the Audio Connection.
PAGE 325
Paging 4-17 Chapter 4: Intercom OPERATION Digital Phone To assign a Flex button as a {PAGE ZONE} button: Press [PGM] + {FLEX} + Button Feature Type(1) + {Paging Code} + [SAVE] To initiate a Page: 1. Lift the handset. 2. Dial the desired Paging code or press a {PAGE CODE} button. 3. Dial Page Group number. 4. If assigned, after the Page Ring, make the desired announcement. 5. When finished, replace the handset and go On-Hook. SLT To initiate a Page: 1. Lift the handset. 2. Dial the desired Paging code.
PAGE 326
Paging 4-18 Chapter 4: Intercom System Data Paging Time-out Timer (PGM 220 - FLEX 4) … see details on page A-85 PGM 220 BTN PAGE TIME OUT TMR -- Determines the maximum duration of a page after which the caller and Page Zone are released.
PAGE 327
Paging 4-19 Chapter 4: Intercom Two kinds of Page Answer codes are supported: - {Auto Page Answer Code} – When activated, the System will search the available communicated Page Call automatically from External Page to Last Page Group Call. Searching rules: External Page > Page Group1 > Page Group2 > ….
PAGE 328
Paging 4-20 Chapter 4: Intercom 1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button. 2. Dial the {Auto Page Answer code} from a Station; after the system locates the appropriate Station Group, the call it will be connected to the Paging Station. PROGRAMMING System Data Paging Timeout Timer (PGM 220 - FLEX 4) … see details on page A-85 PGM 220 BTN PAGE TIME OUT TMR -- Determines the maximum duration of a page after which the caller and Page Zone are released.
PAGE 329
Paging 4-21 Chapter 4: Intercom VM Paging Users can page to a preferred zone by using the {Personal VM Page} feature code. Before using the VM Paging, users have to record a voice message for paging by using {VM Page Message Record} feature code. Then, the recorded voice message can be paged to a zone. In case of Attendants, they can also use system announcement for paging with {Announcement Page for Attendant} feature code.
PAGE 330
Paging 4-22 Chapter 4: Intercom 1. Lift the handset. 2. Dial the desired paging code or press a {ANNOUNCEMENT PAGE FOR ATTENDANT} button. 3. Dial page group number. 4. Dial desired Announcement number. 5. If assigned, after the Page Ring, VM message will be played. 6. Replace the handset, go on-hook SLT To make a page: 1. Lift the handset. 2. Dial the appropriate paging code. 3. Dial page group number. 4. If assigned, after the Page Ring, make announcement, or hear VM message. 5.
PAGE 331
Paging 4-23 Chapter 4: Intercom Numbering Plan VM Page Message Record Code (PGM 113 - FLEX 88) … see page A-21 BTN 88 FEATURE (PGM 113) VM Page Message Record REMARK 682 Int Page Answer Code (PGM 113 - FLEX 15) … see page A-18 BTN 15 FEATURE (PGM 113) REMARK Internal Page Answer (Meet-Me Page) 547 Page AUTO Answer Code (PGM 113 - FLEX 14) … see page A-18 BTN 14 FEATURE (PGM 113) Page Auto Answer REMARK 546 RELATED FEATURES Internal/External & All Call Page … see page 4-16 Meet Me Page Answer … s
PAGE 332
Push-To-Talk Paging 4-24 Chapter 4: Intercom Push-To-Talk Paging Digital Phone can be assigned as a member of one of the System’s Push-To-Talk (PTT) Page Groups. The Digital Phone User may log-in or log-out of any one or all PTT Groups it is a member of. Once logged in, the User may place or receive One-Way Page announcements to/from other Users who are logged-in to the same PTT group. To place a PTT Page announcement, the User must press and hold the {PTT} Flex button.
PAGE 333
Push-To-Talk Paging 4-25 Chapter 4: Intercom PROGRAMMING Numbering Data PTT Log-In/-Out Code (PGM 113) … see page A-19 BTN 46 FEATURE (PGM 113) PTT Group Access REMARK 524 + PTT Group # ( 0-9) + * (Log out) Station Group Data PTT Group (PGM 208) … see page A-75 PGM 208 PTT MEMBER ASG -- this entry assigns stations as members of a PTT group.
PAGE 334
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
PAGE 335
Alternative Route Selection 5-1 Chapter 5: CO/IP Chapter 5 CO/IP This chapter provides detailed information covering description and operation of the CO/IP features available in the MBX IP System Software. Alternative Route Selection This feature is enabled if there are several paths in order to connect toward a destination System. If a selected path is not available for some reason (All Busy, Line Fault, etc), Alternative Route Selection (ARS) will connect calls using another designated path.
PAGE 336
Automatic Network Dialing 5-2 Chapter 5: CO/IP CO Line Data CO Group Access Code Attributes (PGM 180) … see page A-64 PGM 180 BTN RANGE DEFAULT AND DGT -- Automatic Network Dialing (AND) digit is sent after CO line seized. This feature allows user to initiate CO calls only by dialing CO Group Access Code. 4 Max 10 digits - ARS SERVICE -- If Alternate Route Selection (ARS) is set, ARS digit is dialed instead of CO Group Access code when there is no available path.
PAGE 337
CO Group Access Code 5-3 Chapter 5: CO/IP PROGRAMMING Numbering Plan CO Group Access Code (PGM 114) … see page A-22 PGM 114 BTN RANGE REMARK CO GRP ACCESS CODE (Edit By Range) 1 Start CO Grp Access Code & End CO Grp Access Code - CO GRP ACCESS CODE (Edit) 2 CO Grp Access Code - CO Line Data CO Group Access Code AND Digit (PGM 180 - FLEX 4) … see page A-64 PGM 180 BTN AND DGT -- Automatic Network Dialing (AND) digit is sent after CO line seized.
PAGE 338
CO Group Access Code 5-4 Chapter 5: CO/IP CONDITIONS - This feature can be set for each Outgoing CO Group. - If CO Line has been seized directly, not using a CO Line Access Code, this feature is not enabled. - When Outgoing CO Group is none, a CO Line can be seized according CO Group Access.
PAGE 339
CO Line Flash 5-5 Chapter 5: CO/IP PGM 180 BTN RANGE DEFAULT AND DGT -- Automatic Network Dialing (AND) digit is sent after CO line seized. This feature allows user to initiate CO calls only by dialing CO Group Access Code. 4 Max 10 digits - ARS SERVICE -- If Alternate Route Selection (ARS) is set, ARS digit is dialed instead of CO Group Access code when there is no available path.
PAGE 340
CO Line Flash 5-6 Chapter 5: CO/IP OPERATION Digital Phone While connected to an Analog CO line: Press the {CO Flash}.button, the System automatically will generate a Flash on the CO Line. SLT While connected to an Analog CO line: 1. Press the Hook-switch. 2. Dial {CO Flash Feature Code}.
PAGE 341
CO/IP Line Groups 5-7 Chapter 5: CO/IP CO Outgoing BLF Usage (PGM 171 – FLEX 4) … see page A-59 PGM 171 BLF USAGE -- If this feature is set to ON, flex button LED will be flashing when CO line is programmed on the button. BTN 4 RANGE 0: Off 1: On DEFAULT On RELATED FEATURES Station Speed Dial … see page 3-143 CO/IP Line Groups All CO Lines are included on one Outgoing CO Group and one Incoming CO Group individually. One CO Line cannot be a member of several CO Groups at the same time.
PAGE 342
CO/IP Line Groups 5-8 Chapter 5: CO/IP CO Data Outgoing Group Number (PGM 160 – FLEX 3) … see details on page A-47 PGM 160 BTN OUTGOING GRP NO -- Set CO Group Number to apply to outgoing calls. RANGE 3 DEFAULT 01-72, none 01 (MBX IP-300) 01-24, none (MBX IP-100) Incoming Group Number (PGM 160 – FLEX 4) … see details on page A-47 PGM 160 INCOMING GRP NO -- Set CO Group Number to apply to incoming calls.
PAGE 343
CO Line Service 5-9 Chapter 5: CO/IP PGM 180 BTN RANGE DEFAULT ARS SERVICE -- If Alternate Route Selection (ARS) is set, ARS digit is dialed instead of CO Group Access code when there is no available path. 5 0: Off 1: On Off ARS DGT 1 -- Alternate CO Group Access code to be used when original CO Group Access code failed to find available CO line. 6 Max 8 digits - ARS 1 OGR DGT -- When alternate CO Group Access code is used, this field defines if original digits or converted digits are used.
PAGE 344
CO Line Service 5-10 Chapter 5: CO/IP • Max Ring Time - System releases the CO Line if the transferred/held incoming CO line is not answered prior to Timer Expiration. CONDITIONS - This feature can be set for each outgoing CO line. PROGRAMMING CO Line Data CO Line Data (PGM 160) … see details on page A-47 PGM 160 BTN RANGE DEFAULT CO TYPE -- Displays physical line type of selected CO line. 1 Display Only - SVC TYPE -- Set CO line type as DID or Normal.
PAGE 345
CO Line Service 5-11 Chapter 5: CO/IP PGM 160 BTN RANGE DEFAULT INC/OUT MODE -- Each CO lines can be set to only incoming call is allowed or outgoing is allowed only. 9 0: Incoming Only 1: Outgoing Only 2: Allow Both Both DIALING TYPE -- Signal type can be selected; DTMF, Pulse, R2MFC. 10 0: DTMF 1: PULSE 2: R2 DTMF CHARGE MODE -- If 'FREE', the external call though CO line is not printed/saved to SMDR even though SMDR is enabled.
PAGE 346
CO Line Service 5-12 Chapter 5: CO/IP PGM 165 BTN RANGE DEFAULT CALLING TYPE -- for Incoming calls on the ISDN Line, this parameter defines the "Type of Number Plan" provided in Connected Party Information Element of the ISDN call CONNECT message. 3 0: Unknown 1: International 2: National 3: Subscriber 4: Not Used Subscriber CALLING NUM PLAN -- select connected number plan of ISDN CONNECT message.
PAGE 347
CO Line Service 5-13 Chapter 5: CO/IP PGM 165 Release 1.0 BTN RANGE DEFAULT CLI CONV TABLE -- CLI Conversion Table index. 15 1-9 1 HOLIDAY RING INDEX -- if ring mode is holiday and this is assigned, an incoming call is routed to the destination of holiday alternative ring index. 16 01-80, Not Asg none PGM 166 BTN RANGE PROVIDE DIAL TONE -- If this feature is set to ON, dial tone is provided to networking CO.
PAGE 348
CO Line Service 5-14 Chapter 5: CO/IP PGM 166 BTN RANGE DEFAULT INCOMING TIME TABLE -- The time Table index to be applied to incoming CO Call. 14 1-9, none CO DELAY ANSWER TMR -- For Incoming calls on the ISDN Line, this parameter defines the delay time between Alerting and Connect Message. 15 0-100 (100msec) 0 OFFNET FWD USAGE -- ISDN lines can be set to use Call Deflection/Call Rerouting service if PSTN supports these feature.
PAGE 349
CO Line Service 5-15 Chapter 5: CO/IP OPERATION If set, Outgoing CO Line operation is automatic. PROGRAMMING CO Data CO Line Data (PGM 160) … see details on page A-47 PGM 160 Release 1.0 BTN RANGE DEFAULT CO TYPE -- Displays physical line type of selected CO line. 1 Display Only - SVC TYPE -- Set CO line type as DID or Normal. 2 0:Normal 1:DID Normal OUTGOING GRP NO -- Set CO Group Number to apply to outgoing calls.
PAGE 350
CO Line Service 5-16 Chapter 5: CO/IP PGM 160 BTN RANGE DEFAULT DIALING TYPE -- Signal type can be selected; DTMF, Pulse, R2MFC. 10 0: DTMF 1: PULSE 2: R2 DTMF CHARGE MODE -- If 'FREE', the external call though CO line is not printed/saved to SMDR even though SMDR is enabled. If 'REPORT', the external call though CO, line is included to SMDR according to the SMDR Attributes.
PAGE 351
CO Line Service 5-17 Chapter 5: CO/IP Release 1.0 PGM 170 BTN RANGE CALLING NUM PLAN -- Select Calling number plan of ISDN SETUP message. 4 0: Unknown 1: I SDN/Telephony 2: Data 3: Telex 4: National 5: Private Unknown CALLED NUM PLAN ID -- Select Called number plan of ISDN SETUP message. 5 0: Unknown 1: I SDN/Telephony 2: Data 3: Telex 4: National 5: Private Unknown BEARER CAPABILITY - Select Bearer Capability of ISDN SETUP message. 6 0: Speech 1: Unrestricted 2: Restricted 3: 3.
PAGE 352
CO Line Service 5-18 Chapter 5: CO/IP PGM 170 BTN RANGE DEFAULT OWN CODE -- CO Own code can be inserted before station number when making outgoing call CLI. 13 Max 16 digits - CLI TYPE -- CLI type can be selected. If set to Long CLI, only selected long CLI data is used instead of normal CLI. 14 Normal 0:Normal 1:Long CLI (PGM 135-F10) 2:Long CLI (PGM 135-F11) 3:Long CLI (PGM 135-F12) TRANSIT CLI TYPE -- Transit CLI type can be selected.
PAGE 353
CO Line Service 5-19 Chapter 5: CO/IP PGM 171 BTN RANGE DEFAULT MAX TRANSFER RING TIMER -- Max. Ring Time when outgoing CO is transferred/recalled. 7 001-300 (sec) 120 OUTGOING TIME TABLE -- The time Table index to be applied to outgoing CO Calls 8 1-9, none none Alternate Incoming CO Service If the system cannot answer for an incoming CO call, a programmed service can be provided or it can be routed into a programmed destination.
PAGE 354
CO Line Service 5-20 Chapter 5: CO/IP - If the destination is a Ring Table, all features of the Ring Table can be used together. - If select prompt usage, the prompts will be played and follows routing destination. OPERATION If set, Alternate Incoming CO Service operation is automatic. PROGRAMMING CO Line Data CO Line Data (PGM 160) … see details on page A-47 PGM 160 BTN RANGE DEFAULT CO TYPE -- Displays physical line type of selected CO line.
PAGE 355
CO Line Service 5-21 Chapter 5: CO/IP PGM 160 BTN RANGE DEFAULT INC/OUT MODE -- Each CO lines can be set to only incoming call is allowed or outgoing is allowed only. 9 0: Incoming Only 1: Outgoing Only 2: Allow Both Both DIALING TYPE -- Signal type can be selected; DTMF, Pulse, R2MFC. 10 0: DTMF 1: PULSE 2: R2 DTMF CHARGE MODE -- If 'FREE', the external call though CO line is not printed/saved to SMDR even though SMDR is enabled.
PAGE 356
CO Line Service 5-22 Chapter 5: CO/IP PGM 165 BTN RANGE DEFAULT CALLING TYPE -- for Incoming calls on the ISDN Line, this parameter defines the "Type of Number Plan" provided in Connected Party Information Element of the ISDN call CONNECT message. 3 0: Unknown 1: International 2: National 3: Subscriber 4: Not Used Subscriber CALLING NUM PLAN -- select connected number plan of ISDN CONNECT message.
PAGE 357
CO Line Service 5-23 Chapter 5: CO/IP PGM 165 Release 1.0 BTN RANGE DEFAULT CLI CONV TABLE -- CLI Conversion Table index. 15 1-9 1 HOLIDAY RING INDEX -- if ring mode is holiday and this is assigned, an incoming call is routed to the destination of holiday alternative ring index. 16 01-80, Not Asg none PGM 166 BTN RANGE PROVIDE DIAL TONE -- If this feature is set to ON, dial tone is provided to networking CO.
PAGE 358
CO Line Service 5-24 Chapter 5: CO/IP PGM 166 BTN RANGE DEFAULT INCOMING TIME TABLE -- The time Table index to be applied to incoming CO Call. 14 1-9, none CO DELAY ANSWER TMR -- For Incoming calls on the ISDN Line, this parameter defines the delay time between Alerting and Connect Message. 15 0-100 (100msec) 0 OFFNET FWD USAGE -- ISDN lines can be set to use Call Deflection/Call Rerouting service if PSTN supports these feature.
PAGE 359
CO Line Service 5-25 Chapter 5: CO/IP PGM 181 BTN RANGE DEFAULT FEATURE CODE -- If set to Feature Code and valid feature code is assigned, then assigned feature is activated when there is an incoming call. NOTE: Feature Code is not applied to rerouted calls. 3 Valid Feature Code (Refer to PGM115) - FEATURE DELAY -- If Service type is set to Feature code, it can be delayed.
PAGE 360
CO Line Service 5-26 Chapter 5: CO/IP CO Line Data (PGM 160) … see details on page A-47 PGM 160 BTN RANGE DEFAULT CO TYPE -- Displays physical line type of selected CO line. 1 Display Only - SVC TYPE -- Set CO line type as DID or Normal. 2 0:Normal 1:DID Normal OUTGOING GRP NO -- Set CO Group Number to apply to outgoing calls. 3 01-72, none (MBX IP-300) 01-24, none (MBX IP-100) 01 INCOMING GRP NO -- Set CO Group Number to apply to incoming calls.
PAGE 361
CO Line Service 5-27 Chapter 5: CO/IP PGM 160 BTN RANGE DEFAULT CHARGE MODE -- If 'FREE', the external call though CO line is not printed/saved to SMDR even though SMDR is enabled. If 'REPORT', the external call though CO, line is included to SMDR according to the SMDR Attributes. 11 0: Free 1: Report Report METERING TYPE -- According to PSTN service type, metering type can be selected among 00-12 to manage call charge. 01-06 can be applied to LCO lines, 07-12 can be applied to ISDN lines.
PAGE 362
CO Line Service 5-28 Chapter 5: CO/IP PGM 173 BTN RANGE DEFAULT NO ANSWER TONE -- If destination is set to Tone, the Error / Busy tone is heard. 5 - - NO ANSWER PILOT HUNT GROUP -- The CO call is routed to Pilot Hunt Group of the original destination. 6 - - NO ANSWER RING -- The call is routed to the same destination again. 7 - - NO ANSWERThe CO call is routed to the transferred station again. Only possible for 'Transfer No Answer' case.
PAGE 363
CO Line Service 5-29 Chapter 5: CO/IP CO COS The permission/restriction level can be set for each CO line. If an Internal user with lower-level permissions attempts a call or trunk dials, COS will be applied. OPERATION If set, CO COS operation is automatic. PROGRAMMING CO Line Data CO COS Assign (PGM 177) … see details on page A-63 PGM 177 BTN RANGE DEFAULT DAY COS -- CO COS in Day mode. 1 00-15 0 DAY COS -- CO COS in Night mode. 2 00-15 0 DAY COS -- CO COS in Timed mode.
PAGE 364
CO Line Service 5-30 Chapter 5: CO/IP PGM 251 BTN DAY CHANGED -- The CO Group Access Code and digits to be sent to PX in Day when the dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is 'FOLLOW DNT'.
PAGE 365
CO Line Service 5-31 Chapter 5: CO/IP PGM 251 BTN RANGE DEFAULT LCR TIME INDEX -- LCR Time Table Index. 17 1-9, none none NAME -- When DID destination starts to ring, the name is displayed on the ringing station's LCD. 18 Max 16 digits - APPLY OPTION -- The Apply Option can be applied according to the caller.
PAGE 366
CO Line Service 5-32 Chapter 5: CO/IP PGM 165 BTN CALLING NUM PLAN -- select connected number plan of ISDN CONNECT message. 4 0: Unknown 1: I SDN/Telephony 2: Data 3: Telex 4: National 5: Private Unknown SEND PROGRESS IND -- if this feature is set to ALL, Progress Indicator is sent to the ISDN PSTN about All Message. If this feature is set to ALERTING, Progress Indicator is sent to the ISDN PSTN about Alerting Message.
PAGE 367
CO Line Service 5-33 Chapter 5: CO/IP Release 1.0 PGM 166 BTN RANGE PROVIDE DIAL TONE -- If this feature is set to ON, dial tone is provided to networking CO. 1 0: Off 1: On Off BLF USAGE -- If this feature is set to ON, flex button LED will be flashing when CO line is programmed on the button. 2 0: Off 1: On On UNSUP CONF ENTEND -- If this feature is set to ON, unsupervised conference timer can be extended by dial feature code after warning tone is heard.
PAGE 368
CO Line Service 5-34 Chapter 5: CO/IP PGM 166 BTN RANGE DEFAULT CO DELAY ANSWER TMR -- For Incoming calls on the ISDN Line, this parameter defines the delay time between Alerting and Connect Message. 15 0-100 (100msec) 0 OFFNET FWD USAGE -- ISDN lines can be set to use Call Deflection/Call Rerouting service if PSTN supports these feature.
PAGE 369
CO/IP LINE PRESET FORWARD 5-35 Chapter 5: CO/IP OPERATION If programmed, DID/DISA Restriction status is displayed to station's LCD. To change DID/DISA restriction status from each station terminal(toggle): Dial the {DID/DISA Restriction Feature Code}. PROGRAMMING Station Data DID/DISA Restriction (PGM 134 - FLEX 12) … see details on page A-36 PGM 134 BTN DID DISA RESTRICTION -- If set to ON, incoming DID or DISA ring to DN is restricted.
PAGE 370
CO/IP LINE PRESET FORWARD 5-36 Chapter 5: CO/IP - CO/IP line Preset Forward destination cannot be a VM Group. - CO/IP line Preset Forward is not applied to the DID line. OPERATION System If set, CO/IP Line Preset Forward is automatic. PROGRAMMING CO Line Data CO Service Type (PGM 160 – FLEX 2) … see details on page A-47 PGM 160 SVC TYPE -- Set CO line type as DID or Normal.
PAGE 371
CO OWN CODE SERVICE 5-37 Chapter 5: CO/IP Alternative CO Ring Table (PGM 181) … see details on page A-66 PGM 181 BTN RANGE DEFAULT SERVICE TYPE -- If set as 0-2, ring option is applied to ring assigned stations. Otherwise, if set to 3, feature code is activated for incoming calls. 1 0: All Ring 1: First Idle 2: Circular 3: Feature Code All Ring CO RING ASSIGN -- Destination stations can be edited using a range or one by one.
PAGE 372
CO/IP Ring Assignment 5-38 Chapter 5: CO/IP Outgoing CO Own Code (PGM 170 - FLEX 12) … see details on page A-56 PGM 170 REPRESENTATIVE CLI -- When 'Use Represent CID'(PGM170-F10) is set to ON, representative CLI is sent when making outgoing call regardless of other CLI attribute. BTN 12 RANGE Max 16 digits DEFAULT - Incoming CO Own Code (PGM 165 - FLEX 9) … see details on page A-51 PGM 165 OWN CODE -- Own Code.
PAGE 373
CO/IP Ring Assignment 5-39 Chapter 5: CO/IP PROGRAMMING CO Line Data CO Ring Table (PGM 167) … see details on page A-54 PGM 167 BTN RANGE DEFAULT SERVICE TYPE -- If service type is set as 0-2, ring option is applied to ring assigned stations. Otherwise, if service type is set to 3, feature code is activated on incoming call.
PAGE 374
CO/IP Ring Assignment 5-40 Chapter 5: CO/IP PGM 253 BTN RANGE DEFAULT DAYLIGHT SAVINGS -- defines Daylight Saving Time of Time Table. 3 On/Off Off RING MODE -- defines the ring mode of Time Table. 4 0: Day 1: Night 2: Timed 0:Day AUTO RING MODE -- defines the Auto Ring mode of the Time Table. 5 On/Off Off Weekly Time Table (PGM 254) … see details on page A-111 PGM 254 BTN RANGE DEFAULT Monday DAY/NIGHT/TIMED ring mode start times and TIMED mode end times.
PAGE 375
CO Line Release Guard Time 5-41 Chapter 5: CO/IP PGM 254 BTN RANGE DEFAULT Saturday DAY/NIGHT/TIMED ring mode start times and TIMED mode end times. 6 0000-2359 Day: 9:00 Nite: 18:00 TDS: _-_ TDE: _-_ Sunday DAY/NIGHT/TIMED ring mode start times and TIMED mode end times. 7 0000-2359 Day: 9:00 Nite: 18:00 TDS: _-_ TDE: _-_ Holiday Time Table (PGM 256) … see details on page A-113 PGM 256 BTN RANGE DEFAULT CALENDAR TYPE -- Defines Calendar Type for Holiday Table.
PAGE 376
CO Ring Detect 5-42 Chapter 5: CO/IP PROGRAMMING CO Line Data Incoming CO Release Guard Timer (PGM 166 - FLEX 8) … see details on page A-52 PGM 166 BTN RLS GUARD TIME -- If CO release signaling is not completed successfully, CO line is disconnected when timer expires.
PAGE 377
CO Transit Service 5-43 Chapter 5: CO/IP PROGRAMMING System Data LCO Ring ON Timer (PGM 221 - FLEX 4) … see details on page A-86 PGM 221 BTN LCO RING ON TMR -- sets the 'ON' time of the incoming ring cycle for System Ring Detect to recognize the incoming call.
PAGE 378
CO Transit Service 5-44 Chapter 5: CO/IP PROGRAMMING CO Line Data CO to CO Attributes (PGM 179) … see details on page A-63 PGM 179 BTN STATION OUTGOING CALL TRANSFER -- while stations are connected to outgoing CO call of first CO Group, the station can transfer the call to second CO group. 1 0: Off 1: On On OUTGOING CALL TRANSFER -- while ATD is connected to outgoing CO call of first CO Group, the ATD can transfer the call to second CO group.
PAGE 379
Dial Pulse Signaling 5-45 Chapter 5: CO/IP Dial Pulse Signaling An Analog CO line will send dial Pulse Signals to the Central Office. If programmed as a Pulse CO line, the System will send open loop pulses at 10 pps with the assigned Break/Make Ratio. CONDITIONS - The Break/Make Ratio is System programmable as 60/40 , 66/33 or 50/50. OPERATION System Operation of this feature is automatic when programmed.
PAGE 380
Direct Inward Dial (DID) 5-46 Chapter 5: CO/IP Direct Inward Dial (DID) A Carrier Service, known as Direct Inward Dial (DID), sends digits to the System so that the call may be routed directly to a Specific Station or System Facility. DID service is available over digital and packet networks. ISDN lines can provide two-way, incoming DID and normal Outgoing Service, and requires no special signaling.
PAGE 381
Direct Inward Dial (DID) 5-47 Chapter 5: CO/IP CO Line Data CO Line Attribute (PGM160) … see details on page A-47 PGM 160 Release 1.0 BTN RANGE DEFAULT CO TYPE -- Displays physical line type of selected CO line. 1 Display Only - SVC TYPE -- Set CO line type as DID or Normal. 2 0:Normal 1:DID Normal OUTGOING GRP NO -- Set CO Group Number to apply to outgoing calls. 3 01-72, none (MBX IP-300) 01-24, none (MBX IP-100) 01 INCOMING GRP NO -- Set CO Group Number to apply to incoming calls.
PAGE 382
Direct Inward Dial (DID) 5-48 Chapter 5: CO/IP PGM 160 BTN RANGE DEFAULT CHARGE MODE -- If 'FREE', the external call though CO line is not printed/saved to SMDR even though SMDR is enabled. If 'REPORT', the external call though CO, line is included to SMDR according to the SMDR Attributes. 11 0: Free 1: Report Report METERING TYPE -- According to PSTN service type, metering type can be selected among 00-12 to manage call charge.
PAGE 383
Direct Inward Dial (DID) 5-49 Chapter 5: CO/IP Numbering Plan Feature Numbering Plan (PGM 113) … see details on page A-18 Table Data Digit Conversion Table (PGM 251/252) … see details on page A-107 Release 1.0 PGM 251 BTN RANGE DEFAULT APPLY T-TYPE -- The Apply time type to be applied when the dialed digit is dialed. 1 0:Unconditional 1:Follow DNT 2: Follow LCR Unconditional DIALED DIGITS -- The dialed digits.
PAGE 384
Direct Inward Dial (DID) 5-50 Chapter 5: CO/IP PGM 251 BTN RANGE D2/T3 CHANGED -- The CO Group Access Code and digits to be sent to PX in 'Day 2/Time 3' when the dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is 'FOLLOW LCR'. 12 Max 16 digits - D3/T1 CHANGED -- The CO Group Access Code and digits to be sent to PX in 'Day 3/Time 1' when the dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is 'FOLLOW LCR'.
PAGE 385
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) 5-51 Chapter 5: CO/IP Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Each CO/IP path may be assigned for DISA Service, which allows an Incoming Caller to gain access to System resources and/or features. The System will answer the outside call and provide the User Intercom Dial tone or route the call based on the VMIB Auto Attendant announcement settings where Caller Controlled Routing (CCR) may be defined. The DISA caller may then access the desired resource using dial codes.
PAGE 386
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) 5-52 Chapter 5: CO/IP OPERATION System Incoming calls enabled for DISA service: • The System will recognize the Incoming call. • The System will answer the call and connect the caller to the Intercom Dial tone or AA announcement. • The Call will be processed based on the entered digits/programming. DISA Caller To remotely access System resources: 1. Place call to the System DISA facility. 2. On receipt of the Intercom Dial tone/AA Announcement, dial as desired.
PAGE 387
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) 5-53 Chapter 5: CO/IP DISA Account Code (PGM 168 - FLEX 2) … see details on page A-55 PGM 168 BTN DISA TO CO PASSWORD -- When making CO-to-CO call from DISA line, password can be requested. 2 RANGE 0: Off 1: On DEFAULT Off DISA Retry Count (PGM 168 - FLEX 3) … see details on page A-55 PGM 168 BTN DISA RETRY COUNT -- When DISA call is failed to route desired destination, the call can be retried as much as Retry Count.
PAGE 388
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) 5-54 Chapter 5: CO/IP PGM 179 BTN RANGE DEFAULT INCOMING CALL TRANSFER RELEASE TYPE -- If incoming CO call can be transferred to other CO call, release type can be set. If set to None, it is not disconnected.
PAGE 389
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) Signal Sending 5-55 Chapter 5: CO/IP DISA Supervision Timer (PGM 166 - FLEX 12) … see details on page A-52 PGM 166 DISA SUPERVISION TMR -- DISA Supervision Timer. BTN 12 RANGE 1-9 (sec) DEFAULT 2 VMIB Play Delay Timer (PGM 166 - FLEX 13) … see details on page A-52 PGM 166 BTN VMIB PLAY DELAY TMR -- Determines the amount of time paused before playing VMIB announcement.
PAGE 390
H.323 Multi Route Service 5-56 Chapter 5: CO/IP H.323 Multi Route Service The system can set-up several destination IPs for one prefix. The destination IP is selected circularly when user tries to make a H.323 call. CONDITIONS - This feature is for only VoIP (H.323). OPERATION Operation of this feature is automatic when programmed. PROGRAMMING H.323 H.323 Route Attribute (PGM 360) … see details on page A-150 PGM 360 BTN RANGE DEFAULT DIGIT (1) -- destination numbers associated with the H.
PAGE 391
Incoming Calling Line ID (ICLID) Call Routing 5-57 Chapter 5: CO/IP PGM 361 BTN RANGE DEFAULT G.711U CODEC -- usage of G.711U Codec Type. 6 0:Not Use 1:Use Not Use G.729 CODEC -- usage of G.729 Codec Type. 7 0:Not Use 1:Use Not Use G.723 CODEC -- usage of G.723.1 Codec Type. 8 0:Not Use 1:Use Not Use GK USED -- used to determine if Gatekeeper will be used. 9 0:Off 1:On Off H.
PAGE 392
Incoming Calling Line ID (ICLID) Call Routing 5-58 Chapter 5: CO/IP OPERATION System The System will implement routing automatically based on database entries and the received ICLID.
PAGE 393
Incoming Calling Line ID (ICLID) Call Routing 5-59 Chapter 5: CO/IP CO Ring Assign Table (PGM 167) … see details on page A-54 PGM 167 BTN RANGE DEFAULT SERVICE TYPE -- If service type is set as 0-2, ring option is applied to ring assigned stations. Otherwise, if service type is set to 3, feature code is activated on incoming call.
PAGE 394
IP Trunking 5-60 Chapter 5: CO/IP PGM 262 BTN RANGE DEFAULT NIGHT RING INDEX -- The index to be routed in Night; the Alternative Ring Index (PGM 181). 5 1-80 - TIMED RING INDEX -- The index to be routed in Timed; the Alternative Ring Index (PGM 181). 6 1-80 - TENANT NO -- The tenant number to be applied the ICLID. 7 1-9 (MBX IP-300) 1-5 (MBX IP-100) 1 IP Trunking H.323 v4 Service When assigned to support H.323 protocol, VoIP channels provide protocol conversion between H.323 v4 and SIP.
PAGE 395
IP Trunking 5-61 Chapter 5: CO/IP PROGRAMMING H.323 H.323 Call Setup (PGM 361) … see details on page A-151 PGM 361 BTN RANGE DEFAULT SETUP MODE -- H.323 IP calls can be set-up using the H.323 Normal or Fast Start mode. 1 0:Normal Fash Mode 1:Fash Mode TUNNEL MODE -- H.323 IP calls can be set-up using the H.245 Encapsulation (Tunneling). 2 0:Off 1:On On DTMF SEND MODE -- during a connection, DTMF digits can be sent In-band or Out of band (H.245).
PAGE 396
IP Trunking 5-62 Chapter 5: CO/IP Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Service When assigned to support Session Initiation Protocol (SIP), VoIP channels provide protocol conversion between SIP and H.323. This permits the VoIP channel to connect to external SIP Networks for call services.
PAGE 397
IP WAN Dialing After Answer 5-63 Chapter 5: CO/IP IP WAN Dialing After Answer The System permits sending and receiving DTMF signals after connecting to an external VoIP party. The DTMF signal can be DTMF tone, Text String, or DTMF protocol (H.323 specification) based on System Programming. CONDITIONS - DTMF digits will not be recognized unless the connected VoIP party is transmitting. - DTMF mode can be assigned in CO Line Group base. 3.
PAGE 398
IP WAN Dialing After Answer 5-64 Chapter 5: CO/IP H.323 Call Setup (PGM 361) … see details on page A-151 PGM 361 BTN RANGE DEFAULT SETUP MODE -- H.323 IP calls can be set-up using the H.323 Normal or Fast Start mode. 1 0:Normal Fash Mode 1:Fash Mode TUNNEL MODE -- H.323 IP calls can be set-up using the H.245 Encapsulation (Tunneling). 2 0:Off 1:On On DTMF SEND MODE -- during a connection, DTMF digits can be sent In-band or Out of band (H.245).
PAGE 399
Integrated Service Digital Network (ISDN) 5-65 Chapter 5: CO/IP Integrated Service Digital Network (ISDN) The System supports both Basic Rate Interface (BRI) and Primary Rate Interface (PRI) ISDN circuits. ISDN Advice of Charge (AOC) When ISDN Advice of Charge (AOC) service is provided from the ISDN, the system will deliver charge information for display on the Digital Phone LCD and include the AOC in SMDR records. AOC is implemented in accordance with ETSI ISDN AOC Specifications.
PAGE 400
Integrated Service Digital Network (ISDN) 5-66 Chapter 5: CO/IP PROGRAMMING System Data SMDR Attributes (PGM 232) … see details on page A-94 PGM 232 BTN RANGE DEFAULT SMDR SERVICE -- SMDR Service Option. On-Line / Off-Line SMDR / SMDR-Interface / Email Service .
PAGE 401
Integrated Service Digital Network (ISDN) 5-67 Chapter 5: CO/IP Release 1.0 PGM 232 BTN RANGE COST PER PULSE -- When metering is provided by the PSTN, the cost per metering pulse can be assigned. 9 6 digits 000000 SMDR FRACTION -- Determines the position of the decimal in the Cost per Pulse, starting from the right-most digit. 10 0-5 0 HIDDEN DIALED DGT -- Determines the number of dialed digits to hide for security purposes, and replaced with "*".
PAGE 402
Integrated Service Digital Network (ISDN) 5-68 Chapter 5: CO/IP PGM 232 BTN WARNING TONE SVC -- if this option is enabled andSMDR service type is off-line, the system check free records space. And if free space is less than 1000, warning tone will be served as alarm to Attendant. 15 0:Off 1:On 0:Off SMDR CONN TYPE -- This assigns port to be used for SMDR Interface. SMDR Interface is served through LAN or SIO.
PAGE 403
Integrated Service Digital Network (ISDN) 5-69 Chapter 5: CO/IP CO/IP Line Data Charge Mode (PGM 160 - FLEX 11) … see details on page A-47 PGM 160 BTN CHARGE MODE -- If 'FREE', the external call though CO line is not printed/saved to SMDR even though SMDR is enabled. If 'REPORT', the external call though CO, line is included to SMDR according to the SMDR Attributes.
PAGE 404
Integrated Service Digital Network (ISDN) 5-70 Chapter 5: CO/IP Where: • AAA – ISDN CO line number • BB…B – CLIP • CCCCCCCC – Called Station • DD…D – Speed Dial Name • EEE – Speed Dial Bin Number (3 or 4) • FFFFFFFF – Answering Station The System will also compare the identification to the Speed Dial bins. If a match exists, the Name of the Speed Dial bin may be displayed in place of the number, CO/IP Name Display.
PAGE 405
Integrated Service Digital Network (ISDN) 5-71 Chapter 5: CO/IP Keypad Facility The ISDN Keypad Facility Information Element (IE) may enable the User to activate certain ISDN services (ex., Off-Net Forward). To access this facility, the Station must be enabled and have a Flex button programmed for {KEYPAD FACILITY}. When activated, the digits dialed by a User are sent in the Keypad Facility IE instead of the Called Party Number IE.
PAGE 406
Integrated Service Digital Network (ISDN) 5-72 Chapter 5: CO/IP Station Data Flex Button Assignment (PGM 126) … see details on page A-30 Keypad Facility usage (PGM 133 - FLEX 12) … see details on page A-35 PGM 133 KEYPAD FACILITY USAGE -- enable keypad facility.
PAGE 407
Integrated Service Digital Network (ISDN) 5-73 Chapter 5: CO/IP Station Flex Button Assign (PGM 126) … see details on page A-30 CO Line Data CO Digit Conv. Table Index (PGM 160 – FLEX 6) … see details on page A-47 PGM 160 BTN DGT CONVERT TBL -- Set Digit Conversion Table index. 6 RANGE DEFAULT 1-9 2 System Data Digit Conversion Table (PGM 251) … see details on page A-107 Release 1.0 PGM 251 BTN RANGE DEFAULT APPLY T-TYPE -- The Apply time type to be applied when the dialed digit is dialed.
PAGE 408
Integrated Service Digital Network (ISDN) 5-74 Chapter 5: CO/IP PGM 251 BTN RANGE DEFAULT D2/T1 CHANGED -- The CO Group Access Code and digits to be sent to PX in 'Day 2/Time 1' when the dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is 'FOLLOW LCR'. 10 Max 16 digits - D2/T2 CHANGED -- The CO Group Access Code and digits to be sent to PX in 'Day 2/Time 2' when the dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is 'FOLLOW LCR'.
PAGE 409
Integrated Service Digital Network (ISDN) 5-75 Chapter 5: CO/IP ISDN CLI When programmed, the IDSN will send CLI information on incoming and outgoing Calls. On Incoming Calls, CLI information is delivered to the Calling Party System. On Outgoing Calls, CLI information is delivered to the Called Party System, and also from the Called Party System to the MBX IP. CONDITIONS - If a CO line is using Representative CLI, that information is sent before other CLI options.
PAGE 410
Integrated Service Digital Network (ISDN) 5-76 Chapter 5: CO/IP Station CLI Attributes (PGM 135) … see details on page A-37 PGM 135 BTN CLIP DISPLAY -- Calling Line Identification Presentation (CLIP), an ISDN service, sends the number of the calling party to the system in the call SETUP message. If enabled, the number will be shown in the Digital phone LCD.
PAGE 411
Integrated Service Digital Network (ISDN) 5-77 Chapter 5: CO/IP PGM 135 BTN RANGE DEFAULT IGNORE CALLER CLIR -- When receive a call with CLIR option, ignore the option and display CID. 8 0: Off 1: On MOBILE EXTENSION CLI -- When mobile extension makes a call, CLI is determined by this option. (0:Caller No, 1:Mobile Station No, 2:Caller No + Mobile Staton No).
PAGE 412
ISDN Supplementary Services 5-78 Chapter 5: CO/IP Representative CID - Outgoing (PGM 170 – FLEX 11) … see details on page A-56 PGM 170 BTN USE REPRESENTATIVE CLI -- If this feature is set to ON, representative CLI is used to every outgoing call of selected CO line. 11 RANGE 0: Off 1: On DEFAULT Off HARDWARE PRIB ISDN Supplementary Services In many cases, the ISDN Service Provider will offer enhanced services available for User Subscription.
PAGE 413
Representative CLI Service 5-79 Chapter 5: CO/IP 5. Replace the handset, and return to idle. To deactivate ISDN Call Deflection: Press flashing [FWD] button, Call Forward will deactivate and the [FWD] button LED will be extinguished. PROGRAMMING CO Line Data ISDN CD (PGM 161 - FLEX 9) … see details on page A-48 PGM 161 BTN GAIN TABLE IDX -- Determines Gain Table for CO line.
PAGE 414
Representative CLI Service 5-80 Chapter 5: CO/IP Representative CLI Usage (PGM 170 - FLEX 10) … see details on page A-56 PGM 170 BTN OWN CODE TO TRANSIT CLI -- If this feature is set to ON and same feature of incoming CO attribute is also set to ON, then Own code of outgoing CO line is inserted to the CLI of transit CO call.
PAGE 415
6-1 Chapter 6: Digital Phone Chapter 6 Digital Phone The following Digital phones and Optional Boards are available for use with the MBX IP 100 and 300 Systems. Digital Phones • IP-7000 Series (7024LD, 7024D, 7016D, 7008D) • IP-8000 Series (8024, 8012) Optional Boards • BTU (IP-8000 Series) • MU/FU/MFU/BTU/USB (LDP-7000 Series) DSS • DSS/LSS (IP-8000 Series: IP-8012DSS, IP-8012LSS) • LKD-48DSS • LDP-7048DSS Door Phone • Release 1.
PAGE 416
Auto Called Number Redial (ACNR) 6-2 Chapter 6: Digital Phone Auto Called Number Redial (ACNR) A Station User can request to have the System retry a Busy or No Answer External Call until the call is connected or the feature is cancelled. CONDITIONS - The applicable Timers and Retry Counter must be programmed, - ACNR Pause Timer: Determines the time allowed between ACNR retries. - ACNR Retry Count: Determines the number of times the System will retry before ACNR is automatically cancelled.
PAGE 417
Auto Called Number Redial (ACNR) 6-3 Chapter 6: Digital Phone PROGRAMMING System Data ACNR Pause Timer (PGM 220 - FLEX 3) … see details on page A-85 PGM 220 BTN ACNR PAUSE TMR -- This timer establishes the time between ACNR attempts. 3 RANGE DEFAULT 005-300 secs 030 Tenant Data ACNR Retry Counter (PGM 280 - FLEX 4) … see details on page A-131 PGM 280 BTN ACNR RETRY COUNT -- Determines the ACNR retry count.
PAGE 418
Auto Release of [Speaker] 6-4 Chapter 6: Digital Phone Auto Release of [Speaker] After completion of certain features, the [SPEAKER] will turn OFF automatically, returning the Digital Phone to Idle. CONDITIONS - Auto Release of [SPEAKER] also applies to features including Call Park, Call Back, Call Forward and CO/IP Queuing. - If erroneous data is entered in Station Programming, an Error Tone is received and the User must correct the error before the station will return to Idle automatically.
PAGE 419
Automatic Speaker Select 6-5 Chapter 6: Digital Phone CONDITIONS - This feature does not apply to Digital Phones not equipped/assigned with Speakerphone; the User must lift the Handset. - Paging while on the Speakerphone may cause feedback from Paging Equipment; if Auto Speaker is enabled and a {PAGE ZONE} button is pressed, the display will show "LIFT THE HANDSET". To complete the page, User must lift the Handset within the predefined 5-second period or the phone will return to Idle.
PAGE 420
Background Music (BGM) 6-6 Chapter 6: Digital Phone Background Music (BGM) A Digital Phone can receive audio (generally music), from an Internal or External Source while it is Idle. Music from the source is received over the Speaker and will be disabled during Ringing, Paging, or when the Station is Off-Hook. CONDITIONS - Speaker volume can be adjustable at the Station using the [VOL UP]/[VOL DOWN] keys on the Digital Phone. - Silence is provided if no BGM Source is assigned.
PAGE 421
Call Log Display 6-7 Chapter 6: Digital Phone Call Log Display Users of Digital Phones with Soft keys can view a Call Log of Incoming, Outgoing and Missed Calls on the Phone LCD (where applicable). CONDITIONS - One station can have up to 100 logged calls. - Call Log is displayed as one of three types of calls: Received Call, Dialed Call and Lost Call. - The Call Log is stored in volatile memory; it is not protected in case of power failure. OPERATION Digital Phone To access the Call Log menu: 1.
PAGE 422
CO Line Name Display 6-8 Chapter 6: Digital Phone CO Line Name Display When a CO/IP Call is received or a User seizes a CO/IP Path, the CO/IP Number is displayed on the LCD. If the CO/IP Path is assigned a Name and CO/IP Name Display is enabled, the CO/IP name will be displayed instead of the CO/IP Number. CONDITIONS - Each CO Line and IP Group can be assigned a Name of up to 12 characters in the System Database.
PAGE 423
One Time DND 6-9 Chapter 6: Digital Phone One Time DND While a Station is ringing or receiving an Off-Hook Muted Ring, the User can press the [DND] button, to reject the call and terminate Ringing. When the Station returns to the Idle status, DND is automatically cancelled and the [DND] LED is extinguished. If the DND button is pressed while on a call, any ringing to the Station regardless of destination DN, will be rejected and will not ring.
PAGE 424
Group Listening 6-10 Chapter 6: Digital Phone HARDWARE Digital Phone Group Listening All Digital Phones have a built-in speaker. If enabled, the User may use the speaker to monitor a call while using the Handset to converse with an Outside party. This enables a group of people in the room to listen to both parties in the conversation.
PAGE 425
Intercom Signaling Mode 6-11 Chapter 6: Digital Phone RELATED FEATURES Speakerphone … see page 6-19 Mute … see page 6-13 HARDWARE Digital Phone Intercom Signaling Mode Each Digital Phone can select the applicable signaling mode used for incoming ICM calls while the station is Idle; there are three signaling modes available: • Call Announce with Hands free Answer-Back (H) – When an ICM call is received, the User receives a splash tone followed by the ICM caller’s voice.
PAGE 426
Intercom Signaling Mode 6-12 Chapter 6: Digital Phone 3. Dial the desired ICM Signaling Mode code (1=H, 2=T, or 3=IP). 4. Press the [SAVE] button. PROGRAMMING Tenant Intercom Busy One-Digit Service (PGM 237) … see details on page A-103 PGM 237 BTN RANGE 0: Disable 1: Enable DEFAULT STEP CALL -- determines if Step Call is enabled or disabled. 1 Disable DIGIT 1 -- when accessing a busy tone, User may dial for one of the one-touch services.
PAGE 427
Mute 6-13 Chapter 6: Digital Phone Mute A Digital Phone can turn off audio transmission from the Handset, Speakerphone or Headset Microphone (Mic Mute). CONDITIONS - Changing from Speakerphone to Handset or vice versa while the phone is Muted will re-activate the phone microphone, transmitting audio. - Returning to Idle or placing another CO/IP or Intercom call will cancel Mute, and re-establish audio transmission from the phone.
PAGE 428
Off-Hook Signaling 6-14 Chapter 6: Digital Phone Off-Hook Signaling This Feature is based on the DN Feature. When an Off-Hook Station receives a call or a CO/IP Call rings into the System for the Off-Hook Station, the Station will receive the assigned Off-Hook Ring signal for Intercom Calls, Camp-On, Call Wait, or Voice-Over Announcements. For Calls with a different DN, Off-Hook Ring signaling may be received with LED notification.
PAGE 429
On-Hook Dialing 6-15 Chapter 6: Digital Phone HARDWARE Digital Phone On-Hook Dialing Digital Phones equipped with a Speakerphone can allow Users to place as well as receive calls while the Handset is On-Hook. Once the User activates the Speakerphone by pressing the [SPEAKER] button or Automatic Speaker Select, Dial tone is received and the User may dial the desired number. CONDITIONS - If the Outgoing call is not Answered, the User must press the illuminated [SPEAKER] button to return to Idle.
PAGE 430
Prime Line Immediately/Delayed 6-16 Chapter 6: Digital Phone Prime Line Immediately/Delayed When a User Station goes Off-Hook, the System normally provides the ICM dial tone. If desired, a Station can be assigned to access a pre-selected Prime Line. The Prime Line can be set for: • Seizing a CO/IP Line • Calling another Station • Feature Code (as selected) Prime Line access can be defined as: • Immediate – When phone goes Off-Hook, the System will provide access to the Prime Line.
PAGE 431
Differential Ring 6-17 Chapter 6: Digital Phone PROGRAMMING Station Data Auto Dial Digit (PGM 138 - FLEX 1) … see details on page A-40 PGM 138 AUTO DIAL DGT -- Digits will be dialed automatically. BTN RANGE DEFAULT 1 Max 16 digits - Auto Dial Pause Time (PGM 138 - FLEX 2) … see details on page A-40 PGM 138 AUTO DIAL PAUSE TIME -- Auto dial pause time.
PAGE 432
Saved Number Redial (SNR) 6-18 Chapter 6: Digital Phone OPERATION MBX IP Phone To download a Ring Tone from System memory: 1. Press the [PGM] button. 2. Dial 23 {Ring Tone Download code}. 3. Select the desired Ring tone location (5-8). 4. Select the Ring source using the [VOL UP]/[VOL DOWN] keys and press the [SELECT] button or dial the appropriate ring number to select. 5. While listening to music, - Dial 1 to save the selected music source - Dial 2 to return previous step.
PAGE 433
Speakerphone 6-19 Chapter 6: Digital Phone - Manually dialing a Flash during a CO call will cause only those digits after the Flash to be stored and re-dialed as the SNR. OPERATION Digital Phone To save a Dialed number, while on a CO/IP Call: After dialing, but before hanging up, press the [SPEED] button twice; the dialed number will be stored in the SNR buffer. To dial a Saved number: 1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button. 2. Press the [SPEED] button. 3. Dial #.
PAGE 434
Speakerphone 6-20 Chapter 6: Digital Phone - Each Digital Phone equipped with Speakerphone is allowed/denied Speakerphone operation based on System Database Admin. Programming. - When Headset operation is assigned for the Station, the Speakerphone is disabled and the [SPEAKER] button activates the Headset audio path instead of the Speaker. OPERATION Digital Phone To activate the Speakerphone: While on a Call or when placing a Call, press the [SPEAKER] button; the LED will illuminate.
PAGE 435
Station Flexible Buttons 6-21 Chapter 6: Digital Phone RELATED FEATURES Mute … see page 6-13 Group Listening … see page 6-10 Automatic Speaker Select … see page 6-4 Green Power Save … see page 3-98 Station Flexible Buttons The Digital Phone incorporates a field of Flex buttons as well as the Fixed Feature buttons. The Flex buttons are assigned in the System database to access features, functions and resources of the System.
PAGE 436
Station Flexible Buttons 6-22 Chapter 6: Digital Phone OPERATION Digital Phone To assign a Flex button at the station: 1. Press the [PGM] button. 2. Press the desired Flex button. 3. Select the type. - 1: Telephone number or Feature code. - 2: Fixed Button. - 0: Delete. 4. Select the desired button type using the [VOL UP]/[VOL DOWN] key to assign a Fixed button, OR 5. Dial the desired number to create the Telephone number button. 6. Press the [SAVE] button. To change the ring option of DN button: 1.
PAGE 437
Station Flexible LED Flash Rates 6-23 Chapter 6: Digital Phone Station Flexible LED Flash Rates The Flash Rates used with the various Flex buttons on the Digital Phone can be adjusted on a System-wide basis according to Customer needs. Up to 48 different functions can be assigned from of 15 different Flash Rates. CONDITIONS - Available Flash rates and functions, which can be assigned, are given in the Admin & Programming Manual.
PAGE 438
Station ICLID Call Routing 6-24 Chapter 6: Digital Phone Station ICLID Call Routing The Station can employ Incoming Calling Line ID (ICLID) to determine appropriate routing for Incoming External Calls. CONDITIONS - If the received ICLID does not match an entry in the Station ICLID List, the Station will receive CO/IP Line Ringing. - This feature applies to all digital and analog CO Lines. - The ICLID received from the CO/IP Line must be a telephone number to match a station ICLID List.
PAGE 439
Station User Programming & Codes 6-25 Chapter 6: Digital Phone Station User Programming & Codes Users can program an array of Functions and Features, and Access Status information. The Station User Program Codes used for these purposes are fixed as listed below.
PAGE 440
Station User Programming & Codes 6-26 Chapter 6: Digital Phone USER PGM CODE 53 + x DESCRIPTION Register the mobile CLI number REMARK X=1-2 54 + Rm & Auth Code Start a Conf Room - 55 + Rm & Auth Code Close a Conf Room - 61 Speaker/Headset Mode Speak/Headset/E-MIC 62 Headset Ring Mode Speaker/Headset/Both 71 Register Station ICLID - 72 View Station ICLID - 81 View IP Address IP Phone/ DTIM/SLTM 82 View Mac Address IP Phone/ DTIM/SLTM 83 View IP Phone version - 80 Network Sett
PAGE 441
Station User Programming & Codes 6-27 Chapter 6: Digital Phone USER PGM CODE 53 + x DESCRIPTION Register the mobile CLI number REMARK X = 1-2 54 + Rm & Auth Code Start a Conf Room - 55 + Rm & Auth Code Close a Conf Room - 71 Register Station ICLID - 72 View Station ICLID - 91 System Version - 92 System IP Address - Additionally, a Station User Program Menu display is provided on the Phone display to assist the User in setting the Station User Program Code Features and Functions.
PAGE 442
Two-Way Record 6-28 Chapter 6: Digital Phone Two-Way Record A Digital Phone User can record any active conversation to the Station User’s Internal/External Mailbox or to a Phontage Hard Disk drive or UCS Client (where applicable). A {RECORD} button must be assigned to access this feature and record Normal Incoming/Outgoing Calls. CONDITIONS - The {RECORD} button LED will flash at 120 ipm while recording.
PAGE 443
Two-Way Record 6-29 Chapter 6: Digital Phone To stop Two-Way Record: 1. While on an active CO/IP Call that is being recorded by the Station, press the {RECORD} button again. OR 2. Hang-up, and return to idle. PROGRAMMING Station Auto Record Service (PGM 145 - Btn 3) … see details on page A-43 PGM 145 BTN AUTO-RECORD SERVICE -- determines if user can record a conversation with another user (internal/external). It can be used without two-way record button.
PAGE 444
Two-Way Record 6-30 Chapter 6: Digital Phone System Tone Table (PGM 290) … see details on page A-138 PGM 290 BTN RANGE DEFAULT TONE TYPE -- Designates the Tone type. 1 01: Normal Tone 01: Normal Tone 02: VMIB Prompt 03: VMIB Announcement 04: Internal MOH 05: External MOH 06-09: VMIB MOH 1/2/3/4 10-14: SLT MOH 1-5 TONE TIME -- Determines the amount of time tone is provided. 2 1-600 10 TONE PORT -- Tone port index of PGM 264. The cadence of tone port may be changed by using Web-Admin.
PAGE 445
Answering Machine Emulation (AME) 6-31 Chapter 6: Digital Phone Answering Machine Emulation (AME) When internal or external calls are forwarded to VMIB, the user can check and hear saved messages and also can record the call, using the {Mute} button. AME feature has LED Blinking mode and Speaker Hearing mode. The User can program an {AME} button to a flex button which will allow them to assign AME mode with this button.
PAGE 446
Answering Machine Emulation (AME) 6-32 Chapter 6: Digital Phone 1. When a call has been forwarded to VMIB, the {AME} Button will blink. 2. Press {AME} button to go to Speaker Hearing mode. 3. Press {AME} button to communicate without saving conversation, OR 4. Press {Mute} Button to communicate with saving conversation To Answer a call in Speaker Hearing Mode: 1. When a call is forwarded to VMIB, press the {AME} button to communicate without saving conversation, OR 2.
PAGE 447
Voice Over 6-33 Chapter 6: Digital Phone Voice Over This feature allows Digital Phone Users, to receive a voice announcement through the handset receiver while on an existing call (CO, IP or Intercom). The Voice Over (OHVO) will be muted to not interfere with the existing conversation. The Called Station User may respond to the Calling Party using Call Wait. CONDITIONS - The Receiving Station must be programmed to allow OHVO calls.
PAGE 448
Voice Over 6-34 Chapter 6: Digital Phone System Data Intercom Busy One-Digit Service (PGM 237) … see details on page A-103 PGM 237 BTN RANGE 0: Disable 1: Enable DEFAULT STEP CALL -- determines if Step Call is enabled or disabled. 1 Disable DIGIT 1 -- when accessing a busy tone, User may dial for one of the one-touch services.
PAGE 449
Attendant Group 7-1 Chapter 7: Attendants Chapter 7 Attendants Attendant Group The System can have an Attendant Group (up to 5 Attendants) per Tenant. Each Attendant position must be equipped with a multi-button Phone and may include multiple DSS Consoles. There are 2 different destinations to cover Attendant duties in a Tenant as follows: • Night Attendant Group – Can be assigned as Hunt Group and covers Attendant Calls when all Attendants in a Tenant are in {DND}.
PAGE 450
Attendant Group 7-2 Chapter 7: Attendants PROGRAMMING Tenant Data Attendant Group Assignment (PGM 270) … see details on page A-121 PGM 270 BTN RANGE DEFAULT ATTD GR TYPE -- Defines the type of Attendant group. 1 0 0: Terminal 1: Circular 2: Ring 3: Longest Idle ATTD GR NAME -- Defines the name of attendant group. 2 Max 16 - CO ATD NUMBER -- Defines attendant call number for CO line. 3 Max 4 - MEMBER ASG -- Assigns stations as members of an Attendant group.
PAGE 451
Attendant Group 7-3 Chapter 7: Attendants Release 1.0 PGM 271 BTN RANGE GREETING REPEAT NO -- Determines the number of times the Greeting will repeat. 5 000-100 3 GREETING RPT DELAY -- Determines the length of time the timer will pause before the greeting is repeated. 6 000-100 (seconds) 0 QUEUING TYPE -- Determines the type of Queuing Tone. 7 1. Normal 2. Prompt 3. Annc 4. INT MOH 5.
PAGE 452
Attendant Group 7-4 Chapter 7: Attendants PGM 271 BTN RANGE DEFAULT SECOND Q. TYPE -- This entry defines the type of second queuing tone. 14 1: Normal 2: Prompt 3: Annc 4: INT MOH 5: EXT MOH 6: VMIB MOH1 7: VMIB MOH2 8: VMIB MOH3 9: VMIB MOH4 10: SLT MOH1 11: SLT MOH2 12: SLT MOH3 13: SLT MOH4 14: SLT MOH5 4: INT MOH SECOND Q. TIMER -- This entry defines the timer for forward destination.
PAGE 453
Attendant Group 7-5 Chapter 7: Attendants Release 1.0 PGM 272 BTN RANGE FORWARD TYPE -- Determines the Forward type to use. 0: Not used 1: Unconditional - call is routed to a forward destination unconditionally. 2: Queuing overflow - call is routed to a forward destination when a queue overflows. 3: Queuing timeout - call is routed to a forward destination when queuing time expires. 4: Queuing all - call is routed to a forward destination when a queue overflows or queuing time expires.
PAGE 454
Attendant Group 7-6 Chapter 7: Attendants Night Attendant Group Assignment (PGM 275) … see details on page A-126 PGM 275 BTN RANGE DEFAULT NIGHT ATTD GR TYPE -- NightDetermines the type of Night Attendant group. 1 0: Terminal 0: Terminal 1: Circular 2: Ring 3: Longest Idle NIGHT ATTD GR NAME -- Determines the name of the night Attendant group. 2 Max 16 - NIGHT MEMBER ASG -- Assigns Stations as members of a Night Attendant group.
PAGE 455
Attendant Group 7-7 Chapter 7: Attendants PGM 276 Release 1.0 BTN RANGE DEFAULT GREETING PROMPT/ANNC -- Determines the Greeting Prompt/ Announce Number when Greeting Type is set to Prompt or Announce. 4 001-255 Not Asg GREETING REPEAT NO -- Determines the number of times the Greeting will repeat. 5 000-100 3 GREETING RPT DELAY -- Determines the length of time the timer will pause before the greeting is repeated. 6 000-100 (seconds) 0 QUEUING TYPE -- Determines the type of Queuing Tone.
PAGE 456
Attendant Group 7-8 Chapter 7: Attendants PGM 276 BTN RANGE DEFAULT SECOND Q. TYPE -- This entry defines the type of second queuing tone. 14 1: Normal 2: Prompt 3: Annc 4: INT MOH 5: EXT MOH 6: VMIB MOH1 7: VMIB MOH2 8: VMIB MOH3 9: VMIB MOH4 10:SLT MOH1 11:SLT MOH2 12:SLT MOH3 13:SLT MOH4 14:SLT MOH5 4: INT MOH SECOND Q. TIMER -- This entry defines the timer for forward destination.
PAGE 457
Attendant Group 7-9 Chapter 7: Attendants PGM 277 BTN RANGE DEFAULT FORWARD TYPE -- Determines the Forward type to use. 0: Not used 1: Unconditional - call is routed to a forward destination unconditionally. 2: Queuing overflow - call is routed to a forward destination when a queue overflows. 3: Queuing timeout - call is routed to a forward destination when queuing time expires. 4: Queuing all - call is routed to a forward destination when a queue overflows or queuing time expires.
PAGE 458
Night Attendant Group 7-10 Chapter 7: Attendants Night Attendant Group This feature allows an Alternate Answer Point while the Attendant station is in an unavailable mode. When in the unavailable mode, the next available Attendant in a Tenant will receive Attendant calls. If All Attendants in a Tenant activates Night Attendant or the System is in Night mode, Calls will be routed to the Night Attendant Group.
PAGE 459
Night Attendant Group 7-11 Chapter 7: Attendants Night Attendant Group Greeting/Queuing Tone (PGM 276) … see details on page A-127 Release 1.0 PGM 276 BTN RANGE GREETING TYPE -- Determines the type of Greeting Tone to be used. 1 1: Normal 2: Prompt 3: Annc 4: INT MOH 5: EXT MOH 6: VMIB MOH1 7: VMIB MOH2 8: VMIB MOH3 9: VMIB MOH4 10:SLT MOH1 11:SLT MOH2 12:SLT MOH3 13:SLT MOH4 14:SLT MOH5 1: Normal GREETING TYPE -- Determines the type of Greeting Tone used.
PAGE 460
Night Attendant Group 7-12 Chapter 7: Attendants PGM 276 BTN RANGE DEFAULT QUEUING TYPE -- Determines the type of Queuing Tone. 7 1. Normal 2. Prompt 3. Annc 4. INT MOH 5. EXT MOH 6: VMIB MOH1 7: VMIB MOH2 8: VMIB MOH3 9: VMIB MOH4 10:SLT MOH1 11:SLT MOH2 12:SLT MOH3 13:SLT MOH4 14:SLT MOH5 4 QUEUING TIMER -- Determines the Greeting/Queuing Timeout Timer. 8 010-300 (sec) 030 QUEUING TONE NO -- Determines the Queuing Tone number used when Queuing Type is set to Normal.
PAGE 461
Night Attendant Group 7-13 Chapter 7: Attendants PGM 276 BTN RANGE DEFAULT SECOND Q. TYPE -- This entry defines the type of second queuing tone. 14 1: Normal 2: Prompt 3: Annc 4: INT MOH 5: EXT MOH 6: VMIB MOH1 7: VMIB MOH2 8: VMIB MOH3 9: VMIB MOH4 10:SLT MOH1 11:SLT MOH2 12:SLT MOH3 13:SLT MOH4 14:SLT MOH5 4: INT MOH SECOND Q. TIMER -- This entry defines the timer for forward destination.
PAGE 462
Night Attendant Group 7-14 Chapter 7: Attendants PGM 277 BTN FORWARD TYPE -- Determines the Forward type to use. 0: Not used 1: Unconditional - call is routed to a forward destination unconditionally. 2: Queuing overflow - call is routed to a forward destination when a queue overflows. 3: Queuing timeout - call is routed to a forward destination when queuing time expires. 4: Queuing all - call is routed to a forward destination when a queue overflows or queuing time expires.
PAGE 463
Greeting/Queuing Tone Service 7-15 Chapter 7: Attendants Greeting/Queuing Tone Service The System can provide a Greeting tone or Queuing tone when a call is routed to an Attendant Group or Night Attendant Group. When a call is routed to the Attendant/Night Attendant Group, the pre-assigned Greeting or Queuing Tone will be provided to the caller. The tone will be provided according to the Tone Time/Delay Time/Repeat counters. There are 7 types of Tones: • NORMAL - System Tone (01-19, Tone Freq.
PAGE 464
Greeting/Queuing Tone Service 7-16 Chapter 7: Attendants PROGRAMMING Tenant Data Attendant Group Attribute (PGM 271-272) … see details on page A-122 PGM 271 BTN GREETING TYPE -- Determines the type of Greeting Tone to be used. 1 1: Normal 2: Prompt 3: Annc 4: INT MOH 5: EXT MOH 6: VMIB MOH1 7: VMIB MOH2 8: VMIB MOH3 9: VMIB MOH4 10:SLT MOH1 11:SLT MOH2 12:SLT MOH3 13:SLT MOH4 14:SLT MOH5 1: Normal GREETING PLAY -- Determines the Greeting Play time. 2 000-180 (sec) 000 Release 1.
PAGE 465
Greeting/Queuing Tone Service 7-17 Chapter 7: Attendants PGM 271 Release 1.0 BTN RANGE DEFAULT GREETING TONE NO --- Determines the Greeting Tone number when greeting type is set to Normal. 3 01-19 04 GREETING PROMPT/ANNC -- Determines the Greeting Prompt/ Announce Number when Greeting Type is set to Prompt or Announce. 4 001-255 Not Asg GREETING REPEAT NO -- Determines the number of times the Greeting will repeat.
PAGE 466
Greeting/Queuing Tone Service 7-18 Chapter 7: Attendants PGM 271 BTN SECOND Q. TYPE -- This entry defines the type of second queuing tone. 14 1: Normal 2: Prompt 3: Annc 4: INT MOH 5: EXT MOH 6: VMIB MOH1 7: VMIB MOH2 8: VMIB MOH3 9: VMIB MOH4 10: SLT MOH1 11: SLT MOH2 12: SLT MOH3 13: SLT MOH4 14: SLT MOH5 4: INT MOH SECOND Q. TIMER -- This entry defines the timer for forward destination.
PAGE 467
Greeting/Queuing Tone Service 7-19 Chapter 7: Attendants PGM 272 BTN RANGE DEFAULT FORWARD TYPE -- Determines the Forward type to use. 0: Not used 1: Unconditional - call is routed to a forward destination unconditionally. 2: Queuing overflow - call is routed to a forward destination when a queue overflows. 3: Queuing timeout - call is routed to a forward destination when queuing time expires. 4: Queuing all - call is routed to a forward destination when a queue overflows or queuing time expires.
PAGE 468
CCR Service for Attendant Queuing Annoucement 7-20 Chapter 7: Attendants CCR Service for Attendant Queuing Annoucement The System can provide CCR Service during queuing announcement according to the CCR option.
PAGE 469
CCR Service for Attendant Queuing Annoucement 7-21 Chapter 7: Attendants PROGRAMMING Tenant Data Station Group Attribute (PGM 201-202) … see details on page A-68 PGM 201 BTN RANGE GREETING TYPE -- this entry defines the type of greeting tone. 1 1: Normal 2: Prompt 3: Annc 4: INT MOH 5: EXT MOH 6: VMIB MOH1 7: VMIB MOH2 8: VMIB MOH3 9: VMIB MOH4 10: SLT MOH1 11: SLT MOH2 12: SLT MOH3 13: SLT MOH4 14: SLT MOH5 1 GREETING PLAY -- this entry defines greeting play time.
PAGE 470
CCR Service for Attendant Queuing Annoucement 7-22 Chapter 7: Attendants PGM 201 BTN RANGE QUEUING TYPE -- This entry defines the type of queuing tone. 7 1. Normal 2. Prompt 3. Annc 4. INT MOH 5. EXT MOH 6: VMIB MOH1 7: VMIB MOH2 8: VMIB MOH3 9: VMIB MOH4 10:SLT MOH1 11:SLT MOH2 12:SLT MOH3 13:SLT MOH4 14:SLT MOH5 3 QUEUING TIMER -- This entry defines the timer for queuing forward or second queuing announcement.
PAGE 471
CCR Service for Attendant Queuing Annoucement 7-23 Chapter 7: Attendants PGM 201 BTN RANGE SECOND Q. TYPE -- This entry defines the type of second queuing tone. 15 1. Normal 2. Prompt 3. Annc 4. INT MOH 5. EXT MOH 6: VMIB MOH1 7: VMIB MOH2 8: VMIB MOH3 9: VMIB MOH4 10:SLT MOH1 11:SLT MOH2 12:SLT MOH3 13:SLT MOH4 14:SLT MOH5 4 SECOND Q. TIMER -- This entry defines the timer for forward destination.
PAGE 472
CCR Service for Attendant Queuing Annoucement 7-24 Chapter 7: Attendants PGM 202 BTN RANGE DEFAULT FORWARD TYPE -- This entry defines forward type. 0. Not used 1. Unconditional: a call is routed to a forward destination unconditionally. 2. Queuing overflow: a call is routed to a forward destination when a queue is overflow. 3.Tmeout: a call is routed to a forward destination when a timeout timer is expired. 4.
PAGE 473
Forward Destination, Overflow Service 7-25 Chapter 7: Attendants CCR Table (PGM260) … see details on page A-115 PGM 260 CCR TABLE -- The destination of CCR input digit; the destination can be a Station number, Station group number or Feature code. NOTE: For Feature codes, refer to the Numbering Plan for the applicable codes.
PAGE 474
Forward Destination, Overflow Service 7-26 Chapter 7: Attendants To use Queuing Overflow or Timeout as Forward Destination: 1. Dial the {Attendant Call code}. 2. The Call is Queued when all Member Stations are in Busy mode. NOTE: The Call will be routed to the Forward destination when Queuing Time expires or Max. Queue is overflowed. PROGRAMMING Tenant Data Attendant Group Attribute (PGM 271-272) … see details on page A-122 PGM 271 BTN GREETING TYPE -- Determines the type of Greeting Tone to be used.
PAGE 475
Forward Destination, Overflow Service 7-27 Chapter 7: Attendants PGM 271 Release 1.0 BTN RANGE DEFAULT QUEUING TYPE -- Determines the type of Queuing Tone. 7 1. Normal 2. Prompt 3. Annc 4. INT MOH 5. EXT MOH 6: VMIB MOH1 7: VMIB MOH2 8: VMIB MOH3 9: VMIB MOH4 10:SLT MOH1 11:SLT MOH2 12:SLT MOH3 13:SLT MOH4 14:SLT MOH5 4 QUEUING TIMER -- Determines the Greeting/Queuing Timeout Timer.
PAGE 476
Forward Destination, Overflow Service 7-28 Chapter 7: Attendants PGM 271 BTN SECOND Q. TYPE -- This entry defines the type of second queuing tone. 14 1: Normal 2: Prompt 3: Annc 4: INT MOH 5: EXT MOH 6: VMIB MOH1 7: VMIB MOH2 8: VMIB MOH3 9: VMIB MOH4 10: SLT MOH1 11: SLT MOH2 12: SLT MOH3 13: SLT MOH4 14: SLT MOH5 4: INT MOH SECOND Q. TIMER -- This entry defines the timer for forward destination.
PAGE 477
Forward Destination, Overflow Service 7-29 Chapter 7: Attendants Release 1.0 PGM 272 BTN RANGE FORWARD TYPE -- Determines the Forward type to use. 0: Not used 1: Unconditional - call is routed to a forward destination unconditionally. 2: Queuing overflow - call is routed to a forward destination when a queue overflows. 3: Queuing timeout - call is routed to a forward destination when queuing time expires.
PAGE 478
Attendant Recall 7-30 Chapter 7: Attendants Attendant Recall Unanswered or Abandoned CO/IP Calls that remain unanswered for the Hold or Transfer Hold Timer (as applicable), will Recall at the Station that placed the Call on Hold. If the Call remains unanswered for the assigned Recall Time, the first available Attendant will also receive the Recall.
PAGE 479
Attendant Recall 7-31 Chapter 7: Attendants Outgoing CO Alternate (PGM 173) … see details on page A-60 PGM 173 BTN RANGE DEFAULT DAY ALT DEST -- Abnormal case can be selected as error type. - F1: Recall No Answer F2:Transfer No Answer F3: No Answer - NO ANSWER DISCONNECT-- The CO call is disconnected. Every destination is set to 'Disconnect' by default. 1 - - NO ANSWER ATTENDANT -- The CO call is routed to Attendant.
PAGE 480
Attendant Station Program Codes 7-32 Chapter 7: Attendants PGM 270 BTN RANGE DEFAULT CO ATD NUMBER -- Defines attendant call number for CO line. 3 Max 4 - MEMBER ASG -- Assigns stations as members of an Attendant group.
PAGE 481
Attendant Station Program Codes 7-33 Chapter 7: Attendants Example of User Program Code Chart User PGM Code Item Description Remark 01 SMDR 011 PRINT STATION SMDR Station Range 012 DELETE STATION SMDR Station Range 013 PRINT FAILED CALL SMDR 014 DELETE FAILED CALL SMDR 015 DELETE ALL SMDR 016 ABORT PRINTING 02 TRAFFIC 021 PRINT TRAFFIC (TENANT) 022 PRINT TRAFFIC (CALL TYPE) 023 PRINT TRAFFIC (CO GRP) 03 COS / PASSWORD 031 TEMPORARY COS MODE Station Range 032 RETRIEVE COS Statio
PAGE 482
Attendant Station Program Codes 7-34 Chapter 7: Attendants User PGM Code Item Description Remark 06 VMIB ANNOUNCEMENT 061 LISTEN VM ANNOUCEMENT 062 RECORD VM ANNOUCEMENT 07 USER PROGRAM 071 STATION NAME Station Range 072 LANGUAGE PROGRAM Station Range 073 PREPAID CALL Station Range 074 FEATURE CANCEL Station Range 08 SYSTEM 081 DAY/NIGHT PROGRAM 082 MONITOR CONF ROOM 083 FORCED DELETE CONF ROOM 084 PPTP CONNECTION Registered Server Number 09 USB 091 SOFTWARE UPGRADE 092 DB D
PAGE 483
Attendant Station Program Codes 7-35 Chapter 7: Attendants OPERATION Attendant To activate an Attendant Station Program Code Feature or Function: 1. Press the [PGM] button, the Attendant Station Program Menu is displayed. 2. Dial 0 to access the Attendant Station Program codes (Display Menu). 3. Enter the desired code. OR 4. Use the [VOL UP]/[VOL DOWN] or [NAVI UP]/[NAVI DOWN] button to display the desired menu item and enter the desired code. 5. Enter any additional inputs, if required.
PAGE 484
Attendant Call/Queuing 7-36 Chapter 7: Attendants HARDWARE Digital Phone Attendant Call/Queuing Any Station can call the Attendant by dialing the {Attendant Call code}. When an Attendant Call encounters a Busy signal, the Call is Queued to the Attendant Group. The Call will be delivered to the first available Attendant. CONDITIONS - Call Routing order follows the order of entry in the Attendant Assignments program. - The Calling Intercom party will receive a Ring-Back tone or MOH, as specified.
PAGE 485
Day/Night/Timed Ring Mode 7-37 Chapter 7: Attendants Day/Night/Timed Ring Mode The System Clock automatically controls Ring Mode; Ring assignments are applied based on the Time of Day and Day of Week. Three modes of ring (Ring Assignments) are provided: Day, Night and Timed. The Attendant controls the System Ring Service mode changing from Auto Service Mode to Day, Night or Timed Service mode.
PAGE 486
Day/Night/Timed Ring Mode 7-38 Chapter 7: Attendants OR 1. Dial the {Day/Night Program Feature Code}. 2. Select Tenant Number (0=All, or 1-9). 3. Select Auto Ring mode (0=AUTO). PROGRAMMING Numbering Plan Feature Numbering Plan (PGM 113) … see details on page A-18 Table Data System Time Table (PGM 253/254) … see details on page A-110 PGM 253 BTN RANGE DEFAULT TIME ZONE COMMENT-- defines the comment of the Time Table.
PAGE 487
Day/Night/Timed Ring Mode 7-39 Chapter 7: Attendants PGM 254 BTN RANGE DEFAULT Wednesday DAY/NIGHT/TIMED ring mode start times and TIMED mode end times. 3 0000-2359 Day: 9:00 Nite: 18:00 TDS: _-_ TDE: _-_ Thursday DAY/NIGHT/TIMED ring mode start times and TIMED mode end times. 4 0000-2359 Day: 9:00 Nite: 18:00 TDS: _-_ TDE: _-_ Friday DAY/NIGHT/TIMED ring mode start times and TIMED mode end times.
PAGE 488
DSS/DLS Consoles 7-40 Chapter 7: Attendants Tenant Time Table Index (PGM 280) … see details on page A-131 PGM 280 BTN RANGE DEFAULT TENANT NAME -- Determines the name of Tenant. 1 Max 24 - TENANT NAME DISPLAY -- Determines the Tenant name to display. 2 0: Off 1: On 0: Off TIME TABLE INDEX -- Determines Time Table index of tenant group. 3 1-9 1 ACNR RETRY COUNT -- Determines the ACNR retry count. 4 0-5 3 WAKE UP RETRY COUNT -- Determines the Wake Up retry count.
PAGE 489
EZ-Attendant 7-41 Chapter 7: Attendants PROGRAMMING Station Data Station Type (PGM 120) … see details on page A-24 Tenant Data Attendant Group Assign (PGM 270) … see details on page A-121 PGM 270 BTN RANGE DEFAULT ATTD GR TYPE -- Defines the type of Attendant group. 1 0 0: Terminal 1: Circular 2: Ring 3: Longest Idle ATTD GR NAME -- Defines the name of attendant group. 2 Max 16 - CO ATD NUMBER -- Defines attendant call number for CO line.
PAGE 490
System Clock Set 7-42 Chapter 7: Attendants PROGRAMMING Tenant Data Attendant Group Assign (PGM 270) … see details on page A-121 PGM 270 BTN RANGE DEFAULT ATTD GR TYPE -- Defines the type of Attendant group. 1 0 0: Terminal 1: Circular 2: Ring 3: Longest Idle ATTD GR NAME -- Defines the name of attendant group. 2 Max 16 - CO ATD NUMBER -- Defines attendant call number for CO line. 3 Max 4 - MEMBER ASG -- Assigns stations as members of an Attendant group.
PAGE 491
System Clock Set 7-43 Chapter 7: Attendants PROGRAMMING Tenant Data Attendant Group Assign (PGM 270) System Data … see details on page A-121 PGM 270 BTN RANGE DEFAULT ATTD GR TYPE -- Defines the type of Attendant group. 1 0 0: Terminal 1: Circular 2: Ring 3: Longest Idle ATTD GR NAME -- Defines the name of attendant group. 2 Max 16 - CO ATD NUMBER -- Defines attendant call number for CO line. 3 Max 4 - MEMBER ASG -- Assigns stations as members of an Attendant group.
PAGE 492
USB Upgrade 7-44 Chapter 7: Attendants USB Upgrade The Attendant can upgrade the System via USB memory. USB upgrade could be executed using the Attendant Keyset. Before upgrading, a User must save the System ROM file (GS55(56)MXXXX.rom) in USB memory. OPERATION Attendant To upgrade the System using the Attendant Keyset: 1. Save System ROM file (GS55(56)MXXXX.rom) in USB memory. 2. Insert the USB memory to the USB port in the MPB board. 3. Press the [PGM] button. 4.
PAGE 493
USB DB Up/Download From/To USB 7-45 Chapter 7: Attendants CONDITIONS - USB Upgrade in Attendant Keyset can support up to 10 ROM image files. PROGRAMMING Tenant Data Attendant Group Assign (PGM 270) … see details on page A-121 PGM 270 BTN RANGE DEFAULT ATTD GR TYPE -- Defines the type of Attendant group. 1 0 0: Terminal 1: Circular 2: Ring 3: Longest Idle ATTD GR NAME -- Defines the name of attendant group. 2 Max 16 - CO ATD NUMBER -- Defines attendant call number for CO line.
PAGE 494
USB DB Up/Download From/To USB 7-46 Chapter 7: Attendants 4. Press the [HOLD] /[OK] button to download the database. D B D O WN LOA D TO U S B P L EA S E WAI T … 5. Following download, the result is displayed and Keyset will return to Idle. D B D O WN LOA D TO U S B D O W NLOA D S UCC ES S To upload the System Database using the Attendant Keyset: 1. Insert the USB memory to the USB port in MPB board. 2. Press the [PGM] button. 3. Dial 093 {Attendant Station Program code}.
PAGE 495
USB DB Up/Download From/To USB 7-47 Chapter 7: Attendants PROGRAMMING Tenant Data Attendant Group Assign (PGM 270) … see details on page A-121 PGM 270 Release 1.0 BTN RANGE DEFAULT ATTD GR TYPE -- Defines the type of Attendant group. 1 0 0: Terminal 1: Circular 2: Ring 3: Longest Idle ATTD GR NAME -- Defines the name of attendant group. 2 Max 16 - CO ATD NUMBER -- Defines attendant call number for CO line. 3 Max 4 - MEMBER ASG -- Assigns stations as members of an Attendant group.
PAGE 496
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
PAGE 497
Broker Call 8-1 Chapter 8: Single Line Telephone Chapter 8 Single Line Telephone Broker Call Broker Call allows an SLT User to engage in 2 Calls, alternating between the two Parties, so that the conversation with each Party is private. There are two types of Broker Call: • Transfer Broker Call – 2nd Call is originated by the SLT user. • Call-Wait (Camp-On) Broker Call – 2nd Call is delivered to the SLT through a Call-Wait. CONDITIONS Release 1.
PAGE 498
Broker Call 8-2 Chapter 8: Single Line Telephone OPERATION SLT To activate a Transfer Broker Call: 1. While on an active Call, press the Hook-Switch to receive the Intercom Dial tone; the active Call is placed on Exclusive Hold. 2. Place a second Call. 3. To alternate between calls, shortly press the Hook-Switch. To activate a Call Wait Broker Call: 1. While on an Active Call, and an Incoming Call-Wait is received, press the Hook-Switch to answer the incoming Call. 2.
PAGE 499
Hook-Flash Mode 8-3 Chapter 8: Single Line Telephone Hook-Flash Mode To prohibit any service after Hook-Flash, SLT Hook-Flash can be disabled, dropped, or ignored. • Disable Mode – When Hook-Flash detected, the previous Line will be continued, and the Line is not Dropped. • Flash Drop – When Hook-Flash Flash detected, previous conversation will be disconnected. • Flash Ignore – All Hook-Flash is ignored.
PAGE 500
Howler Tone 8-4 Chapter 8: Single Line Telephone Howler Tone When an SLT station goes Off-Hook and does not initiate dialing for the duration of the Dial Tone Timer, delays dialing between digits in excess of the Inter-Digit Timer, or stays Off-Hook at the completion of activating a Feature or Program, the Station will present the Howler tone as an Error indication and the Call attempt will be abandoned. In order to complete the Call, the User must return to On-Hook and restart the Call.
PAGE 501
SLT Message Wait Indication 8-5 Chapter 8: Single Line Telephone SLT Message Wait Indication All SLT devices will receive a Stutter dial tone as an audible Message Wait Indication. In addition, Industry-standard Message Wait telephones may be connected to the System. Software included will cause the Message Wait lamp to Flash when a messaging is waiting. CONDITIONS - The System will switch a SLT 90 VDC lamp On and Off (Flash).
PAGE 502
SLT Name Registration 8-6 Chapter 8: Single Line Telephone SLT Name Registration A SLT user has the capability to program the User Name so that a Calling Station with an LCD can see the associated Name instead of the Station number. OPERATION SLT To register a name at the SLT: 1. Lift the handset. 2. Dial {Name Register Feature Code}. 3. Enter name (refer to Alphanumeric Chart on page B-105). 4. Press the Hook-Switch; the confirmation tone will be heard. To delete the Name at the SLT: 1. Lift the handset.
PAGE 503
SIP Terminal Registration 9-1 Chapter 9: SIP Phone Chapter 9 SIP Phone SIP Terminal Registration The System supports the LG-Nortel SIP-based videophone, LVP-2000, as well as other third party SIP phones. Compatible SIP phones support the Internet Engineering Technical Committee standard RFC3261 for real-time communications over the Internet. Once registered, the System will deliver services to the SIP Phone. Operation of the SIP Phone generally follows the steps outlined for an SLT.
PAGE 504
SIP Name Registration 9-2 Chapter 9: SIP Phone SIP Name Registration If the SIP phone has a Function to register its own Phone Name, when a call is placed, the SIP Phone Name is displayed on the Called Party Station. SIP Placing Calls The SIP Phone can place Intercom or External Calls. To place a Call, a VOIB channel should be available. CONDITIONS - Release 1.
PAGE 505
SIP Call Pick-Up 9-3 Chapter 9: SIP Phone OPERATION To place an Intercom Call: 1. Dial station number. 2. Press the [OUTGOING] button on the SIP Phone. To place an External Call: 1. Dial the {CO Access Code} and telephone number. 2. Press the [OUTGOING] button on SIP Phone SIP Call Pick-Up The SIP phone can Pick-Up Intercom or Incoming CO Line Calls for other Stations. CONDITIONS - For SIP Phone Features (ex., Receive Calls, etc.
PAGE 506
SIP Transfer Call 9-4 Chapter 9: SIP Phone SIP Transfer Call The SIP phone can Transfer an Active Call. CONDITIONS - If the SIP phone has a Transfer Function, it will not operate correctly if the Transfer message is not compatible between the SIP Phone and the System. OPERATION To Transfer an Active Call: 1. While on an Active Call, press the [TRANSFER] button on SIP Phone. 2. Dial Station Number where the call will be transferred. SIP Call Forward The SIP phone can set-up Call Forward.
PAGE 507
SIP Do Not Disturb (DND) 9-5 Chapter 9: SIP Phone SIP Do Not Disturb (DND) The SIP phone can set Do Not Disturb (DND) when Station User is in need of privacy to complete the current Call (rejects incoming calls until Phone returns to Idle). CONDITIONS - If the SIP phone has a DND Function, it will not operate correctly if the DND message is not compatible between the SIP Phone and the System.
PAGE 508
SIP SMS 9-6 Chapter 9: SIP Phone SIP SMS The SIP phone can Send and Receive SMS messages with other Stations. CONDITIONS - If the SIP phone has a SMS Function, it will not operate correctly if the SMS message is not compatible between the SIP Phone and the System. OPERATION Refer to the Phone User Guide for SMS. SIP Voice Mail Notification The SIP phone can receive a notification when another Station leaves Voicemail. The SIP phone must be enabled with Voicemail Notification.
PAGE 509
ACD Basic Feature 10-1 Chapter 10: ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) Chapter 10 ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) feature provides the service to distribute calls to agents in an efficient way. Each agent can set or change own specific state and get ready to receive the ACD calls. And supervisor can be assigned to each group and they can change the ACD group status.
PAGE 510
ACD Basic Feature 10-2 Chapter 10: ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) • Administrator or Supervisor can assign a priority to each agent. So when an ACD call arrives, at first higher priority group's agents will be received the ACD call, and then all of agents of higher priority group are busy, next priority group's agent will be received next ACD call. • Each ACD group can have a maximum of 5 Queuing ACD announcements. Each group can also have Night, Holiday and Overflow announcements.
PAGE 511
ACD Basic Feature 10-3 Chapter 10: ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) 4. If [Password Check When Agent Login] is set in admin [PGM214-Flex8], agent has to enter password on log-in. If password is correct and agent is in log-out state, agent enters into log-in state. Agent Log-Out 1. Dial {ACD Agent Log-In/Out} feature code. OR 2. Press flex button registered as {ACD Agent Log-In/Out} feature code. 3. If agent is in log-in state, agent is put into log-out state. ACD Call Operation 1.
PAGE 512
ACD Basic Feature 10-4 Chapter 10: ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) PGM 124 BTN CO DIFF RING ID -- set the CO line differential ring ID – usually 1-4 is valid. 4 000-254 Off COS APPLY OPTION -- determine whether the applied COS is the COS of SUB-DN or COS of MY-DN when station accesses SUB-DN. 5 0: SUB-DN 1: MY-DN SUN-DN HOOK FLASH WHEN TRANSFER -- Determine the operation when user press hook-flash button while transferring call. 0.
PAGE 513
ACD Basic Feature 10-5 Chapter 10: ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) Station Group ACD Group Assignment (PGM 212) … see details on page A-78 PGM 212 BTN RANGE DEFAULT GROUP NAME -- ACD Group Name. 1 Start ACD Group Number & End ACD Group Number SERVICE MODE -- ACD Group Status. 2 0: Normal 1: Group Forward 2: Overflow 3: Night 4: Holiday 5: Not Service Normal TENANT NO -- ACD Tenant Number. 3 1-9 (MBX IP-300) 1-5 (MBX IP-100) 1 TIME TABLE INDEX -- ACD Group Time Table.
PAGE 514
ACD Basic Feature 10-6 Chapter 10: ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) PGM 213 BTN HOLIDAY SERVICE -- This entry defines how to reroute ACD call when group status is Holiday Status. 5 Release 0: Release 1: Announcement. 2: Forward HOLIDAY FWD DEST -- When Holiday Service type is Forward, applied destination can be assigned. 6 - - OVERFLOW SERVICE -- This entry defines how to reroute ACD call when group status is Overflow Status.
PAGE 515
ACD Basic Feature 10-7 Chapter 10: ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) PGM 213 BTN RANGE DEFAULT AGENT NO-ANS OPTION -- This entry defines no-answer Agent No-Answer case about ACD-call. 1 Not use 2 Forward: call will be forwarded to defined destination 3 DND: Agent state will be changed automatically to DND state.
PAGE 516
ACD Basic Feature 10-8 Chapter 10: ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) PGM 214 BTN RANGE DEFAULT GROUP Q-CNT DISPLAY -- This entry defines display of Queuing count of ACD call. 6 0:Off 1:On 0:Off Q-CNT INTERVAL -- This entry defines display interval seconds of Queuing count of ACD call. 7 0:Real Time 1:10sec 2:20sec 3:30sec 4:40sec 5:50sec 6:60sec 0:Real Time LOGIN PASSWD CHECK -- This entry defines check the password when agent log-in.
PAGE 517
ACD Group Service Status 10-9 Chapter 10: ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) PGM 214 BTN RANGE DEFAULT INFO PRINT INTERVAL -- This entry defines print interval seconds of Information Traffic data. 17 001-250 001 (10 sec) INFO CLR AFTER PRT -- If this value is ON, after print Information traffic data, previous data will be deleted. 18 0:Off 1:On 0:Off ACD Group Service Status ACD group has 5 status settings (Normal / Forward / Overflow / Night / Holiday Status).
PAGE 518
ACD Group Service Status 10-10 Chapter 10: ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) OPERATIONS Group Forward Status Manually by Supervisor 1. Dial {ACD Supervisor Group Call Forward} feature code. OR 2. Press flex button registered as {ACD Supervisor Group Call Forward} feature code. 3. {ACD Supervisor Group Call Forward} flex button is turned on steadily. Night Status Manually by Supervisor 1. Dial {ACD Supervisor Group Night Mode} feature code. OR 2.
PAGE 519
ACD Group Service Status 10-11 Chapter 10: ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) PROGRAMMING Station Port Station Port Attribute (PGM 124) … see details on page A-28 Release 1.0 PGM 124 BTN RANGE MSG WAIT INDICATION -- this menu determines the way to notify a station to wait message. 1 01-48 MW Remind Tone APPLY DIFF RING -- determine user’s differential ring mode. Applying to all ring mode or normal ring mode.
PAGE 520
ACD Group Service Status 10-12 Chapter 10: ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) PGM 124 BTN RANGE DEFAULT CLI IP ADDRESS -- CLI IP Address. 10 IP Address 0.0.0.0 ACD AGENT PRIORITY -- when a station is a member of an ACD Group, this value will be used for priority as agent. 11 01-20 10 Station Group ACD Group Assignment (PGM 212) … see details on page A-78 PGM 212 BTN RANGE DEFAULT GROUP NAME -- ACD Group Name.
PAGE 521
ACD Group Service Status 10-13 Chapter 10: ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) ACD Group Attribute1 (PGM 213) … see details on page A-80 PGM 213 Release 1.0 BTN RANGE DEFAULT SUB-SUP ASSIGN -- This entry assigns Sub-Supervisor in ACD Group. 1 - - GROUP FWD DEST -- When ACD Group status is Group Forward Status, all of ACD call will be forwarded to this entry assigned destination. 2 - - NIGHT SERVICE -- -- This entry defines how to reroute ACD call when group status is Night Status.
PAGE 522
ACD Group Service Status 10-14 Chapter 10: ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) PGM 213 BTN RANGE DEFAULT FWD AFTER QUEUING -- This entry defines reroute usage after queuing time over. 13 0: Off 1: On Off Q-FWD DEST -- Reroute destination after queuing time over. 14 - - AGENT NO-ANS OPTION -- This entry defines no-answer Agent No-Answer case about ACD-call. 1 Not use 2 Forward: call will be forwarded to defined destination 3 DND: Agent state will be changed automatically to DND state.
PAGE 523
ACD Group Service Status 10-15 Chapter 10: ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) Release 1.0 PGM 214 BTN RANGE DEFAULT ANNOUNCEMENT USE -- This entry defines usage of Announcement when agent answer incoming ACD Call. 5 0:Off 1:On 0:Off GROUP Q-CNT DISPLAY -- This entry defines display of Queuing count of ACD call. 6 0:Off 1:On 0:Off Q-CNT INTERVAL -- This entry defines display interval seconds of Queuing count of ACD call.
PAGE 524
ACD Call Distribution by Priority 10-16 Chapter 10: ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) PGM 214 BTN RANGE DEFAULT INFO DATA PRINT -- This entry defines usage of ACD Call Traffic Information data Print or Not. Information Traffic data will be printed at Information-Print Port. 16 0:Off 1:On 0:Off INFO PRINT INTERVAL -- This entry defines print interval seconds of Information Traffic data.
PAGE 525
ACD Call Distribution by Priority 10-17 Chapter 10: ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) PROGRAMMING Station Group ACD Group Assignment (PGM 212) … see details on page A-78 PGM 212 BTN RANGE DEFAULT GROUP NAME -- ACD Group Name. 1 Start ACD Group Number & End ACD Group Number SERVICE MODE -- ACD Group Status. 2 0: Normal 1: Group Forward 2: Overflow 3: Night 4: Holiday 5: Not Service Normal TENANT NO -- ACD Tenant Number.
PAGE 526
ACD Call Distribution by Priority 10-18 Chapter 10: ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) PGM 213 BTN RANGE DEFAULT NIGHT FWD DEST -- When Night Service type is Forward, applied destination can be assigned. 4 - HOLIDAY SERVICE -- This entry defines how to reroute ACD call when group status is Holiday Status. 5 Release 0: Release 1: Announcement. 2: Forward HOLIDAY FWD DEST -- When Holiday Service type is Forward, applied destination can be assigned.
PAGE 527
ACD Call Distribution by Priority 10-19 Chapter 10: ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) PGM 213 BTN RANGE DEFAULT AGENT NO-ANS OPTION -- This entry defines no-answer Agent No-Answer case about ACD-call. 1 Not use 2 Forward: call will be forwarded to defined destination 3 DND: Agent state will be changed automatically to DND state.
PAGE 528
ACD Call Distribution by Priority 10-20 Chapter 10: ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) PGM 214 BTN RANGE DEFAULT GROUP Q-CNT DISPLAY -- This entry defines display of Queuing count of ACD call. 6 0:Off 1:On 0:Off Q-CNT INTERVAL -- This entry defines display interval seconds of Queuing count of ACD call. 7 0:Real Time 1:10sec 2:20sec 3:30sec 4:40sec 5:50sec 6:60sec 0:Real Time LOGIN PASSWD CHECK -- This entry defines check the password when agent log-in.
PAGE 529
ACD Call Queuing Service 10-21 Chapter 10: ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) PGM 214 BTN RANGE DEFAULT INFO PRINT INTERVAL -- This entry defines print interval seconds of Information Traffic data. 17 001-250 001 (10 sec) INFO CLR AFTER PRT -- If this value is ON, after print Information traffic data, previous data will be deleted. 18 0:Off 1:On 0:Off ACD Call Queuing Service If all of agents are busy or all of agents are not log-in, next ACD call will be queued.
PAGE 530
ACD Call Queuing Service 10-22 Chapter 10: ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) OPERATIONS ACD Call Operation when All of agents are not ready 1. ACD call arrives and all the agents are not ready to receive the call. 2. ACD call will be queued and then 1st queuing announcement will be served. 3. After 1st queuing announcement timer expired, system checks there are next announcement step admin is set or not. 4. If there is more next announcement step, 2nd announcement will be served. 5.
PAGE 531
ACD Call Queuing Service 10-23 Chapter 10: ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) OR 6. Press 2 is Forward queued call to some of destination. 7. If dial some of Tel-Number and then press hold or '#' button, first queued call will be rerouted. PROGRAMMING Numbering Plan Feature Numbering Plan (PGM 113) … see details on page A-18 Station Group ACD Group Assignment (PGM 212) … see details on page A-78 PGM 212 Release 1.0 BTN RANGE DEFAULT GROUP NAME -- ACD Group Name.
PAGE 532
ACD Call Queuing Service 10-24 Chapter 10: ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) ACD Group Attribute1 (PGM 213) … see details on page A-80 PGM 213 BTN RANGE DEFAULT SUB-SUP ASSIGN -- This entry assigns Sub-Supervisor in ACD Group. 1 - - GROUP FWD DEST -- When ACD Group status is Group Forward Status, all of ACD call will be forwarded to this entry assigned destination. 2 - - NIGHT SERVICE -- -- This entry defines how to reroute ACD call when group status is Night Status.
PAGE 533
ACD Call Queuing Service 10-25 Chapter 10: ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) PGM 213 BTN RANGE DEFAULT FWD AFTER QUEUING -- This entry defines reroute usage after queuing time over. 13 0: Off 1: On Off Q-FWD DEST -- Reroute destination after queuing time over. 14 - - AGENT NO-ANS OPTION -- This entry defines no-answer Agent No-Answer case about ACD-call. 1 Not use 2 Forward: call will be forwarded to defined destination 3 DND: Agent state will be changed automatically to DND state.
PAGE 534
ACD Call Queuing Service 10-26 Chapter 10: ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) PGM 214 BTN ANNOUNCEMENT USE -- This entry defines usage of Announcement when agent answer incoming ACD Call. 5 0:Off 1:On 0:Off GROUP Q-CNT DISPLAY -- This entry defines display of Queuing count of ACD call. 6 0:Off 1:On 0:Off Q-CNT INTERVAL -- This entry defines display interval seconds of Queuing count of ACD call.
PAGE 535
ACD Call Queuing Service 10-27 Chapter 10: ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) PGM 214 BTN RANGE DEFAULT INFO DATA PRINT -- This entry defines usage of ACD Call Traffic Information data Print or Not. Information Traffic data will be printed at Information-Print Port. 16 0:Off 1:On 0:Off INFO PRINT INTERVAL -- This entry defines print interval seconds of Information Traffic data.
PAGE 536
CCR Service During ACD Announcement 10-28 Chapter 10: ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) CCR Service During ACD Announcement Administrator can set about CCR service during each Announcement service. In each ACD Group has 8 Announcement for CCR (5 Queuing Announcements, Night, Holiday, and Overflow Announcements). Administrator can make rule CCR usage during each kinds of Announcement. If each kinds of announcement's Tone type is set as announcement and then CCR usage is set.
PAGE 537
CCR Service During ACD Announcement 10-29 Chapter 10: ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) 5. Defined rule will be operated. PROGRAMMING Station Group ACD Group Assignment (PGM 212) … see details on page A-78 PGM 212 BTN RANGE DEFAULT GROUP NAME -- ACD Group Name. 1 Start ACD Group Number & End ACD Group Number SERVICE MODE -- ACD Group Status. 2 0: Normal 1: Group Forward 2: Overflow 3: Night 4: Holiday 5: Not Service Normal TENANT NO -- ACD Tenant Number.
PAGE 538
CCR Service During ACD Announcement 10-30 Chapter 10: ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) PGM 213 BTN RANGE NIGHT SERVICE -- -- This entry defines how to reroute ACD call when group status is Night Status. 3 0: Release 1: Announcement 2: Forward Release NIGHT FWD DEST -- When Night Service type is Forward, applied destination can be assigned. 4 - - HOLIDAY SERVICE -- This entry defines how to reroute ACD call when group status is Holiday Status. 5 Release 0: Release 1: Announcement.
PAGE 539
CCR Service During ACD Announcement 10-31 Chapter 10: ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) PGM 213 BTN RANGE DEFAULT AGENT NO-ANS OPTION -- This entry defines no-answer Agent No-Answer case about ACD-call. 1 Not use 2 Forward: call will be forwarded to defined destination 3 DND: Agent state will be changed automatically to DND state.
PAGE 540
CCR Service During ACD Announcement 10-32 Chapter 10: ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) PGM 214 BTN RANGE DEFAULT GROUP Q-CNT DISPLAY -- This entry defines display of Queuing count of ACD call. 6 0:Off 1:On 0:Off Q-CNT INTERVAL -- This entry defines display interval seconds of Queuing count of ACD call. 7 0:Real Time 1:10sec 2:20sec 3:30sec 4:40sec 5:50sec 6:60sec 0:Real Time LOGIN PASSWD CHECK -- This entry defines check the password when agent log-in.
PAGE 541
ACD Agent State 10-33 Chapter 10: ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) PGM 214 BTN RANGE DEFAULT INFO PRINT INTERVAL -- This entry defines print interval seconds of Information Traffic data. 17 001-250 001 (10 sec) INFO CLR AFTER PRT -- If this value is ON, after print Information traffic data, previous data will be deleted. 18 0:Off 1:On 0:Off ACD Group Announcement (PGM 215) … see details on page A-84 ACD Agent State When administrator assigns the agents, all of agents are log-out state.
PAGE 542
ACD Agent State 10-34 Chapter 10: ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) If [Agent No-Answer Service] admin is set as DND State Change [PGM214-Flex5], when agent does not answer the ACD call, this agent state will be changed to DND state. Administrator can also set no-answer ACD call to forward to registered destination [PGM214-Flex6]. OPERATIONS Agent Work State 1. Dial {ACD Agent Work Mode} feature code. OR 2. Press flex button registered as {ACD Agent Work Mode} feature code. 3.
PAGE 543
ACD Agent State 10-35 Chapter 10: ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) PROGRAMMING Numbering Plan Feature Numbering Plan (PGM 113) … see details on page A-18 Station Group ACD Group Assignment (PGM 212) … see details on page A-78 PGM 212 BTN RANGE DEFAULT GROUP NAME -- ACD Group Name. 1 Start ACD Group Number & End ACD Group Number SERVICE MODE -- ACD Group Status. 2 0: Normal 1: Group Forward 2: Overflow 3: Night 4: Holiday 5: Not Service Normal TENANT NO -- ACD Tenant Number.
PAGE 544
ACD Agent State 10-36 Chapter 10: ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) PGM 213 BTN RANGE NIGHT SERVICE -- -- This entry defines how to reroute ACD call when group status is Night Status. 3 0: Release 1: Announcement 2: Forward Release NIGHT FWD DEST -- When Night Service type is Forward, applied destination can be assigned. 4 - - HOLIDAY SERVICE -- This entry defines how to reroute ACD call when group status is Holiday Status. 5 Release 0: Release 1: Announcement.
PAGE 545
ACD Agent State 10-37 Chapter 10: ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) PGM 213 BTN RANGE DEFAULT AGENT NO-ANS OPTION -- This entry defines no-answer Agent No-Answer case about ACD-call. 1 Not use 2 Forward: call will be forwarded to defined destination 3 DND: Agent state will be changed automatically to DND state.
PAGE 546
ACD Agent State 10-38 Chapter 10: ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) PGM 214 BTN RANGE DEFAULT GROUP Q-CNT DISPLAY -- This entry defines display of Queuing count of ACD call. 6 0:Off 1:On 0:Off Q-CNT INTERVAL -- This entry defines display interval seconds of Queuing count of ACD call. 7 0:Real Time 1:10sec 2:20sec 3:30sec 4:40sec 5:50sec 6:60sec 0:Real Time LOGIN PASSWD CHECK -- This entry defines check the password when agent log-in.
PAGE 547
ACD Agent Log-in / Log-out Default Setting 10-39 Chapter 10: ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) PGM 214 BTN RANGE DEFAULT INFO PRINT INTERVAL -- This entry defines print interval seconds of Information Traffic data. 17 001-250 001 (10 sec) INFO CLR AFTER PRT -- If this value is ON, after print Information traffic data, previous data will be deleted.
PAGE 548
ACD Agent Log-in / Log-out Default Setting 10-40 Chapter 10: ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) PROGRAMMING Numbering Plan Feature Numbering Plan (PGM 113) … see details on page A-18 Station Group ACD Group Assignment (PGM 212) … see details on page A-78 PGM 212 BTN RANGE DEFAULT GROUP NAME -- ACD Group Name. 1 Start ACD Group Number & End ACD Group Number SERVICE MODE -- ACD Group Status.
PAGE 549
ACD Agent Log-in / Log-out Default Setting 10-41 Chapter 10: ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) Release 1.0 PGM 213 BTN RANGE NIGHT SERVICE -- -- This entry defines how to reroute ACD call when group status is Night Status. 3 0: Release 1: Announcement 2: Forward Release NIGHT FWD DEST -- When Night Service type is Forward, applied destination can be assigned. 4 - - HOLIDAY SERVICE -- This entry defines how to reroute ACD call when group status is Holiday Status.
PAGE 550
ACD Agent Log-in / Log-out Default Setting 10-42 Chapter 10: ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) PGM 213 BTN RANGE DEFAULT AGENT NO-ANS OPTION -- This entry defines no-answer Agent No-Answer case about ACD-call. 1 Not use 2 Forward: call will be forwarded to defined destination 3 DND: Agent state will be changed automatically to DND state.
PAGE 551
ACD Agent Log-in / Log-out Default Setting 10-43 Chapter 10: ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) PGM 214 Release 1.0 BTN RANGE DEFAULT GROUP Q-CNT DISPLAY -- This entry defines display of Queuing count of ACD call. 6 0:Off 1:On 0:Off Q-CNT INTERVAL -- This entry defines display interval seconds of Queuing count of ACD call. 7 0:Real Time 1:10sec 2:20sec 3:30sec 4:40sec 5:50sec 6:60sec 0:Real Time LOGIN PASSWD CHECK -- This entry defines check the password when agent log-in.
PAGE 552
ACD Call Indication 10-44 Chapter 10: ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) PGM 214 BTN RANGE DEFAULT INFO PRINT INTERVAL -- This entry defines print interval seconds of Information Traffic data. 17 001-250 001 (10 sec) INFO CLR AFTER PRT -- If this value is ON, after print Information traffic data, previous data will be deleted. 18 0:Off 1:On 0:Off ACD Call Indication Agents can recognize ACD call or the other common call with {ACD Call Indication} and {NON ACD Call Indication} feature codes.
PAGE 553
ACD Call Indication 10-45 Chapter 10: ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) Station Port Station Port Attribute (PGM 124) … see details on page A-28 Release 1.0 PGM 124 BTN RANGE MSG WAIT INDICATION -- this menu determines the way to notify a station to wait message. 1 01-48 MW Remind Tone APPLY DIFF RING -- determine user’s differential ring mode. Applying to all ring mode or normal ring mode. 2 1-9 All Ring ICM DIFF RING ID -- set the intercom differential ring ID – usually 1-4 is valid.
PAGE 554
ACD Call Indication 10-46 Chapter 10: ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) Station Group ACD Group Assignment (PGM 212) … see details on page A-78 PGM 212 BTN RANGE DEFAULT GROUP NAME -- ACD Group Name. 1 Start ACD Group Number & End ACD Group Number SERVICE MODE -- ACD Group Status. 2 0: Normal 1: Group Forward 2: Overflow 3: Night 4: Holiday 5: Not Service Normal TENANT NO -- ACD Tenant Number. 3 1-9 (MBX IP-300) 1-5 (MBX IP-100) 1 TIME TABLE INDEX -- ACD Group Time Table.
PAGE 555
ACD Call Indication 10-47 Chapter 10: ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) Release 1.0 PGM 213 BTN RANGE HOLIDAY SERVICE -- This entry defines how to reroute ACD call when group status is Holiday Status. 5 Release 0: Release 1: Announcement. 2: Forward HOLIDAY FWD DEST -- When Holiday Service type is Forward, applied destination can be assigned. 6 - - OVERFLOW SERVICE -- This entry defines how to reroute ACD call when group status is Overflow Status.
PAGE 556
ACD Call Indication 10-48 Chapter 10: ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) PGM 213 BTN RANGE DEFAULT AGENT NO-ANS OPTION -- This entry defines no-answer Agent No-Answer case about ACD-call. 1 Not use 2 Forward: call will be forwarded to defined destination 3 DND: Agent state will be changed automatically to DND state.
PAGE 557
ACD Call Indication 10-49 Chapter 10: ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) PGM 214 Release 1.0 BTN RANGE DEFAULT GROUP Q-CNT DISPLAY -- This entry defines display of Queuing count of ACD call. 6 0:Off 1:On 0:Off Q-CNT INTERVAL -- This entry defines display interval seconds of Queuing count of ACD call. 7 0:Real Time 1:10sec 2:20sec 3:30sec 4:40sec 5:50sec 6:60sec 0:Real Time LOGIN PASSWD CHECK -- This entry defines check the password when agent log-in.
PAGE 558
ACD Group Supervisor Functions 10-50 Chapter 10: ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) PGM 214 BTN RANGE DEFAULT INFO PRINT INTERVAL -- This entry defines print interval seconds of Information Traffic data. 17 001-250 001 (10 sec) INFO CLR AFTER PRT -- If this value is ON, after print Information traffic data, previous data will be deleted. 18 0:Off 1:On 0:Off ACD Group Supervisor Functions An ACD group can have one Supervisor and three Sub-Supervisors.
PAGE 559
ACD Group Supervisor Functions 10-51 Chapter 10: ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) d) Supervisor can change max Queuing Count and also can change Queuing Service Announcement Step. Supervisor also can make rule how to handle ACD call when all of queuing announcement service is over. And After Queuing Forward Destination can be changed. 2. Supervisor and Sub-Supervisor Answer the Queued ACD call. Supervisor and Sub-Supervisor can find queued ACD call count on the LCD.
PAGE 560
ACD Group Supervisor Functions 10-52 Chapter 10: ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) b) Agent Log-In / Log-Out information is displayed and if agent is Log-In state, Ready or DND or Work sub-state also displayed. At that time, Supervisor can choose sub-option (Forced-Log In/Out, Forced Ready, Forced DND, and Forced Work). c) Next agent's status information can be changed when Supervisor press Volume-Up/Down button or Up/Down in Navigation Key.
PAGE 561
ACD Group Supervisor Functions 10-53 Chapter 10: ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) OPERATIONS Group Forward / Night / Holiday Status Change by Supervisor 1. Dial {ACD Supervisor Group Forward / Night / Holiday Status} feature code. OR 2. Press flex button registered as {ACD Supervisor Group Forward / Night / Holiday Status} feature code. 3. Group Status will be changed. ACD Group Management or ACD Agent State Check With Web-Admin 1. Connect Web-Admin Page of MBX IP System 2. Choose Station Program Menu.
PAGE 562
ACD Group Supervisor Functions 10-54 Chapter 10: ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) 7. Press "2" and Dial Tel-Number. 8. Press "#" or [HOLD] button, then queued call will be routed to Dialed tel-Number. Silent Monitor by Supervisor 1. Dial {ACD Supervisor Silent Monitor} feature code. OR 2. Press flex button registered as {ACD Supervisor Silent Monitor} feature code. 3. Dial desired Agent number. 4. Agent's conversation will be overhead.
PAGE 563
ACD Group Supervisor Functions 10-55 Chapter 10: ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) PGM 212 BTN RANGE DEFAULT AUTO MODE -- ACD Group Status changed according to System Time Table Index. 5 0: Not Use 1: Night Auto 2: Holiday Auto 3: Night/Holiday Auto Not Use SUPERVISOR NUM -- ACD Group Supervisor assign. 6 - - MEMBER ASSIGN -- ACD Group Agent assign. 7 - - ACD Group Attribute1 (PGM 213) … see details on page A-80 PGM 213 Release 1.
PAGE 564
ACD Group Supervisor Functions 10-56 Chapter 10: ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) PGM 213 BTN RANGE DEFAULT QUEUING ANNC STEP -- This entry defines queuing announcement play service step. One ACD Group can have max 5 announcements for queuing ACD Call. 10 1-5 1 REPEAT COUNT -- This entry defines total queuing announcement repeat service count. If this entry is defines as One or More Times service, Queuing Announcement will be played from 1st to defined Step.
PAGE 565
ACD Group Supervisor Functions 10-57 Chapter 10: ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) Release 1.0 PGM 214 BTN RANGE DEFAULT AUTO-WORK MODE OPTION -- This entry defines when change the agent work state. (It is applied, when only agent has auto-work option). 1 CALL: after conversation, agent state will be changed to work state. 2 CALL, RING: after conversation or after ringing, agent state will be changed to work state.
PAGE 566
ACD Group Supervisor Functions 10-58 Chapter 10: ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) PGM 214 BTN RANGE DEFAULT LOGIN HANDSET -- This entry defines usage of Agent Headset option when agent log-in.
PAGE 567
ACD Group Call Traffic 10-59 Chapter 10: ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) ACD Group Call Traffic ACD Group Call Traffic and Agent Call Traffic are automatically saved in the System. Supervisor and Sub-Supervisor can check these kinds of Traffic data on their Digital-Phone. And also Supervisor and Sub-Supervisor can access ACD Group Call Traffic web page in Station Program of Web-Admin and then check and clear Traffic data. ACD Group Call Traffic can be printed periodically as Information-Data format.
PAGE 568
ACD Group Call Traffic 10-60 Chapter 10: ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) e) Last Log-In Time 00:00:00 (hour: minute: second) - When Supervisor enter Agent Call Traffic feature, first agent data will be displayed. And Supervisor can check all of agent data with Volume-Up/Down button or Up/Down in Navigation Key. - During checking the Group Call Traffic information, Supervisor can clear all of Group Call Traffic with [SPEED] button.
PAGE 569
ACD Group Call Traffic 10-61 Chapter 10: ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) Field(s) DESCRIPTION ~ (tilt) Means start of ACD statistics and is always located at first column = (equal) Delimiter between each meaningful data 1 ACD Group number 2 Total call counter 3 Unanswered call counter 4 All busy counter 5 Average ringing time (ex., 96=1 min 36 sec) 6 Average call service time (ex., 25=0 min 25 sec) 7 Total busy time (ex.
PAGE 570
ACD Group Call Traffic 10-62 Chapter 10: ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) Agent Call Traffic Format ~ 1 = 2 = 3 = 4 = 5 cr lf Field(s) Description ~ (tilt) Means start of ACD statistics and is always located at first column = (equal) Delimiter between each meaningful data 1 Each Agent number 2 Total call counter 3 Unanswered call counter 4 Average ringing time (ex., 96=1 min 36 sec) 5 Average service time (ex.
PAGE 571
ACD Group Call Traffic 10-63 Chapter 10: ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) PGM 212 BTN RANGE DEFAULT TIME TABLE INDEX -- ACD Group Time Table. 4 1-9 1 AUTO MODE -- ACD Group Status changed according to System Time Table Index. 5 0: Not Use 1: Night Auto 2: Holiday Auto 3: Night/Holiday Auto Not Use SUPERVISOR NUM -- ACD Group Supervisor assign. 6 - - MEMBER ASSIGN -- ACD Group Agent assign. 7 - - ACD Group Attribute1 (PGM 213) … see details on page A-80 PGM 213 Release 1.
PAGE 572
ACD Group Call Traffic 10-64 Chapter 10: ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) PGM 213 BTN RANGE DEFAULT QUEUING ANNC STEP -- This entry defines queuing announcement play service step. One ACD Group can have max 5 announcements for queuing ACD Call. 10 1-5 1 REPEAT COUNT -- This entry defines total queuing announcement repeat service count. If this entry is defines as One or More Times service, Queuing Announcement will be played from 1st to defined Step.
PAGE 573
ACD Group Call Traffic 10-65 Chapter 10: ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) Release 1.0 PGM 214 BTN RANGE DEFAULT AUTO-WORK MODE OPTION -- This entry defines when change the agent work state. (It is applied, when only agent has auto-work option). 1 CALL: after conversation, agent state will be changed to work state. 2 CALL, RING: after conversation or after ringing, agent state will be changed to work state.
PAGE 574
ACD Group Call Traffic 10-66 Chapter 10: ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) PGM 214 BTN RANGE DEFAULT LOGIN HANDSET -- This entry defines usage of Agent Headset option when agent log-in.
PAGE 575
Appendix A System Programming Tables The MBX IP system can be programmed to meet each customer's individual needs. System programming may be accomplished by entering the "PROGRAM MODE" at an assigned Admin Station or using the Web Admin (refer to the "MBX IP Web Administration Guide"). This section provides general information. Other sections include: • Section 2 - provides a description for data entry using the Admin Station.
PAGE 576
Program Menu Structure A-2 Appendix A: System Programming Tables Program Menu Structure Database Administration is accomplished by entering "PROGRAM CODES" from the dial pad of a phone or selecting an item from the Navigation pane in the Web Admin (refer to MBX IP Web Adminisration Guide). Data items are organized as a group with a common affect, i.e. station, system, numbering plan, etc. Items may be further grouped forming a multi-layered menu structure as shown in the following Table.
PAGE 577
Administration Menu Table A-3 Appendix A: System Programming Tables Administration Station Number Data Menu Station VMIB Attribute 145 Mobile Phone Attribute 146 CO/IP Group Access 150 Page Zone Access 151 Command Group Access 152 CO Line Attribute 160-163 Incoming CO ATTR 165-166 CO Ring Assignment CO Line Data Station Group Data 167 Normal/DISA CO ATTR 168 Incoming CO Alternative 169 Outgoing CO ATTR 170-171 Outgoing CO Alternative 173 CO Inter-Digit Timer 174 DTMF Send Int
PAGE 578
Administration Menu Table A-4 Appendix A: System Programming Tables Administration Menu Music Source System Data 229 RS-232 Setting 230 Serial Port Selection 231 SMDR Attribute 232 System Date & Time 233 LED Flashing Rate 234 PPP Attribute 235 Mobile Attribute 236 Intercom Busy Digit 237 Dial-Tone Digit Table 240 Executive/Secretary Assign 241 Executive Access 242 PPTP Attribute --- Web Access Authorization --- Toll Exception Table 250 Digit Conv Table 251-252 System Time
PAGE 579
Administration Menu Table A-5 Appendix A: System Programming Tables Administration Menu CO Call Restriction Tenant Data Board Data Voice Network 284-285 Local Call Prefix Table 286 Long Call Prefix Table 287 International Call Prefix 288 Tone Table 290 ISDN Board Attribute 300 ISDN Clock Priority 301 VOIB/VMIB Board Attr 305 Reset Board 310 Networking Attr 320 Networking Numbering 321 T-Net Attribute 330 e ...
PAGE 580
S/W Upgrade A-6 Appendix A: System Programming Tables S/W Upgrade S/W Upgrade File Upload G/W Upgrade Upgrade Process View VMIB Prompt Upgrade AAFU System Greeting Up & Download BASE Upgrade System Management System Database SMDR Text Database File System Trace Gain & Cadence Control Appliances Control DECT Statistics Feature Voice Mail Delete Release 1.
PAGE 581
Station Admin Programming A-7 Appendix A: System Programming Tables Station Admin Programming LCD & Button Functions While in the PROGRAM MODE, the Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) and Flex button LEDs of an Admin Station are used to guide and indicate status of the feature. The dial pad is most often used to enter data after selecting a data item using the Flex buttons. In some cases, pressing a Flex button will toggle the entry with the Flex button LED indicating the status (ON/OFF).
PAGE 582
Data Entry Mode A-8 Appendix A: System Programming Tables Data Entry Mode All data entry is accomplished from an Admin Station or station assigned for data entry (Station Port Attributes I (PGM CODE 121, Flex button 5). After DB initialization, Station 100 (Station port # 01) may access the system database. In addition, as default, there is no Station Admin password defined. To enter the PROGRAM MODE: 1. From the Admin Station press the [PGM] button and then dial * and #. 2. Enter the Admin password.
PAGE 583
PRE-PROGRAMMED DATA - PGM Codes 100 to 108 A-9 Appendix A: System Programming Tables PRE-PROGRAMMED DATA - PGM Codes 100 to 108 Location Program (PGM 100) Under Location Program, the country is identified using the international dial codes (COUNTRY CODE). If the Country code requires changing, the system must be initialized to restructure memory and create the country specific defaults, gain, frequencies and other system characteristics specific to the country and regional regulatory requirements.
PAGE 584
Location Program (PGM 100) A-10 Appendix A: System Programming Tables Nation Codes NATION Argentina Australia Azerbaijan Bahrain Bangladesh Belarus Belgium Bolivia Brazil Brunei Cameroon Chile China (P.R.C) Colombia Costa Rica Cyprus Czech (Slovak) Denmark Ecuador Egypt El Salvador Ethiopia Fiji Finland France Gabon Georgia German Ghana Greece Guam Guatemala Guyana Haiti Release 1.
PAGE 585
Slot Assignment (PGM 101) A-11 Appendix A: System Programming Tables Slot Assignment (PGM 101) 1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 101. 2. Enter Slot number 3. To change board type, press the Flex button 1 and dial board. Refer to NOTE2 - Board Type Code. 4. To change device number, press the Flex button 2 and dial device. 5. To store the location data press the [SAVE] button. Slot Assignment PGM 101 BTN RANGE REMARK SLOT ASSIGNMENT-- refer to "Board Type Code" table below.
PAGE 586
Logical Slot Assignment (PGM 103) A-12 Appendix A: System Programming Tables Logical Slot Assignment (PGM 103) 1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 103. 2. Press the Flex button (1-3) to change slot order. 3. Enter slot numbers. 4. Press the [SAVE] button to store.
PAGE 587
IP Phone/Phontage Registration Table (PGM 106) A-13 Appendix A: System Programming Tables IP Phone/Phontage Registration Table (PGM 106) 1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 106. 2. Enter bin number to be assigned. 3. Press the Flex button (1-7) and enter the desired data. 4. Press the [SAVE] button to store. PGM 106 Release 1.0 BTN RANGE REMARK MAC ADDRESS -- Used to register an IP Phone to the System, by entering its MAC Address.
PAGE 588
DTIM/SLTM Registration Table (PGM 107) A-14 Appendix A: System Programming Tables DTIM/SLTM Registration Table (PGM 107) 1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 107. 2. Enter slot number to be assigned. 3. Press the Flex button (1-5) and enter the desired data 4. Press the [SAVE] button to store. PGM 107 BTN RANGE REMARK MAC ADDRESS -- Used to register a DTIM to the System, by entering its MAC Address. (Refer to Alphanumeric Dial Pad entries on page B-105.
PAGE 589
System Information (PGM 109) A-15 Appendix A: System Programming Tables PGM 108 BTN RANGE REMARK ROUTER IP ADDR -- IP Address of router for external network (WAN/IP) access. Required for shared voice and data LAN and remote Web access. 3 - 10.10.10.254 FIREWALL IP ADDR -- When the system is installed behind a NAPT server, the fixed IP Address provided by the NAPT server must be assigned in this field. Also, use this IP address for the MFIM address in remote devices. 4 - 0.0.0.
PAGE 590
NUMBERING PLAN DATA - PGM Codes 110 to 116 A-16 Appendix A: System Programming Tables NUMBERING PLAN DATA - PGM Codes 110 to 116 Numbering Plan Type (PGM 110) The MBX IP system provides default Numbering plan set. One of any numbering plans can be installed or every numbering plan can be cleared. If numbering plan type 7 is selected, all numbering codes are deleted. After deleting, the user should then assign the ‘System Numbering Plan (PGM 111)’.
PAGE 591
Flexible Station Number (PGM 112) A-17 Appendix A: System Programming Tables 5. Press the [SAVE] button to update changed data. PGM 111 BTN RANGE PREFIX CODE -- leading preceding digits of some numbering plan code. 1 1-8 digits MORE DIGITS -- number of digits following the 2 (0-4) REMARK Prefix code length + More Digits (total of Max 8) Prefix code. Flexible Station Number (PGM 112) Each station has station numbers and every station numbers can be edited.
PAGE 592
FEATURE NUMBERING PLAN (PGM 113) A-18 Appendix A: System Programming Tables FEATURE NUMBERING PLAN (PGM 113) Feature Numbering codes for the system can be assigned and edited in PGM 113. Appendix B provides the default values for each of the eight base Numbering Plans. Select the default Numbering Plan in PGM 110. 1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 115:2. Select the desired index (01-108); refer to the following table. 3. Press the [SAVE] button to store the new Numbering Plan data.
PAGE 593
FEATURE NUMBERING PLAN (PGM 113) A-19 Appendix A: System Programming Tables BTN Release 1.
PAGE 594
FEATURE NUMBERING PLAN (PGM 113) A-20 Appendix A: System Programming Tables BTN FEATURE REMARK 50 Delete Conf Room 528 + Conf.
PAGE 595
FEATURE NUMBERING PLAN (PGM 113) A-21 Appendix A: System Programming Tables BTN FEATURE REMARK 80 System Alarm Reset 565 81 Fault Alarm Reset 566 82 Door Open #*1 83 Keypad Facility ##* 84 T-Net Log-In/Out 586 85 Universal Answer 587 86 USB Call Record 588 87 Delete All VM Message 681 88 VM Page Message Record 682 89 Direct VM Transfer 683 90 Loop Key 684 91 Call Log 685 92 ACD Agent Log-In/Out 500 93 ACD Agent DND 501 94 ACD Agent Word Mode 502 95 ACD Agen
PAGE 596
CO Group Access Code (PGM 114) A-22 Appendix A: System Programming Tables CO Group Access Code (PGM 114) MBX IP System provides CO Group Access Codes (73 in MBX IP-300/25 in MBX IP-100). Each code can be edited by Admin Programming. Each CO Group Access Code has its attributes (refer to PGM Code 178). 1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 114. 2. Press Flex button 1 to edit whole CO Grp access code by range. 3. Enter desired access code by range. OR 4. Press Flex button 2 to edit one CO Grp access code.
PAGE 597
ACD Group Number (PGM 118) A-23 Appendix A: System Programming Tables PGM 115 BTN RANGE REMARK STATION GROUP RANGE (Edit by Range) 1 Start Station Group Number & End Station Group Number - STATION GROUP NUMBER (Edit) 2 Station Group Number - ACD Group Number (PGM 118) MBX IP300 System has max 50 ACD Group Number and MBX IP100 System has max 20 ACD Group Number. But the ACD default Group Number is the same from 600-619 for both systems.
PAGE 598
STATION DATA - PGM Codes 120-152 A-24 Appendix A: System Programming Tables STATION DATA - PGM Codes 120-152 Station Type (PGM 120) Each station has its own station type according to its terminal type. This station type is used by the system to recognize the station’s capabilities. In addition, this station type defines DSS/BLF consoles, which can be connected to a station. Maximum 5 DSS/BLF consoles can be connected to a station.
PAGE 599
Station Port Attributes (PGM 121-124) A-25 Appendix A: System Programming Tables 7. Mode (2): For IP-8000 series, which can have 4 serial DSS/BLF, consoles. - Serial DSS/BLF consoles have no station number. After connecting to station, just select console type. - Select Flex button (1-4) for serial DSS map Index (1-4) and select serial DSS/BLF console type. (0:none, 1:12-btn DSS, 2:12-btn LSS, 3: 48-Btn DSS) - Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entries. 8.
PAGE 600
Station Port Attributes (PGM 121-124) A-26 Appendix A: System Programming Tables PGM 121 BTN RANGE DEFAULT DUMMY TERMINAL -- this item defines whether a station is used for hot desk terminal. If you want to use a station as hot desk, this field must be set to ‘ON’. 8 0: Off 1: On Off PORT BLOCK -- if this value is set to ON, Station is blocked so it is impossible to use that station. 9 0: Off 1: On Off GAIN TABLE IDX -- this feature allows 3 kinds of gain tables per station.
PAGE 601
Station Port Attributes (PGM 121-124) A-27 Appendix A: System Programming Tables PGM 122 BTN RANGE DEFAULT IP-8000 LCD BRIGHTTNESS -- IP 8000 Series terminal can adjust LCD brightness for user’s convenience. 6 01-15 07 GROUP QUEUE DISPLAY -- if this is set to ON, system provides station goup Queue information to group member.
PAGE 602
Station Port Attributes (PGM 121-124) A-28 Appendix A: System Programming Tables PGM 123 BTN RANGE DEFAULT ICM ANSWER MODE -- selects Handsfree, Privacy or Tone ring ICM Signaling mode. 5 1: Handsfree Tone 2: Tone 3: Privacy DATA SECURITY -- disables override and camp-on tones to the station to avoid occurring error when sending data. 6 0: Off 1: On Off PROGRESS INDICATOR -- if this value is set to ON, Progress Indicator Information is included to Setup message (Origin is non-ISDN).
PAGE 603
Station Port Attributes (PGM 121-124) A-29 Appendix A: System Programming Tables Release 1.0 PGM 124 BTN RANGE HOOK FLASH WHEN TRANSFER -- Determine the operation when user press hook-flash button while transferring call. 0. Cancel transfer : drop current call and recover previous call 1. Broker : hold current call and recover previous held call 2. Conference: establish 3-way conference call. 3.
PAGE 604
Station Flexible Button Assignment (PGM 126) A-30 Appendix A: System Programming Tables Station Flexible Button Assignment (PGM 126) Flex buttons for each Digital Phone and DSS Console can be assigned a function (Type) and an associated Value. For assignments to a DSS Console, enter the DSS console station number and enter the desired button number. For Serial DSS, the button numbers are decided by the order of Serial DSS.
PAGE 605
Station Flexible Button Assignment (PGM 126) A-31 Appendix A: System Programming Tables For Station Number (DN) Button: Using dial pad, enter the Station number you want to assign. Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entries. If the same station number already exists on another flex button, an error tone is heard. For Dialed Number Button: Using dial pad, enter desired number you want to assign. Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entered.
PAGE 606
Station Number Information (PGM 130) A-32 Appendix A: System Programming Tables Station Number Information (PGM 130) In accordance with the station number’s physical characteristics, the station number is divided into My-DN and Sub-DN. • My-DN is only a role of SADN (Single-Assign Directory Number) and only one My-DN is assigned to a physical terminal. In MBX IP system, the scope of station number used for My-DN is predefined – station bin index from 1 to 324 for MBX IP-300, from 1 to 108 for MBX IP-100.
PAGE 607
Station Number Attributes - PGM 131-135 A-33 Appendix A: System Programming Tables Station Number Attributes - PGM 131-135 Station Number Attributes define features and functions available to the station number. Generally, the entry will turn the feature ON (enable) or OFF (disable). Refer to the following tables for a description of the features and the input required. 1.
PAGE 608
Station Number Attributes - PGM 131-135 A-34 Appendix A: System Programming Tables PGM 131 BTN RANGE DEFAULT HOTDESK AGENT NUMBER -- sets wake-up time. 8 0: Off 1: On Off TIME TABLE INDEX -- enables daily repeating alarm. 9 1-9 None none Station Number Attributes II (PGM 132) PGM 132 BTN FORCED HANDSFREE ACCESS -- when placing an intercom call, a user can change the ICM signaling mode, Tone Ring to Hands free answer mode or Hands free answer to Tone Ring mode.
PAGE 609
Station Number Attributes - PGM 131-135 A-35 Appendix A: System Programming Tables Station Number Attributes III (PGM 133) PGM 133 Release 1.0 BTN RANGE DEFAULT CO QUEUE ACCESS -- enable CO Queuing. 1 0: Disable 1: Enable Enable CONFERENCE ACCESS -- enable Conference call. 2 0: Disable 1: Enable Enable WAKE UP ACCESS -- enable Wake-up Alarm feature. 3 0: Disable 1: Enable Enable STN CALL BACK ACCESS -- enable call back feature when a called station is busy.
PAGE 610
Station Number Attributes - PGM 131-135 A-36 Appendix A: System Programming Tables Station Number Attributes IV (PGM 134) PGM 134 BTN RANGE SPEED ACCESS -- gives station speed dial bins access authority. 1 0:Disable 1:Enable Enable PAGE ACCESS -- permits station to make page. 2 0:Disable 1:Enable Enable MEET ME ACCESS -- enables ‘meet me’ feature when there is a page. 3 0:Disable 1:Enable Enable CALL DURATION RESTRICT -- restricts CO Call Duration to station.
PAGE 611
Station Number Attributes - PGM 131-135 A-37 Appendix A: System Programming Tables Station CLI Attributes (PGM 135) Release 1.0 PGM 135 BTN RANGE CLIP DISPLAY -- Calling Line Identification Presentation (CLIP), an ISDN service, sends the number of the calling party to the system in the call SETUP message. If enabled, the number will be shown in the Digital phone LCD.
PAGE 612
Station Number Attributes - PGM 131-135 A-38 Appendix A: System Programming Tables PGM 135 BTN MOBILE EXTENSION CLI -- When mobile extension makes a call, CLI is determined by this option. (0:Caller No, 1:Mobile Station No, 2:Caller No + Mobile Staton No). 9 Caller No 0:Caller No 1:Mobile Sta No 2:Caller + Mobile Sta LONG CLI 1 -- If CLI type of outgoing CO line is set to 1, Long CLI 1 is sent. 10 24 digits - LONG CLI 2 -- If CLI type of outgoing CO line is set to 2, Long CLI 2 is sent.
PAGE 613
Station Class of Service (PGM 137) A-39 Appendix A: System Programming Tables Station Class of Service (PGM 137) All stations are assigned a Class-of-Service (COS), which determines the ability of the user to dial certain types of calls. Separate COS assignments are made for Day, Night and Timed Mode system operation. Maximum level of COS privileges is 16 (0-15). These privileges are represented in Toll Exception Table (PGM CODE 250).
PAGE 614
Station Auto Attributes (PGM 138) A-40 Appendix A: System Programming Tables Station Auto Attributes (PGM 138) When a station goes to an off-hook condition (lifts handset or presses [SPEAKER] button), the system normally provides an intercom dial tone. In place of the dial tone, the station can be programmed to dial the preprogrammed (max 16) digits. This programmed digit id called Auto-Dial-Digit.
PAGE 615
Station Preset Call Forward (PGM 142) A-41 Appendix A: System Programming Tables Station Preset Call Forward (PGM 142) This assignment allows an external or internal call to initially ring at a station and forward to a pre-determined destination. Preset Call Forward can be assigned separately for Internal Unconditional, Internal Busy, Internal No Answer, External Unconditional, External Busy, External No Answer preset forwarding to any Station, Hunt group or External Telephone No. 1.
PAGE 616
Station Call Forward (PGM 143) A-42 Appendix A: System Programming Tables Station Call Forward (PGM 143) 1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 143. 2. Use the dial pad to enter a station range (Ex. 100-110). For a single station, enter the same number twice. 3. Press desired Flex button number (1-4), Flex 1: Forward Type Flex 2: Forward Number Flex 3: Forward Apply Time Flex 4: Call Forward No Answer Timer Flex 5: Forward Display 4.
PAGE 617
Station VMIB Attribute (PGM 145) A-43 Appendix A: System Programming Tables Station VMIB Attribute (PGM 145) The following features are designed to assist Station interaction with the VMIB. 1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 145. 2. Use the dial pad to enter a station range (Ex. 100-110). For a single station, enter the same number twice. 3. Press the desired Flex button; refer to the following Table. 4. Use the dial pad to enter desired data for the attribute setting, refer to Table. 5.
PAGE 618
Station Mobile Phone Attribute (PGM 146) A-44 Appendix A: System Programming Tables Station Mobile Phone Attribute (PGM 146) A mobile phone can be used in conjunction with a Digital Phone. The Mobile phone can access system resources available to the user's wired phone and will receive incoming calls. The user may be allowed to enable up to 2 Mobile extensions. Mobile phones are registered to a station using mobile phone number and mobile phone's CLI. 1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 146. 2.
PAGE 619
CO/IP Group Access (PGM 150) A-45 Appendix A: System Programming Tables PGM 146 BTN RANGE DEFAULT MOBILE SERVICE CLI 4 -- CLI 4for Mobile Service. 11 Max 24 digits - MOBILE SERVICE CLI 5 -- CLI 5for Mobile Service. 12 Max 24 digits - CO/IP Group Access (PGM 150) Stations can be allowed or denied access to CO Lines and IP Channels by group, refer to CO Line Attributes, PGM CODE 160, button 2/3. As a default, all stations are allowed access to CO/IP group 1. 1.
PAGE 620
Command Group Access (PGM 152) A-46 Appendix A: System Programming Tables Command Group Access (PGM 152) Each Digital Phone can be enabled for Command Group access. If enabled, a station can make a command conference call. 1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 152. 2. Use the dial pad to enter a station range (Ex. 100-110). For a single station, enter the same number twice. 3. The first 10 Flex button LEDs indicate assigned command call group.
PAGE 621
CO Attribute I, II, III - PGM 160-162 A-47 Appendix A: System Programming Tables CO Attributes I (PGM 160) PGM 160 Release 1.0 BTN RANGE DEFAULT CO TYPE -- Displays physical line type of selected CO line. 1 Display Only - SVC TYPE -- Set CO line type as DID or Normal. 2 0: Normal 1: DID Normal OUTGOING GRP NO -- Set CO Group Number to apply to outgoing calls. 3 01-72, none (MBX IP-300) 01-24, none (MBX IP-100) 01 INCOMING GRP NO -- Set CO Group Number to apply to incoming calls.
PAGE 622
CO Attribute I, II, III - PGM 160-162 A-48 Appendix A: System Programming Tables PGM 160 BTN RANGE DEFAULT CHARGE MODE -- If 'FREE', the external call though CO line is not printed/saved to SMDR even though SMDR is enabled. If 'REPORT', the external call though CO, line is included to SMDR according to the SMDR Attributes. 11 0: Free 1: Report Report METERING TYPE -- According to PSTN service type, metering type can be selected among 00-12 to manage call charge.
PAGE 623
CO Attribute I, II, III - PGM 160-162 A-49 Appendix A: System Programming Tables PGM 161 BTN RANGE DEFAULT LINE LENGTH -- LCO line length. 6 0: 0km 1: 3km 2: 5km 3: 7km 0km ZONE NO -- Zone number of CO lines. 7 1-9 1 PROMPT LANGUAGE -- VMIB Prompt Index. 8 1-3 1 GAIN TABLE IDX -- Determines Gain Table for CO line. 9 1-3 1 CO Attributes III (PGM 162) Release 1.0 PGM 162 BTN RANGE CO ACCESS MODE -- CO lines can be set to blocked, or CO line or Dedicated line.
PAGE 624
CO CID Attributes (PGM 163) A-50 Appendix A: System Programming Tables CO CID Attributes (PGM 163) CID Attributes are assigned for Analog CO Line CID services. 1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 163. 2. Use the dial pad to enter a CO line range. For a single CO Line, enter the same number twice. For MBX IP-100, acceptable range is 01-80, for MBX IP-300, the acceptable range is 001-240 3. Press the desired Flex button; refer to Following Table 4. Use the dial pad to enter desired data for the Attribute. 5.
PAGE 625
CO Incoming Attribute I, II - PGM 165-166 A-51 Appendix A: System Programming Tables CO Incoming Attribute I, II - PGM 165-166 CO Incoming Attributes define various characteristics of the CO lines under the control of the system when there is an incoming CO call. 1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 166. 2. Use the dial pad to enter a CO Line range. For a single CO Line, enter the same number twice (01-80 for MBX IP-100, 001-240 for MBX IP-300). 3. Press Flex button to access desired menu.
PAGE 626
CO Incoming Attribute I, II - PGM 165-166 A-52 Appendix A: System Programming Tables PGM 165 BTN RANGE DEFAULT ICLID SERVICE -- if this feature is set to ON, incoming call is routed according to ICLID Table(PGM 262) 7 0: Off 1: On Off OWN CODE TO TRANSIT CLI -- if this feature is set to ON, original caller's CLI is sent when there is transit call. 8 0: Off 1: On Off OWN CODE -- Own Code.
PAGE 627
CO Incoming Attribute I, II - PGM 165-166 A-53 Appendix A: System Programming Tables PGM 166 Release 1.0 BTN RANGE DEFAULT CPT DETECT -- If this feature is set to ON, Call processing tone is detected to disconnect LCO line. 5 0: Off 1: On On ANSWER WAITING CALL -- If this feature is set to ON, system sends answer when call is waited. 6 0: Off 1: On Off UNIVERSAL ANSWER -- If this feature is set to ON, any station to answer a call on the CO Line by dialing the Universal Answer feature code.
PAGE 628
CO Ring Assignment (PGM 167) A-54 Appendix A: System Programming Tables CO Ring Assignment (PGM 167) Each CO line is assigned to stations or a feature code for an incoming call (Ring). Separate ring assignments are made for Day, Night, and Timed Ring modes. The Ring signal can be set for immediate or delayed ringing allowing other stations to be assigned ringing and answered prior to a delayed station. If 'DISA Tone Service' feature code is assigned, DISA service is activated at the CO line. 1.
PAGE 629
Incoming CO Normal/DISA Attributes (PGM 168) A-55 Appendix A: System Programming Tables Incoming CO Normal/DISA Attributes (PGM 168) If the CO line is set to Normal type, it can have normal CO Attributes including DISA service option. 1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 168. 2. Use the dial pad to enter a CO line range. For a single CO Line, enter the same number twice. For MBX IP-100, acceptable range is 01-80, for MBX IP-300, the acceptable range is 001-240 3.
PAGE 630
CO Outgoing Attributes I (PGM 170) A-56 Appendix A: System Programming Tables PGM 169 BTN RANGE DEFAULT Incoming CO Alternataive DAY -- 1 Disconnect 1 sec NIGHT -- 2 TIMED -- 3 F1: Busy F2: No Answer F3: Invalid F4: Transfer No Answer F5: Recall No Answer F6: DND F7: Out Of Service F8: Error 1: Disconnect 2: Attendant 3: CO Ring 4: Alt Ring Table 5: Tone 6: Pilot HuntGroup Disconnect 1 sec Disconnect 1 sec CO Outgoing Attributes I (PGM 170) CO Outgoing Attributes define various characteristic
PAGE 631
CO Outgoing Attributes I (PGM 170) A-57 Appendix A: System Programming Tables PGM 170 Release 1.0 BTN RANGE DEFAULT SCREEN INDICATOR -- Determines if screen indicator is used in ISDN message. 1 0: Off (user-provided, not screened) 1: On (user-provided, verified and passed) Off SENDING CALLER NO -- Sending Caller number message of ISDN.
PAGE 632
CO Outgoing Attributes I (PGM 170) A-58 Appendix A: System Programming Tables PGM 170 BTN MAKE TRANSIT CLI -- When no CLI is sent with a transit call, system will initiate a CLI to CO direct transit call. 9 0: Off 1: On Off OWN CODE TO TRANSIT CLI -- If this feature is set to ON and same feature of incoming CO attribute is also set to ON, then Own code of outgoing CO line is inserted to the CLI of transit CO call.
PAGE 633
CO Outgoing Attributes II (PGM 171) A-59 Appendix A: System Programming Tables CO Outgoing Attributes II (PGM 171) Release 1.0 PGM 171 BTN RANGE CPT DETECT -- If this feature is set to ON, CPT(Call Processing Tone) is detected and the line can be dropped. 1 0: Off 1: On On UNSUP CONF EXTEND -- If this feature is set to ON, Unsupervised Conf Timer can be extended by dialing feature code after warning tone is heard.
PAGE 634
CO Outgoing Alternate Destination (PGM 173) A-60 Appendix A: System Programming Tables CO Outgoing Alternate Destination (PGM 173) Calls can be routed to an alternate destination that can be separately defined for Day/ Night/ Timed mode according to several conditions. 1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 173. 2. Use the dial pad to enter a CO line range. For a single CO Line, enter the same number twice. For MBX IP-100, acceptable ra.nge is 01-80, for MBX IP-300, the acceptable range is 001-240 3.
PAGE 635
CO Outgoing Inter-Digit Timer (PGM 174) A-61 Appendix A: System Programming Tables CO Outgoing Inter-Digit Timer (PGM 174) When making an outgoing LCO call, the time limit to enter digits can be adjusted. After timeout, the voice path is automatically connected. This timer does not apply to digital CO lines. 1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 174. 2. Use the dial pad to enter a CO line range. For a single CO Line, enter the same number twice.
PAGE 636
CO DTMF Sending Delay Timer (PGM 175) A-62 Appendix A: System Programming Tables CO DTMF Sending Delay Timer (PGM 175) When making outgoing CO calls, the time interval to send DTMF tones of each digit can be adjusted. This feature is useful for the Speed Dial or Redial feature. 1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 175. 2. Use the dial pad to enter a CO line range. For a single CO Line, enter the same number twice. For MBX IP-100, acceptable range is 01-80, for MBX IP-300, the acceptable range is 001-240. 3.
PAGE 637
CO COS Assignment (PGM 177) A-63 Appendix A: System Programming Tables CO COS Assignment (PGM 177) Every CO line has its own COS and the toll of assigned COS is applied to the CO call (refer to Toll Table, PGM 250). 1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 177 2. Use the dial pad to enter a CO line range. For a single CO Line, enter the same number twice. For MBX IP-100, acceptable range is 01-80, for MBX IP-300, the acceptable range is 001-240 3.
PAGE 638
CO Group Access Code Attribute (PGM 180) A-64 Appendix A: System Programming Tables PGM 179 BTN RANGE OUTGOING CALL TRANSFER RELEASE TYPE -- if outgoing CO call can be transferred to other CO call, release type can be set. If set to None, it is not disconnected.
PAGE 639
CO Group Access Code Attribute (PGM 180) A-65 Appendix A: System Programming Tables Release 1.0 PGM 180 BTN RANGE DEFAULT ACCESS CODE NAME -- When a CO Grp Access code is dialed or Flex Button is pressed; name is displayed on the station's LCD. 1 Max 16 chars - CO LINE CHOICE -- Decide to select to CO line priority to seize. NOTE: When Outgoing Group Number is not assigned, this option is not applied.
PAGE 640
Alternate Ring Assignment (PGM 181) A-66 Appendix A: System Programming Tables Alternate Ring Assignment (PGM 181) The Supplementary Ring Assignment Table, is used for programming alternate ring destinations which can be stations or any feature code (stations do not have a delay value). 1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 181. 2. Enter Table index. 3. Press the desired Flex button; refer to Following Table 4. Use the dial pad to enter desired data for the Attribute. 5.
PAGE 641
Station Group (PGM 200) A-67 Appendix A: System Programming Tables Station Group (PGM 200) Stations can be grouped so that incoming calls will search (hunt) for an idle station in the group. The system allows assignment of three hunt processes, Terminal, Circular, Ring, Longest Idle and VM. Station Group Capacities: ITEM MBX IP 100 MBX IP 300 Number of Groups 20 50 Members in a Group 50 50 Certain types of groups can incorporate announcements, which are given to the calling party.
PAGE 642
Station Group Greeting/Queuing Attributes (PGM 201) A-68 Appendix A: System Programming Tables PGM 200 BTN RANGE DEFAULT TENANT NO -- this entry assigns a tenant of a station group. 3 1-9 (MBX IP-300) 1-5 (MBX IP-100) 1 TIME TABLE IDX -- Time Table index, 4 1-9 1 PICKUP OPTION -- stations can pickup group calls ringing at other stations in the group. 5 0: Disable 1: All Call 2: Intercom 3: External Disable MEMBER ASSIGN -- this entry assigns stations as members of a station group.
PAGE 643
Station Group Greeting/Queuing Attributes (PGM 201) A-69 Appendix A: System Programming Tables PGM 201 BTN RANGE DEFAULT GREETING TONE NO -- This entry defines greeting tone number in case greeting type is normal. 3 01-19 Not Assigned GREETING PRT/ANNC -- This entry defines greeting prompt / annc. Number in case greeting type is PROMPT/ANNC. 4 001-255 Not Assigned GREETING REPEAT NO -- This entry defines greeting repeat number.
PAGE 644
Station Group Greeting/Queuing Attributes (PGM 201) A-70 Appendix A: System Programming Tables PGM 201 BTN RANGE SECOND Q. TYPE -- This entry defines the type of second queuing tone. 15 1. Normal 2. Prompt 3. Annc 4. INT MOH 5. EXT MOH 6: VMIB MOH1 7: VMIB MOH2 8: VMIB MOH3 9: VMIB MOH4 10:SLT MOH1 11:SLT MOH2 12:SLT MOH3 13:SLT MOH4 14:SLT MOH5 4 SECOND Q. TIMER -- This entry defines the timer for forward destination.
PAGE 645
Station Group Attributes (PGM 202) A-71 Appendix A: System Programming Tables Station Group Attributes (PGM 202) Each type of group has available attributes relating to announcements, timers, forward, etc. The fpllowing table provides descriptions for the attributes and the data entries required. 1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 202. 2. Use the dial pad to enter the desired Station Group number (620-639 for the MBX IP 100 and 620-669 for MBX IP 300). 3.
PAGE 646
Voice Mail Group Attributes (PGM 203) A-72 Appendix A: System Programming Tables PGM 202 BTN RANGE DEFAULT RING NO ANS TMR -- This entry defines ring no answer timer. If this timer is expired, a call is routed to the forward destination according to forward type. 8 0-180 0 PROVIDE ANNC.
PAGE 647
Pick Up Group (PGM 204) A-73 Appendix A: System Programming Tables Pick Up Group (PGM 204) Members are assigned to Station Pick-Up Groups (refer to programming table below for a description of the functions and data entries required). Station Pick-up Group Capacities ITEM MBX IP 100 MBX IP 300 Number of Groups 50 100 Members in a Group 50 50 1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 204. 2. Use the dial pad to enter the desired Pickup Group (01-50 for the MBX IP 100 and 001-100 for the MBX IP 300).
PAGE 648
Command Call Group (PGM 206) A-74 Appendix A: System Programming Tables 1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 205. 2. Use the dial pad to enter the desired Page Group (01-15 for the MBX IP 100 and 01-30 for the MBX IP 300). The system will display the member of Page group. NOTE: For group members, enter a station or station range. For an individual station press the desired Flex button for the position of the station in the group and dial the station number.
PAGE 649
PTT Group (PGM 208) A-75 Appendix A: System Programming Tables PGM 206 BTN RANGE DEFAULT ON HOOK SERVICE -- on hoDetermines the On Hook Service; if On Hook Allow is set, the system allows ON HOOK service. When Recall is selected, system will RECALL when user Station is on-hook. 1 0: On Hook Allow 1: Recall On Hook Allow ONE WAY BUSY -- Determines the handling of One Way Busy calls.
PAGE 650
Interphone Group (PGM 209) A-76 Appendix A: System Programming Tables Interphone Group (PGM 209) To call the stations using only one or two digits, some stations can be gathered to the same 'Interphone Group' (refer to PGM 209 for a description of the functions and data entries required). Interphone Group Capacities ITEM MBX IP 100 MBX IP 300 Number of Groups 10 10 Members in a Group 10 10 1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 209. 2. Use the dial pad to enter the desired Interphone Group.
PAGE 651
Pilot Hunt Group Forward Attribute (PGM 211) A-77 Appendix A: System Programming Tables NOTE: For group members, enter a station or station range. For an individual station press the desired Flex button for the position of the station in the group and dial the station number. For a range, enter the first and last station number in the range 3. Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entry. PGM 210 BTN RANGE DEFAULT CONDITION -- Determines call coverage condition for Pilot Hunt group.
PAGE 652
ACD Group (PGM 212) A-78 Appendix A: System Programming Tables PGM 211 BTN RANGE DEFAULT NIGHT FORWARD TYPE -- determines the Night time seting for Call Forward type. 3 Not Used 0: Not Used 1: Uncond 2: Busy 3: No Ans 4: Busy/ No Ans NIGHT FORWARD DESTINATION -- determines the Night time seting for Forward destination. 4 Max. 8 digits TIMED FORWARD TYPE -- determines the Timed seting for Forward type.
PAGE 653
ACD Group (PGM 212) A-79 Appendix A: System Programming Tables 1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 212. 2. Use the dial pad to enter the desired ACD Group number (600-619 for the MBX IP 100 and MBX IP 300). 3. Press the Flex button for the desired setting; refer to the following table 4. Use the dial pad to enter the desired ACD Group data. Note for group members, enter a station or station range.
PAGE 654
ACD Group Attribute I (PGM 213) A-80 Appendix A: System Programming Tables ACD Group Attribute I (PGM 213) Stations can be grouped so that incoming calls or internal calls will search (ACD) for an idle station in the group. ACD (Auto Call Distribution) service is to distribute ACD call efficiently to agent. Each agent can set own specific state and make ready for gat the ACD call. Also supervisor can make ACD group state 1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 213. 2.
PAGE 655
ACD Group Attribute I (PGM 213) A-81 Appendix A: System Programming Tables Release 1.0 PGM 213 BTN RANGE QUEUING ANNC STEP -- This entry defines queuing announcement play service step. One ACD Group can have max 5 announcements for queuing ACD Call. 10 1-5 1 REPEAT COUNT -- This entry defines total queuing announcement repeat service count. If this entry is defines as One or More Times service, Queuing Announcement will be played from 1st to defined Step.
PAGE 656
ACD Group Attribute II (PGM 214) A-82 Appendix A: System Programming Tables ACD Group Attribute II (PGM 214) PGM 214 BTN SUPERVISOR PSWD CHECK -- This entry defines check the supervisor password when supervisor change group status. 1 0:Off 1:On 0:Off AGENT-AGENT CALL -- This entry defines agent to agent call restriction. 2 0:Allow 1:Direct call 2:Forward call 0:Allow WORK MODE TIMER -- This entry defines wrap up timer of Agent Work State.
PAGE 657
ACD Group Attribute II (PGM 214) A-83 Appendix A: System Programming Tables Release 1.0 PGM 214 BTN RANGE DEFAULT LOGIN AGENT STATE -- This entry defines usage of default Agent State option when agent log-in. 9 0:Ready state 1:DND state 2:Work state 0:Ready state LOGIN AUTO ANSWER -- This entry defines usage of Agent Auto Answer option when agent log-in. 10 0:Off 1:On 0:Off LOGIN AUTO WORK -- This entry defines usage of Agent Auto Work option when agent log-in.
PAGE 658
ACD Group Announcement (PGM 215) A-84 Appendix A: System Programming Tables ACD Group Announcement (PGM 215) The system provides 9 types of tone. Each tone may be assigned to normal tone, VMIB prompt/Announcement or internal/external music. 1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 215. 2. Enter announcement table using dial pad 3. To program tone, dial tone index (1 - 9). Please refer to the Announcement INDEX Table of Web-Admin PGM 215 for Announcement index 4. Press the Flex button.
PAGE 659
SYSTEM DATA - PGM 220-242 A-85 Appendix A: System Programming Tables PGM 215 BTN RANGE DEFAULT PROMPT ANNC INTVL -- The VMIB Prompt or Announcement Repeat interval when VMIB Prompt or announcement. Repeat is assigned. 6 0-100 0 CCR USE -- This option is defined during announcement will be played, usage of CCR feature.
PAGE 660
System Timers II (PGM 221) A-86 Appendix A: System Programming Tables PGM 220 BTN RANGE DEFAULT PAUSE TMR -- A Timed pause of this duration is used in Speed Dial and during other automatically dialed digits sent to the PSTN. 5 1-9 secs 3 VM PAUSE TMR -- When the system sends a "Pause" to Voice Mail using In-band signals, the Pause interval is defined by this timer. 6 1-9 secs 3 VMIB-MSG MIN TMR -- This timer sets the minimum duration allowed for a voice mail message in the system's VMIB.
PAGE 661
System Timers II (PGM 222) A-87 Appendix A: System Programming Tables PGM 221 BTN RANGE DEFAULT LCO RING OFF TMR -- sets the maximum 'OFF' duration of the incoming ring cycle to determine when a call has been abandoned. 5 010-150 (100 msec) 060 LCO RLS GUARD TMR -- when an analog CO Line is returned to idle, the system will deny access for this time to assure the PSTN returns the CO circuitry to idle. 6 00-60 (minutes) 010 System Timers II (PGM 222) Release 1.
PAGE 662
System Attributes (PGM 223) A-88 Appendix A: System Programming Tables System Attributes (PGM 223) System Attributes programs define settings that affect System-wide features and functions. Generally, these entries will turn the feature ON (enable) or OFF (disable). Refer to the following table for a description of the Attributes and the data entries required. 1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 223 for System Attributes I 2. Press the Flex button for the desired Attribute, refer to the following Table. 3.
PAGE 663
System Password (PGM 226) A-89 Appendix A: System Programming Tables PGM 223 BTN RANGE DEFAULT MODEM ASC CO LINE -- Modem Associate CO Line. 13 001-240 000 IP PHONE REG BY STA NUM -- Enables IP phone registration by station number. 14 0: Off 1: On 0: Off System Password (PGM 226) Access to the system database and maintenance functions can be protected by passwords up to twelve (12) digits. Three passwords can be defined: User, Admin., and Maintenance.
PAGE 664
Alarm Attributes (PGM 227) A-90 Appendix A: System Programming Tables Alarm Attributes (PGM 227) The System can monitor an external contact, most often employed as an Alarm indicator or Doorbell. The Alarm attributes define the operation of the external contact. An Alarm Signal sent to assigned stations can be repeating or a single burst, the former is often desired.
PAGE 665
Music Sources (PGM 229) A-91 Appendix A: System Programming Tables Music Sources (PGM 229) Music inputs are provided for use as the Background Music and/or Music-On-Hold source inputs. MBX IP MPB provide for one (1) music input. In addition, a VMIB announcement may be recorded and played as MOH. In addition, SLT port on SLIB is used as MOH. 1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 229. 2. Select the desired Flex button, refer to the following Table. 3. Use the dial pad to select the desired Music Source. 4.
PAGE 666
RS-232 Port Settings (PGM 230) A-92 Appendix A: System Programming Tables PGM 229 BTN RANGE VMIB MOH -- assigns the VMIB Prompt index of VMIB Slot YY for VMIB MOH X. 3-6 for MPB300 (3-5 for MPB100) SLT MOH -- assigns the SLT ports for SLT MOH. 7-11 for MPB300 (6-10 for MPB100) DEFAULT 01-70 - RS-232 Port Settings (PGM 230) The system has one RS 232 serial port located on the MPB.
PAGE 667
Serial Port Function Selections (PGM 231) A-93 Appendix A: System Programming Tables Serial Port Function Selections (PGM 231) The System has one RS 232 serial port located on the MPB. Also, the System can employ IP over 5 TCP channels for the output of various system information. Each output function is assigned a Serial port or TCP channel that is used to output the information. In addition, a TCP port must be assigned when a function is defined to use a TCP channel.
PAGE 668
SMDR Attributes (PGM 232) A-94 Appendix A: System Programming Tables SMDR Attributes (PGM 232) Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) is an ASCII output of details on both incoming and outgoing calls. Various SMDR attributes can be assigned including: output records for all calls or Long Distance (LD) only, call cost per pulse when using call metering, etc. (refer to Table for a description of each Attribute, LCD displays and the data entries required). 1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 232. 2.
PAGE 669
SMDR Attributes (PGM 232) A-95 Appendix A: System Programming Tables Release 1.0 PGM 232 BTN RANGE RECORD TYPE -- If set to on, LD calls are identified by the LONG DIST CALL DGT Counter; the system can record all outgoing calls or only long distance calls. 6 0:All Call 1:LD 0:All Call LONG DIST CALL DGT CNT -- Dialed numbers, which exceed the assigned LD Digit count, are considered long distance calls for SMDR.
PAGE 670
SMDR Attributes (PGM 232) A-96 Appendix A: System Programming Tables PGM 232 BTN TRANSFER CHARGE -1. NORMAL CHARGING: When Attendant make outgoing call and transfer this call to another station, the transferred will follow the Transfer Charge Mode. 2. ATD CHARGING: When Attendant makes outgoing call and transfers this call to another station, the call is charged to the Attendant. 3.
PAGE 671
System Date, Time (PGM 233) A-97 Appendix A: System Programming Tables PGM 232 BTN - SMDR MAIL AUTO SEND MODE -- If the SMDR buffer is full, the system can automatically send a notification by e-mail. Web Only - SMDR MAIL AUTO DELETE MODE -- Deletes SMDR records after sending e-mail. RANGE DEFAULT 0:Off 1:On 1:On 0:Off 1:On 1:On System Date, Time (PGM 233) The system Date, Time is established by this entry.
PAGE 672
Button LED Flash Rate (PGM 234) A-98 Appendix A: System Programming Tables Button LED Flash Rate (PGM 234) The LED Color and Flash Rate for various functions and states can be assigned to any one of 15 System signals. The various functions and states are shown in the Tables (refer to [COLOR] and [FLASH RATE] Tables). 1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 234. 2. Enter the Function range to change the LED Color or Flash rate (refer to Tables). 3. Press the Flex button 1 and dial (1-3) for LED color OR 4.
PAGE 673
Button LED Flash Rate (PGM 234) A-99 Appendix A: System Programming Tables PGM 234 Release 1.0 BTN RANGE DEFAULT [HOLD] button LED status while Paging. 13 Color 1-3 Flash: 60 IPM Flashing Rate 00-14 Color: RED [HOLD] button LED status when in Voice-over mode. 14 Flash: 60 IPM Color: AMBER [HOLD] Reserved. 15 Flash: 60IPM Color: AMBER [RING] LED status when receiving an intercom call. 16 Flash: 60 IPM Color: RED [RING] LED status when receiving an incoming CO call.
PAGE 674
Button LED Flash Rate (PGM 234) A-100 Appendix A: System Programming Tables PGM 234 BTN RANGE DEFAULT [DSS] button LED status when receiving an intercom call. 30 Color 1-3 Flash: 60 IPM Flashing Rate 00-14 Color: RED [DSS] button LED status in conversation. 31 Flash: Steady Color: RED [DSS] button LED status in DND. 32 Flash: Off Color: RED [DSS] button LED status when call forward is set. 33 Flash: Off Color: RED [DSS] button LED status when handset is lifted.
PAGE 675
Button LED Flash Rate (PGM 234) A-101 Appendix A: System Programming Tables Color Table COLOR DESCRIPTION 1 RED 2 GREEN 3 AMBER Flash Rate Table Release 1.
PAGE 676
ISDN PPP Web Admin Attributes (PGM 235) A-102 Appendix A: System Programming Tables ISDN PPP Web Admin Attributes (PGM 235) In addition to remote access via an IP network connection, the system database may be accessed remotely via an ISDN connection. Placing a call over an ISDN Line to the designated PPP Station will provide a connection to the system database. The system will request a user ID and password, which must match one of the User Ids and passwords assigned.
PAGE 677
One Digit Service Attributes (PGM 237) A-103 Appendix A: System Programming Tables PGM 236 BTN RANGE DEFAULT FLASH DIGIT -- The flash digit from mobile extension. 1 Max 2 digits * INPUT TIMER -- The inter-digit timer of the mobile flash digit (2 sec). 1 01-20 (seconds) 05 One Digit Service Attributes (PGM 237) When performing a call transfer from a mobile extension, the flash digit and input timer can be assigned. 1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 237. 2.
PAGE 678
Dummy Dial Tone Digit (PGM 240) A-104 Appendix A: System Programming Tables Dummy Dial Tone Digit (PGM 240) When digit conversion is programmed, the CO line is seized after digit conversion is completed. When programmed, in the event a user cannot obtain the CO dial tone from PX, a dummy dial tone can be provided. 1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 240. 2. Dial bin no. 3. Used the dial pad to enter desired data. 4.
PAGE 679
Executive-Executive Access (PGM 242) A-105 Appendix A: System Programming Tables PGM 241 BTN RANGE DEFAULT ICM CALL TO EXEC -- Determines call forwarding when Executive/Secretary is in use. SECRETARY: all internal calls to the Exec. Station (except for calls from executives having executive access privilege) are routed to the Secretary station regardless of the Executive station status. SEC IF EXEC IN DND: internal calls are routed to secretary when executive is in 'DND'.
PAGE 680
TABLES DATA - PGM 250-269 A-106 Appendix A: System Programming Tables 4. Press the desired Flex button to toggle access. - LED ON: access allowed, LED OFF: access not allowed. 5. Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entry TABLES DATA - PGM 250-269 Toll Tables (PGM 250) Based on Table entries, Stations or DISA users are allowed or denied dialing specified numbers.
PAGE 681
Digit Conversion Tables (PGM 251) A-107 Appendix A: System Programming Tables PGM 250 BTN RANGE DEFAULT ALLOW TABLE -- allow digits. 1 Max 16 digits - DENY TABLE -- deny digits. 2 Max 16 digits - TENANT -- Tenant groups to apply the table entry. 3 1-9 (MBX IP 300) 1-5 (MBX IP 100) - Digit Conversion Tables (PGM 251) The Digit Conversion Table index is assigned to the Station and CO line.
PAGE 682
Digit Conversion Tables (PGM 251) A-108 Appendix A: System Programming Tables PGM 251 BTN RANGE DEFAULT UNCOND CHANGED -- The CO Group Access Code and digits to be sent to PX when the dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is 'unconditional'. 3 Max 16 digits - DAY CHANGED -- The CO Group Access Code and digits to be sent to PX in Day when the dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is 'FOLLOW DNT'.
PAGE 683
Digit Conversion Options (PGM 252) A-109 Appendix A: System Programming Tables PGM 251 BTN RANGE DEFAULT D3/T3 CHANGED -- The CO Group Access Code and digits to be sent to PX in 'Day 3/Time 3' when the dialed digit is pressed if Apply time type is 'FOLLOW LCR'. 15 Max 16 digits - DNT TIME INDEX -- Day/Night/Timed Time Table Index. 16 1-9, none none LCR TIME INDEX -- LCR Time Table Index.
PAGE 684
Time Table Attributes (PGM 253) A-110 Appendix A: System Programming Tables Time Table Attributes (PGM 253) The system can automatically select the Ring and COS Mode based on the system time table. Three Ring and COS modes are supported: Day, Night, and Timed modes. Each Time Table has a ring mode relating to the different ring assignments, COS, and answering method for the system.
PAGE 685
Weekly Time Table (PGM 254) A-111 Appendix A: System Programming Tables Weekly Time Table (PGM 254) The ring mode can be controlled automatically through definitions in the Auto Ring Mode and Weekly Time Table based on the Time Table. The start times for Day, Night and start and end times for timed modes are entered for each day of week. 1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 254. 2. Use the dial pad to enter the desired tenant range 3. Press the Flex 1-7 for the desired day of week (Monday-Sunday). 4.
PAGE 686
LCR Time Table Attributes (PGM 255) A-112 Appendix A: System Programming Tables PGM 254 BTN RANGE DEFAULT Saturday DAY/NIGHT/TIMED ring mode start times and TIMED mode end times. 6 0000-2359 Day: 9:00 Nite: 18:00 TDS: _-_ TDE: _-_ Sunday DAY/NIGHT/TIMED ring mode start times and TIMED mode end times.
PAGE 687
Holiday Time Table (PGM 256) A-113 Appendix A: System Programming Tables Holiday Time Table (PGM 256) Each Time Table has a Holiday Time Table and Ring mode is operated as Night mode when the current date is set as a Holiday time Table election from automatic to manual. 1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 256. 2. Use the dial pad to enter the desired Table index.. 3. Use the dial pad to enter the desired bin. 4. Press the Flex button for the desired setting; refer to the following Table. 5.
PAGE 688
Emergency Code Table Attributes (PGM 258) A-114 Appendix A: System Programming Tables Emergency Code Table Attributes (PGM 258) The Emergency Code Table is used to identify emergency numbers which, when dialed, will override all COS dialing restrictions. An Emergency Code number may be up to fifteen (16) digits iPress the [PGM] button and dial 258. 1. Use the dial pad for the desired Emergency code entry, 01-50. 2.
PAGE 689
Customer Call Routing Table (PGM 260) A-115 Appendix A: System Programming Tables PGM 259 BTN RANGE DEFAULT The VMIB slot & Prompt No. to be used for playing the VMIB Announcement No. 1-4 VMIB Slot (00-18) & Prompt No (01-70) - CCR Index used for playing the VMIB Announcement No. 5 1-100 - Customer Call Routing Table (PGM 260) The system incorporates Integrated Voice Response (IVR) capabilities called Customer Call Routing (CCR).
PAGE 690
CLI Conversion Table (PGM 263) A-116 Appendix A: System Programming Tables 3. Press a Flex button (1-12, 10=0, 11=*, 12=#) to assign a route for the associated CCR dialed digit. 4. Use the dial pad for Destination. 5. Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entered. PGM 262 BTN RANGE DEFAULT ICLID NUMBER -- ICLID used to match the index. 1 24 digits None ICLID NAME -- ICLID name that is sent by the System to the destination for the ICLID routed call.
PAGE 691
CLI Conversion Table (PGM 264) A-117 Appendix A: System Programming Tables CLI Conversion Table (PGM 264) The system provides 19 types of tone ports. Each tone port may be selected as a tone type from the Tone Table (PGM 290). INDEX FREQUENCY CADENCE REPEAT FREQ 1 FREQ 2 Release 1.0 01 425 Hz 0 Hz 300 ms ON / 200 ms OFF 255 (Cont.) 02 620 0 200 ms ON / 200 ms OFF / 200 ms ON / 200 ms OFF 255 (Cont.) 03 1000 1020 500 ms ON / 500 ms OFF 3 04 440 0 1 sec ON / 4 sec OFF 255 (Cont.
PAGE 692
Ring Table (PGM 265) A-118 Appendix A: System Programming Tables Ring Table (PGM 265) Each Ring can have 4 different types among 15 Ring. After 4 different ring index programmed, CO line or Station may select one of 4 types. Release 1.
PAGE 693
Ring Freq/Cadence Table (PGM 266) A-119 Appendix A: System Programming Tables Ring Freq/Cadence Table (PGM 266) INDEX FREQUENCY CADENCE REPEAT FREQ 1 FREQ 2 01 1000 1020 200 ms ON / 200 ms OFF 255 (Cont.) 02 1000 1020 400 ms ON / 2 sec OFF 255 (Cont.) 03 1000 1020 400 ms ON / 600 ms OFF 255 (Cont.) 04 1000 1020 1 sec ON 05 1000 1020 800 ms ON / 2400 ms OFF 255 (Cont.) 06 890 910 800 ms ON / 2400 ms OFF 255 (Cont.) 07 1260 1280 800 ms ON / 2400 ms OFF 255 (Cont.
PAGE 694
Voice Mail Dialing Table (PGM 269) A-120 Appendix A: System Programming Tables PGM 269 BTN RANGE VOICE MAIL 1 -- Put Mail code sent when the voice mail is to receive call to record a message. 1 0: Prefix 1: Suffix Any digits P# VOICE MAIL 2 -- Get Mail code sent when the voice mail is to playback recorded messages. 2 0: Prefix 1: Suffix Any digits P## VOICE MAIL 3 -- Busy Mail code sent when the voice mail is to receive a call while the user is busy.
PAGE 695
TENANTS DATA - PGM 270-290 A-121 Appendix A: System Programming Tables TENANTS DATA - PGM 270-290 Each tenant on the System can have an Attendant Group. An Attendant group can have up to 5 Attendants. Attendant Group - PGM 270-272 Attendant Group (PGM 270) Attendant Stations can be grouped so that calls will search for an idle Attendant in the group. The System allows assignment of the process to be in Circular, Terminal, Ring, Longest Idle modes.
PAGE 696
Attendant Group - PGM 270-272 A-122 Appendix A: System Programming Tables Attendant Group Greeting/Queuing (PGM 271) Each attendant group has available attributes relating to the greeting and queuing announcements, time. The following table provides descriptions for the attributes and the data entries required. 1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 271. 2. Use the dial pad to enter the desired tenant number (1-5 for the MBX IP 100, and 1-9 for MBX IP 300). 3.
PAGE 697
Attendant Group - PGM 270-272 A-123 Appendix A: System Programming Tables PGM 271 Release 1.0 BTN RANGE DEFAULT QUEUING TYPE -- Determines the type of Queuing Tone. 7 1. Normal 2. Prompt 3. Annc 4. INT MOH 5. EXT MOH 6: VMIB MOH1 7: VMIB MOH2 8: VMIB MOH3 9: VMIB MOH4 10:SLT MOH1 11:SLT MOH2 12:SLT MOH3 13:SLT MOH4 14:SLT MOH5 4 QUEUING TIMER -- Determines the Greeting/Queuing Timeout Timer.
PAGE 698
Attendant Group - PGM 270-272 A-124 Appendix A: System Programming Tables PGM 271 BTN RANGE DEFAULT SECOND Q. TYPE -- This entry defines the type of second queuing tone. 14 1: Normal 2: Prompt 3: Annc 4: INT MOH 5: EXT MOH 6: VMIB MOH1 7: VMIB MOH2 8: VMIB MOH3 9: VMIB MOH4 10: SLT MOH1 11: SLT MOH2 12: SLT MOH3 13: SLT MOH4 14: SLT MOH5 4: INT MOH SECOND Q. TIMER -- This entry defines the timer for forward destination.
PAGE 699
Attendant Group - PGM 270-272 A-125 Appendix A: System Programming Tables 4. Use the dial pad to enter the desired attendant group attributes data, refer to the following Table. 5. Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entry. PGM 272 Release 1.0 BTN RANGE DEFAULT CALL IN GREETING -- Determines if call is routed to the Attendant when Greeting Tone is played. 1 0: After Greeting 1: In Greeting 1: In Greeting MAX QUEUE COUNT -- Determines the Queue count.
PAGE 700
Night Attendant Group - PGM 275-277 A-126 Appendix A: System Programming Tables Night Attendant Group - PGM 275-277 Night Attendant Group covers a call while the Attendant station is in an unavailable mode or system goes to night mode. Night Attendant Group Assign (PGM 275) Stations can be grouped as night attendant group so that calls will search for an idle station in the night attendant group. The system allows assignment of processes, Circular, Terminal, Ring, and Longest Idle.
PAGE 701
Night Attendant Group - PGM 275-277 A-127 Appendix A: System Programming Tables Night Attendant Group Greeting/Queuing (PGM 276) Each night attendant group has available attributes relating to the greeting and queuing announcements, time. The table provides descriptions for the attributes and the data entries required. 1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 276. 2. Use the dial pad to enter the desired tenant number (1-5 for the MBX IP 100, and 1-9 for MBX IP 300). 3.
PAGE 702
Night Attendant Group - PGM 275-277 A-128 Appendix A: System Programming Tables PGM 276 BTN RANGE DEFAULT GREETING PROMPT/ANNC -- Determines the Greeting Prompt/ Announce Number when Greeting Type is set to Prompt or Announce. 4 001-255 Not Asg GREETING REPEAT NO -- Determines the number of times the Greeting will repeat. 5 000-100 3 GREETING RPT DELAY -- Determines the length of time the timer will pause before the greeting is repeated.
PAGE 703
Night Attendant Group - PGM 275-277 A-129 Appendix A: System Programming Tables Release 1.0 PGM 276 BTN RANGE SECOND Q. TYPE -- This entry defines the type of second queuing tone. 14 1: Normal 2: Prompt 3: Annc 4: INT MOH 5: EXT MOH 6: VMIB MOH1 7: VMIB MOH2 8: VMIB MOH3 9: VMIB MOH4 10:SLT MOH1 11:SLT MOH2 12:SLT MOH3 13:SLT MOH4 14:SLT MOH5 4: INT MOH SECOND Q. TIMER -- This entry defines the timer for forward destination.
PAGE 704
Night Attendant Group - PGM 275-277 A-130 Appendix A: System Programming Tables Night Attendant Group Attributes (PGM 277) Each Night Attendant group has available attributes relating to Announcements, Timers, Forward, etc. (refer to the table below for descriptions of the attributes and the data entries required). 1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 277. 2. Use the dial pad to enter the desired Tenant number (1-5 for the MBX IP 100, and 1-9 for MBX IP 300). 3.
PAGE 705
Tenant Attributes - PGM 280-281 A-131 Appendix A: System Programming Tables PGM 277 BTN RANGE DEFAULT RING NO ANS TMR -- This entry defines ring no answer timer. If this timer expires, a call is routed to the forward destination according to forward type. 8 0-180 (seconds) 0 PROVIDE ANNC-- This entry defines if system answer the call when a greeting or queuing announcement is provided.
PAGE 706
Tenant Attributes - PGM 280-281 A-132 Appendix A: System Programming Tables Tenant Attributes II (PGM 281) Each tenant has available attributes relating to tenant name, retry count of ACNR, Wake Up, Auth etc. (refer to the table below for a description of the functions and the data entries required). 1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 281. 2. Use the dial pad to enter the desired tenant range (1-5 for the MBX IP 100, and 1-9 for MBX IP 300). 3.
PAGE 707
Tenant Attributes - PGM 280-281 A-133 Appendix A: System Programming Tables Release 1.0 PGM 281 BTN RANGE DIAL DIGIT PROCESS -- This entry defines the dial digit processing method. 0: TYPE 1 (R-C-S) - If user dials digits, digit are process as listed: 1) Apply Toll Restriction to all digits including CO access code.
PAGE 708
Tenant Group Access (PGM 283) A-134 Appendix A: System Programming Tables PGM 281 BTN RANGE DEFAULT BACKLIGHT USAGE -- This entry allows backlight option of IP Phone with ring mode. 7 0: All Off 1: Day On 2: Night On 3: Timed On 4: D/N On 5: D/T On 6: N/T On 7: All On 0.All Off CDR PREFIX UNMATCH -- This entry defines default Call Duration Restriction type when a called party number is not matched with prefix table.
PAGE 709
CO Call Restriction - PGM 284-285 A-135 Appendix A: System Programming Tables Call Duration Restriction I (PGM 284) Each tenant has attributes relating Call Duration Restriction (CDR) according to call types (refer to the following table for a description of the functions, and data entries required). 1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 284. 2. Use the dial pad to enter the desired Tenant range (1-5 for the MBX IP 100, and 1-9 for MBX IP 300). 3.
PAGE 710
CO Call Restriction - PGM 284-285 A-136 Appendix A: System Programming Tables Call Duration Restriction II (PGM 285) Each tenant has available attributes relating to the CDR timer according to call types (refer to the table below for a description of the functions and the data entries required). 1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 285. 2. Use the dial pad to enter the desired Tenant range (1-5 for the MBX IP 100, and 1-9 for MBX IP 300). 3. Press the Flex button for the desired setting (refer to Table). 4.
PAGE 711
Call Prefix Table - PGM 286-288 A-137 Appendix A: System Programming Tables Call Prefix Table - PGM 286-288 The call type for CDR can be applied differently according to the call Prefix Table based on Tenant. Local Call Prefix Table (PGM 286) Each tenant has a Local Call Prefix Table relating to CDR. 1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 286. 2. Use the dial pad to enter the desired Tenant range (1-5 for the MBX IP 100, and 1-9 for MBX IP 300). 3.
PAGE 712
Tenant Tone Table (PGM 290) A-138 Appendix A: System Programming Tables Tenant Tone Table (PGM 290) The system provides 71 tones that can be assigned for use as the normal tone, VMIB prompt/Announcement or internal/external music. 1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 290. 2. Enter tenant range using dial pad. For a single tenant group, just enter the same number twice. 3. To program tone, dial tone index (01 - 73). Refer to the Tone Index Table of Web-Admin (PGM 264). 4. Press the Flex button.
PAGE 713
Tenant Tone Table (PGM 290) A-139 Appendix A: System Programming Tables PGM 290 BTN RANGE DEFAULT PROMPT/ANNC RPT -- The VMIB Prompt or Announcement Repeat number when tone type is VMIB Prompt or announcement. 5 0-100 1 PROMPT/ANNC INTVL -- The VMIB Prompt or Announcement Repeat interval when VMIB Prompt or announcement. Repeat is assigned. 6 0-100 0 Tone Index Table INDEX Release 1.0 TONE NAME DESCRIPTION 1 1st Dial Tone This is provided when station goes off-hook.
PAGE 714
Tenant Tone Table (PGM 290) A-140 Appendix A: System Programming Tables INDEX Release 1.0 TONE NAME DESCRIPTION 13 Internal No-Answer Tone This is provided when the called station does not answer within ‘Normal Call Ring Time’ of Ring Table. 14 External No-Answer Tone This is provided when the called external user does not answer. 15 Internal Vacant Error Tone This is provided when stations calls vacant number.
PAGE 715
Tenant Tone Table (PGM 290) A-141 Appendix A: System Programming Tables Release 1.0 INDEX TONE NAME DESCRIPTION 33 Zone Paging Call Ring Back Tone This is provided when station makes a paging.
PAGE 716
Tenant Tone Table (PGM 290) A-142 Appendix A: System Programming Tables INDEX Release 1.0 TONE NAME DESCRIPTION 51 Camp On Hold Tone (CO) This is provided to the external user when they are camped on. 52 Camp On Hold Tone (Station) This is provided to the station when they are camped on. 53 Call Wait Hold Tone (CO) This is provided to the external user when they are waiting. 54 Call Wait Hold Tone (Station) This is provided to the station when they are waiting.
PAGE 717
BOARD DATA - PGM 300-310 A-143 Appendix A: System Programming Tables INDEX TONE NAME DESCRIPTION 72 Tenant Dial Tone Reserved 73 Two-way Record Warning Tone This is provided to the associate party when station starts call recording BOARD DATA - PGM 300-310 ISDN Board Attribute (PGM 300) PRIB and E1R2 boards have some attributes which can be programmed by the Administrator. 1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 300. 2. Enter ISDN slot number with 2 digits. 3.
PAGE 718
ISDN Board - Clock Priority (PGM 301) A-144 Appendix A: System Programming Tables PGM 300 BTN RANGE DEFAULT T1 WINK TIME -- T1 Wink time. 13 7-15 10 T1 SEIZE TIME -- T1 seize time. 14 0-127 3 T1 RLS TIME -- T1 release time. 15 0-127 7 T1 RING DET TIME -- T1 ring detect time. 16 2-9 2 T1 RING STOP TIME -- T1 ring stop time. 17 10-60 60 ISDN Board - Clock Priority (PGM 301) In the MBX IP System, Clock synchronization is controlled by the pre-programmed ISDN Clock priority.
PAGE 719
Reset Board (PGM 310) A-145 Appendix A: System Programming Tables PGM 305 BTN RANGE DEFAULT DHCP USAGE -- DHCP Usage. 4 0:Off 1:On Off T38 USAGE -- T38 Usage. 5 0:Off 1:On Off RTP SECURITY -- RTP SecurityUsage. 6 0:Off 1:On Off VLAN -- VLan 7 0000-4096 None PRIORITY -- Priority 8 0-7 0 DIFFSERV -- Diffserv 9 00-63 0 Reset Board (PGM 310) Each board in the system can be reset with this menu. 1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 310. 2. Enter desired Slot Number with 2 digits. 3.
PAGE 720
Net Numbering Plan Table (PGM 321) A-146 Appendix A: System Programming Tables PGM 320 BTN RANGE DEFAULT NET CONP ENABLE -- Reserved for future usage. 3 0:Off 1:On Off NET SIGNAL METHOD -- Select the information element type for QSIG supplementary service message. 4 0:UUS 1:FAC UUS NET CC RETAIN -- If this value is set to ON, the signaling of call completion retain mode is executed. Used for networking supplementary signaling type of the call completion.
PAGE 721
TNET, CENTRALIZED NETWORKING - PGM 330-335 A-147 Appendix A: System Programming Tables PGM 321 BTN RANGE DEFAULT DIGIT REPEAT -- Determine if AND digit is included in the SETUP message or not.
PAGE 722
TNET CM Attributes (PGM 331) A-148 Appendix A: System Programming Tables PGM 330 T-NET ENABLE -- enable T-NET function. TNET CM Attributes (PGM 331)e bl a il at is th tim e ... BTN 1 RANGE 0:Off 1:On DEFAULT Off Each LM (Local MFIM), which is part of a Central Control Network, must be defined with the IP Address of the CM (Central MFIM) as well as the LM configuration data that will be sent to the CM at the time the LM registers with the CM.
PAGE 723
FoPSTN Attributes (PGM 333) A-149 Appendix A: System Programming Tables FoPSTN Attributes (PGM 333) e it m ... The Fail-over function allows the systems in a Centralized Control network (TNET) environment to complete calls from System to System over a PSTN (analog or digital) line should the WAN connection to the CM fail. A CO gateway Module must be registered to the LM for local control and access to CO services.
PAGE 724
Board TNET Attributes (PGM 334) A-150 Appendix A: System Programming Tables .. . When a board or MBX IP-gateway module is to be connectedein a Centralized Control network (TNET), the TNET operation of board or MBX IP-gatewayim t module can be enabled or disabled. 1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 334. is h 2. Enter Slot No. t atCentral Control networking. 3. Use the dial pad to enable or disable TNET, le data. 4.
PAGE 725
H.323 Call Setup Info (PGM 361) A-151 Appendix A: System Programming Tables PGM 360 BTN RANGE DEFAULT DIGIT (1) -- destination numbers associated with the H.323 routing system. 1 Max 8 digits - DEST IP ADDR -- destination IP address associated with the H.323 routing system. 2 - 0.0.0.0 H.323 Call Setup Info (PGM 361) When the Standard H.323 VoIP protocol is employed for an external VoIP call, several attributes of these channels can be assigned. The H.323 Call Set-up mode and tunneling (H.
PAGE 726
H.323 Incoming Attributes (PGM 362) A-152 Appendix A: System Programming Tables PGM 361 BTN RANGE DEFAULT G.711U CODEC -- usage of G.711U Codec Type. 6 0:Not Use 1:Use Not Use G.729 CODEC -- usage of G.729 Codec Type. 7 0:Not Use 1:Use Not Use G.723 CODEC -- usage of G.723.1 Codec Type. 8 0:Not Use 1:Use Not Use GK USED -- used to determine if Gatekeeper will be used. 9 0:Off 1:On Off H.323 Incoming Attributes (PGM 362) To get the direct H.
PAGE 727
GK Setup Info (PGM 363) A-153 Appendix A: System Programming Tables GK Setup Info (PGM 363) 1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 363. 2. Press the desired Flex button, refer to the following Table. 3. Press the [SAVE] button to store the new data. Release 1.0 PGM 363 BTN RANGE GK USAGE -- Determines if MPB will be used as a GateKeeper. 1 0:Off 1:On Off LIGHT RRQ USAGE -- The System can be set to use the simple Registration Request (RRQ) message (ON) or the full RRQ message (OFF).
PAGE 728
GAIN & CADENCE CONTROL - PGM 400-440 A-154 Appendix A: System Programming Tables GAIN & CADENCE CONTROL - PGM 400-440 DKT RX Gain (PGM 400) The RX gain of DKT can be adjusted (refer to Table for setting values). 1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 400. 2. Press the desired Flex button (refer to Table). 3. Use the dial pad to enter desired data for the attribute setting (refer to Table). 4. Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entry. PGM 400 BTN RANGE DEFAULT DKT RX GAIN -- DKT RX gain from DKT.
PAGE 729
DECT RX Gain (PGM 402) A-155 Appendix A: System Programming Tables PGM 401 BTN RANGE DEFAULT SLT RX GAIN -- SLT RX gain from DECT. 3 0-63 32 SLT RX GAIN -- SLT RX gain from IPDEV. 4 0-63 33 SLT RX GAIN -- SLT RX gain from Analog CO. 5 0-63 32 SLT RX GAIN -- SLT RX gain from Digital CO. 6 0-63 44 SLT RX GAIN -- SLT RX gain from VMIB. 7 0-63 40 SLTSLT RX GAIN -- SLT RX gain from DTMF. 8 0-63 28 SLT RX GAIN -- SLT RX gain from TONE.
PAGE 730
IP-Phone RX Gain (PGM 403) A-156 Appendix A: System Programming Tables IP-Phone RX Gain (PGM 403) The RX gain of IP-Phone can be adjusted. 1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 403. 2. Press the desired Flex button (refer to Table). 3. Use the dial pad to enter desired data for the attribute setting (refer to Table). 4. Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entry. PGM 403 BTN RANGE DEFAULT IP-PHONE RX GAIN -- IP-PHONE RX gain from DKT. 1 0-63 26 IP-PHONE RX GAIN -- IP-PHONE RX gain from SLT.
PAGE 731
Digital CO RX Gain (PGM 405) A-157 Appendix A: System Programming Tables PGM 404 BTN RANGE DEFAULT ACO RX GAIN -- ACO RX gain from Analog CO. 5 0-63 32 ACO RX GAIN -- ACO RX gain from Digital CO. 6 0-63 38 ACO RX GAIN -- ACO RX gain from VMIB. 7 0-63 37 ACO RX GAIN -- ACO RX gain from DTMF. 8 0-63 42 ACO RX GAIN -- ACO RX gain from TONE. 9 0-63 37 ACO RX GAIN -- ACO RX gain from MUSIC. 10 0-63 37 Digital CO RX Gain (PGM 405) The RX gain of Digital CO can be adjusted. 1.
PAGE 732
VMIB RX Gain (PGM 406) A-158 Appendix A: System Programming Tables VMIB RX Gain (PGM 406) The RX gain of VMIB can be adjusted. 1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 406. 2. Press the desired Flex button (refer to Table). 3. Use the dial pad to enter desired data for the attribute setting (refer to Table). 4. Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entry. PGM 406 BTN RANGE DEFAULT VMIB RX GAIN -- VMIB RX gain from DKT. 1 0-63 26 VMIB RX GAIN -- VMIB RX gain from SLT.
PAGE 733
DSP RX Gain (PGM 415) A-159 Appendix A: System Programming Tables PGM 407 BTN RANGE DEFAULT EXT PAGE RX GAIN -- External PAGE RX gain from Analog CO. 5 0-63 28 EXT PAGE RX GAIN -- External PAGE RX gain from Digital CO. 6 0-63 37 EXT PAGE RX GAIN -- External PAGE RX gain from VMIB. 7 0-63 37 EXT PAGE RX GAIN -- External PAGE RX gain from DTMF. 8 0-63 32 EXT PAGE RX GAIN -- External PAGE RX gain from TONE. 9 0-63 32 EXT PAGE RX GAIN -- External PAGE RX gain from MUSIC.
PAGE 734
RTP RX Gain (PGM 420-426) A-160 Appendix A: System Programming Tables RTP RX Gain (PGM 420-426) Each device can adjust its own RTP RX gain from other devices (refer to the tables below for RTP RX gain adjustment of devices). 1. Press the [PGM] button and dial. 420: SLTM RX RTP GAIN 421: DTIM(HS) RX RTP GAIN 422: DTIM(HF) RX RTP GAIN 423: IP-Phone(HS) RX RTP GAIN 424: IP-Phone(HF) RX RTP GAIN 425: WIT RX RTP GAIN 426: VOIB RX RTP GAIN 2. Press the desired Flex button (refer to the tables below). 3.
PAGE 735
RTP RX Gain (PGM 420-426) A-161 Appendix A: System Programming Tables DTIM (HS) RX RTP Gain (PGM 421) PGM 421 BTN RANGE DEFAULT DTIM RX HS RTP GAIN -- DTIM (HS) RX gain from SLTM. 1 0-63 34 DTIM RX HS RTP GAIN -- DTIM (HS) RX gain from DTIM (HS). 2 0-63 34 DTIM RX HS RTP GAIN -- DTIM (HS) RX gain DTIM (HF). 3 0-63 34 DTIM RX HS RTP GAIN -- DTIM (HS) RX gain from IP PHONE (HS). 4 0-63 34 DTIM RX HS RTP GAIN -- DTIM (HS) RX gain from IP PHONE (HF).
PAGE 736
RTP RX Gain (PGM 420-426) A-162 Appendix A: System Programming Tables PGM 423 BTN RANGE DEFAULT LIP RX HS RTP GAIN -- IP-PHONE (HS) RX gain from WIT. 6 0-63 34 LIP RX HS RTP GAIN -- IP-PHONE (HS) RX gain from VOIB. 7 0-63 34 IP-Phone (HF) RX RTP Gain (PGM 424) PGM 424 BTN RANGE DEFAULT LIP RX HF RTP GAIN -- IP-PHONE (HF) RX gain from SLTM. 1 0-63 34 LIP RX HF RTP GAIN -- IP-PHONE (HF) RX gain from DTIM (HS). 2 0-63 34 LIP RX HF RTP GAIN -- IP-PHONE (HF) RX gain DTIM (HF).
PAGE 737
RTP RX Gain (PGM 430-436) A-163 Appendix A: System Programming Tables VOIB RX RTP Gain (PGM 426) PGM 425 BTN VOIB RX RTP GAIN -- VOIB RX gain from SLTM. 1 RANGE 0-63 DEFAULT 34 VOIB RX RTP GAIN -- VOIB RX gain from DTIM (HS). 2 0-63 34 VOIB RX RTP GAIN -- VOIB RX gain DTIM (HF). 3 0-63 34 VOIB RX RTP GAIN -- VOIB RX gain from IP PHONE (HS). 4 0-63 34 VOIB RX RTP GAIN -- VOIB RX gain from IP PHONE (HF). 5 0-63 34 VOIB RX RTP GAIN -- VOIB RX gain from WIT.
PAGE 738
RTP RX Gain (PGM 430-436) A-164 Appendix A: System Programming Tables PGM 430 BTN RANGE DEFAULT SLTM TX RTP GAIN -- SLTM TX gain from IP PHONE (HF). 5 0-63 34 SLTM TX RTP GAIN -- SLTM TX gain from WIT. 6 0-63 34 SLTM TX RTP GAIN -- SLTM TX gain from VOIB. 7 0-63 34 DTIM (HS) TX RTP Gain (PGM 431) PGM 431 BTN RANGE DEFAULT DTIM TX HS RTP GAIN -- DTIM (HS) TX gain from SLTM. 1 0-63 34 DTIM TX HS RTP GAIN -- DTIM (HS) TX gain from DTIM (HS).
PAGE 739
RTP RX Gain (PGM 430-436) A-165 Appendix A: System Programming Tables PGM 433 BTN RANGE DEFAULT LIP TX HS RTP GAIN -- IP-PHONE (HS) TX gain DTIM (HF). 3 0-63 34 LIP TX HS RTP GAIN -- IP-PHONE (HS) TX gain from IP PHONE (HS). 4 0-63 34 LIP TX HS RTP GAIN -- IP-PHONE (HS) TX gain from IP PHONE (HF). 5 0-63 34 LIP TX HS RTP GAIN -- IP-PHONE (HS) TX gain from WIT. 6 0-63 34 LIP TX HS RTP GAIN -- IP-PHONE (HS) TX gain from VOIB.
PAGE 740
SLT Ring Cadence (PGM 440) A-166 Appendix A: System Programming Tables VOIB TX RTP Gain (PGM 436) PGM 436 BTN RANGE DEFAULT VOIB TX RTP GAIN -- VOIB TX gain from SLTM. 1 0-63 34 VOIB TX RTP GAIN -- VOIB TX gain from DTIM (HS). 2 0-63 34 VOIB TX RTP GAIN -- VOIB TX gain DTIM (HF). 3 0-63 34 VOIB TX RTP GAIN -- VOIB TX gain from IP PHONE (HS). 4 0-63 34 VOIB TX RTP GAIN -- VOIB TX gain from IP PHONE (HF). 5 0-63 34 VOIB TX RTP GAIN -- VOIB TX gain from WIT.
PAGE 741
SLT Ring Cadence (PGM 440) A-167 Appendix A: System Programming Tables STL CO Ring Cadence PGM 440 BTN RANGE DEFAULT CO RING REPEAT -- Determines the number of times the SLT CO ring will repeat; 255 means infinite repetition. 1 0-255 CO RING TIME UNIT -- Determines the duration in msec. for ON/OFF ring time. 2 0:10 msec 100 1:100 msec CO RING 1 ON -- Determines the first ON ring duration. 3 0-255 010 CO RING 1 OFF-- Determines the first OFF ring duration.
PAGE 742
ACNR Tone Cadence (PGM 441) A-168 Appendix A: System Programming Tables ACNR Tone Cadence (PGM 441) ACNR Tone Cadence can be adjusted (refer to Table for attribute values). 1. Press the [PGM] button and dial 441 2. Press the desired Flex button 1-5 (refer to Table). Flex 1: Tone Cadence ON Flex 2: Tone Cadence OFF 3. Use the dial pad to enter desired data. 4. Press the [SAVE] button to store the data entry. PGM 441 BTN RANGE DEFAULT DIAL TONE CADENCE -- ACNR Dial Tone Cadence.
PAGE 743
DB INITIALIZATION (PGM 499) A-169 Appendix A: System Programming Tables PGM 499 Release 1.0 BTN RANGE DEFAULT INIT STATION DATA -- Initializes Station-based data (except flexible button data), 3 Desired station range (initialize whole data when no range) - INIT STATION DATA -- Initializes flexible button data, 4 - - INIT STATION DATA -- Initializes CO line-based data), 5 - - INIT STATION DATA -- Initializes Station Group-based data.
PAGE 744
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
PAGE 745
Appendix B Quick Reference This appendix contains Quick Reference tables for the following types of information: - Database Index - Default Numbering Plan - Fixed Function/User Program Codes - Default Values. - Alpha-numeric Entry Charts DATABASE INDEX The Database index is divided into groups of "PROGRAMS" based on specific characteristics associated with the data such as, Numbering Plans, Station oriented database entries, or CO Line oriented values.
PAGE 746
DATABASE INDEX B-2 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP NUMBERING PLAN DATA PGM CODE PGM NAME 114 CO Group Access Code 115 Station Group Number STATION PORT DATA 120 Station Type Information Station Type 121 Station Port Attribute 1 Station Port Attribute 122 Station Port Attribute 2 123 Station Port Attribute 3 124 Station Port Attribute 4 126 Station Flexible Button Attribute Web Only STATION NUMBER DATA CO LINE DATA Release 1.
PAGE 747
DATABASE INDEX B-3 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP CO LINE DATA STATION GROUP DATA SYSTEM DATA Release 1.
PAGE 748
DATABASE INDEX B-4 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP SYSTEM DATA TABLE DATA Release 1.
PAGE 749
DATABASE INDEX B-5 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP TABLE DATA TENANT DATA Release 1.
PAGE 750
DATABASE INDEX B-6 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP BOARD DATA PGM CODE PGM NAME WEB SUB-MENU 300 ISDN Board Attribute ISDN Board Attribute 301 ISDN Clock Priority ISDN Clock Priority 305 VOIB/VMIB Board Attribute VOIB/VMIB Board Attribute VOICE NETWORK DATA 320 Network Attributes Network Attributes 321 Network Numbering Network Numbering T-NET Data 330 TNET Basic Attributes TNET Attributes 331 TNET CM Attributes CM Attributes 333 FoPSTN Attributes FoPSTN Attribute 3
PAGE 751
DATABASE INDEX B-7 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP ZONE DATA PGM CODE PGM NAME WEB SUB-MENU Web Only Zone RTP Relay Group Web Only Inter Zone Attribute SNMP DATA Web Only SNMP Data DECT DATA Web Only DECT Registration 491 GREEN MODE NATION SPECIFIC INITIALIZATION Release 1.
PAGE 752
DEFAULT NUMBERING PLAN B-8 Appendix B: Quick Reference DEFAULT NUMBERING PLAN The Default Numbering Plan can be selected from 1 of 6 Base Numbering Plans (Tables B-1 and B-2). The Number Plan can be changed using the Numbering Plan Programs, PROGRAM CODES 110 to 114.
PAGE 753
DEFAULT NUMBERING PLAN B-9 Appendix B: Quick Reference FEATURE CODE No Feature Name NUM SET 1 NUM SET 2 NUM SET 3 1 Attendant Call 0 *9 0 2 Conference Room 1 571 *571 571 3 Conference Room 2 572 *572 572 4 Conference Room 3 573 *573 573 5 Conference Room 4 574 *574 574 6 Conference Room 5 575 *575 575 7 Conference Room 6 576 *576 576 8 Conference Room 7 577 *577 577 9 Conference Room 8 578 *578 578 10 Conference Room 9 579 *579 579 11 Internal Page
PAGE 754
DEFAULT NUMBERING PLAN B-10 Appendix B: Quick Reference No Feature Name NUM SET 1 NUM SET 2 NUM SET 3 28 MWI Register 556 *556 556 29 MWI Answer 557 *557 557 30 MWI Cancel 559 *559 559 31 Call Back Register 518 *518 518 32 Call Back Cancel 519 *519 519 33 Group Call Pickup 566 *566 566 34 Direct Call Pickup 7 *7 7 35 Walking COS 520 *520 520 36 Call Parking Location 541 *541 541 37 PGM Mode Access 521 *521 521 38 Two-Way Record 522 *522 522 39 V
PAGE 755
DEFAULT NUMBERING PLAN B-11 Appendix B: Quick Reference 53 Temporarily COS Down No 531 Feature Name *531 NUM SET 1 531 NUM SET 2 NUM SET 3 54 Cancel Temp COS Down 532 *532 532 55 Password Change 533 *533 533 56 Inter-Phone Group Access 534 *534 534 57 Call Wait Request 535 *535 535 58 Preselected MSG PGM 536 *536 536 59 Forced Handsfree Call 537 *537 537 60 Call Based CLIR 582 *582 582 61 CLIR Access 583 *583 583 62 COLR Access 584 *584 584 63 Pilot
PAGE 756
DEFAULT NUMBERING PLAN B-12 Appendix B: Quick Reference 85 Universal Answer No 587 Feature Name NUM SET 1 *587 587 NUM SET 2 NUM SET 3 86 USB Call Record 588 *588 588 87 Delete All VM Message 681 *681 681 88 VM Page Message Record 682 *682 682 89 Direct VM Transfer 683 *683 683 90 Loop Key 684 *684 684 91 Call Log 685 *685 685 92 ACD Agent Login/Logout 500 *500 500 93 ACD Agent DND 501 *501 501 94 ACD Agent Work Mode 502 *502 502 95 ACD Agent Auto Wo
PAGE 757
DEFAULT NUMBERING PLAN B-13 Appendix B: Quick Reference No Feature Name NUM SET 4 NUM SET 5 NUM SET 6 1 Attendant Call 0 9 #9 2 Conference Room 1 571 571 *571 3 Conference Room 2 572 572 *572 4 Conference Room 3 573 573 *573 5 Conference Room 4 574 574 *574 6 Conference Room 5 575 575 *575 7 Conference Room 6 576 576 *576 8 Conference Room 7 577 577 *577 9 Conference Room 8 578 578 *578 10 Conference Room 9 579 579 *579 11 Internal Page 543 543 *5
PAGE 758
DEFAULT NUMBERING PLAN B-14 Appendix B: Quick Reference No Feature Name 29 MWI Answer 30 MWI Cancel 31 Call Back Register 32 Call Back Cancel 33 NUM SET 4 558 NUM SET 5 NUM SET 6 557 *557 559 559 *559 518 518 *518 519 519 *519 Group Call Pickup ** 566 *566 34 Direct Call Pickup 7 7 *7 35 Walking COS 520 520 *520 36 Call Parking Location 541 541 *541 541 + xx Xx: Parking Location (00-49) 37 PGM Mode Access 521 521 *521 38 Two-Way Record 522 522 *522 39
PAGE 759
DEFAULT NUMBERING PLAN B-15 Appendix B: Quick Reference No Feature Name NUM SET 4 NUM SET 5 NUM SET 6 54 Cancel Temp COS Down 532 532 *532 55 Password Change 533 533 *533 56 Inter-Phone Group Access 534 534 *534 57 Call Wait Request 535 535 *535 58 Preselected MSG PGM 536 536 *536 59 Forced Handsfree Call 537 537 *537 60 Call Based CLIR 582 582 *582 61 CLIR Access 583 583 *583 62 COLR Access 584 584 *584 63 Pilot Hunt Call 585 585 *585 64 Command Cal
PAGE 760
DEFAULT NUMBERING PLAN B-16 Appendix B: Quick Reference No Feature Name 85 Universal Answer 86 USB Call Record 87 Delete All VM Message 88 VM Page Message Record 89 NUM SET 4 NUM SET 6 587 *587 588 588 *588 681 681 *681 682 682 *682 Direct VM Transfer 683 683 *683 90 Loop Key 684 684 *684 91 Call Log 685 685 *685 92 ACD Agent Login/Logout 500 500 *500 93 ACD Agent DND 501 501 *501 94 ACD Agent Work Mode 502 502 *502 95 ACD Agent Auto Work 503 503 *5
PAGE 761
FIXED FUNCTION/USER PROGRAM CODES B-17 Appendix B: Quick Reference FIXED FUNCTION/USER PROGRAM CODES Fixed Function Codes in the two tables that follow, are digit sequences users and the Attendant may dial while in the USER PROGRAM MODE.
PAGE 762
FIXED FUNCTION/USER PROGRAM CODES B-18 Appendix B: Quick Reference USER PGM CODE DESCRIPTION REMARK 51 + x Mobile Phone Activation X=1-2 52 + x Mobile Phone Registration X=1-2 53 + x Mobile CLI Number Registration X=1-2 54 + Rm & Auth Code Conf Room Start 55 + Rm & Auth Code Conf Room Close 61 Speaker/Headset Mode Speaker / Headset / E-MIC 62 Headset Ring Mode Speaker / Headset / Both 71 Register Station ICLID 72 View Station ICLID 81 View IP Address IP Phone / DTIM / SLTM 82
PAGE 763
FIXED FUNCTION/USER PROGRAM CODES B-19 Appendix B: Quick Reference USER PGM CODE ITEM DESCRIPTION 022 PRINT TRAFFIC (CALL TYPE) 023 PRINT TRAFFIC (CO GRP) REMARK 03 COS / PASSWORD 031 TEMPORARY COS MODE Station Range 032 RETRIEVE COS Station Range 033 REGISTER PASSWORD Station Range 034 CALL LOG PROTECT Station Range 04 DATE / TIME 041 SET SYSTEM DATE 042 SET SYSTEM TIME 043 LCD DATE MODE Station Range 044 LCD TIME MODE Station Range 045 SET WAKE UP Station Range 046 RESET
PAGE 764
FIXED FUNCTION/USER PROGRAM CODES B-20 Appendix B: Quick Reference USER PGM CODE 074 ITEM DESCRIPTION FEATURE CANCEL REMARK Station Range 08 SYSTEM 081 DAY/NIGHT PROGRAM 082 MONITOR CONF ROOM 083 FORCED DELETE CONF ROOM 084 PPTP CONNECTION Registered Server Number 09 USB 091 SOFTWARE UPGRADE 092 DB DOWNLOAD TO USB 093 DB UPLOAD TO USB 094 VMIB MSG DOWNLOAD 0# WTU SUBSCRIBE Release 1.
PAGE 765
DEFAULT VALUES B-21 Appendix B: Quick Reference DEFAULT VALUES The following Tables are divided based on PROGRAM groups and provide the default values assigned to all Admin entries. Prior to changing an entry during programming assure you have an understanding of the PROGRAM and its purpose.
PAGE 766
DEFAULT VALUES B-22 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT - - - MAC Address 1 - - Station Range 2 - - IP Address 3 - - F/W IP Address 4 - - RTP Security 5 - - - - - IP Address 1 - 10.10.10.1 Subnet mask 2 - 255.255.255.000 Router IP Address 3 - 10.10.10.254 Firewall IP Address 4 - 0.0.0.0 DNS IP Address 5 - 0.0.0.0 H.
PAGE 767
DEFAULT VALUES B-23 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT - - - - - 1 - - - 1 Sys No. Plan Index 001 to 150 - Flex01 - 1 Sys No. Plan Index 001 to 150 Flex05 - 5 NUMBERING PLAN NUMBERING PLAN TYPE A-16 110 Default Numbering Plan Type SYSTEM NUMBERING PLAN Prefix Code Prefix Code A-16 111 1 Flex02 - 2 Flex03 - 3 Flex04 - 4 Flex06 - 6 Flex07 - 7 Flex08 - 8 Flex09 - 9 Flex10 - 0 Flex11 - * Flex12 - # Additional Digits 2 Sys No.
PAGE 768
DEFAULT VALUES B-24 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT - - - - Default No.
PAGE 769
DEFAULT VALUES B-25 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT 26 - 553 Speed Dial 27 - 555 MWI Register 28 - 557 MWI Answer 29 - 558 MWI Cancel 30 - 559 Call Back Register 31 - 518 Call Back Cancel 32 - 519 Group Call Pickup 33 - 564 Direct Call Pickup 34 - 7 Walking COS 35 - 520 Call Parking Location 36 - 541 PGM Mode Access 37 - 521 Two-Way Record 38 - 522 VMIB Access 39 - 523 AME Access 40 - 524 CO Line Access 4
PAGE 770
DEFAULT VALUES B-26 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT 54 - 532 Password Change 55 - 533 Inter-Phone Group Access 56 - 534 Call Wait Request 57 - 535 Preselected MSG PGM 58 - 536 Forced Handsfree Call 59 - 537 Call Based CLIR 60 - 582 CLIR Access 61 - 583 COLR Access 62 - 584 Pilot Hunt Call 63 - 585 Command Call Oneway 64 - 581 Command Call Conf 65 - 580 Intrude Register 66 - 589 Camp On Register 67 - 590 OHVO R
PAGE 771
DEFAULT VALUES B-27 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT 82 - #*1 Keypad Facility 83 - ##* T-Net Log-In/Out 84 - 586 Universal Answer 85 - 587 USB Call Record 86 - 588 Delete All VM Message 87 - 681 VM Page Message Record 88 - 682 Direct VM Transfer 89 - 683 Loop Key 90 - 684 Call Log 91 - 685 ACD Agent Log-In/Out 92 - 500 ACD Agent DND 93 - 501 ACD Agent Word Mode 94 - 502 ACD Agent Auto Work 95 - 503 ACD Agent Au
PAGE 772
DEFAULT VALUES B-28 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT - - - 9, 801-872 - - - 620-669 - - - Station Type 1 - - DSS MAP 2 - - Serial DSS 3 - - - - - NUMBERING PLAN CO GROUP ACCESS CODE A-22 114 - CO Group Access Code 01-73 STATION GROUP NUMBER A-22 115 - Station Group 01 -- Station Group 50 STATION PORT DATA STATION TYPE STATION PORT ATTRIBUTES I A-24 A-25 120 121 Auto Speaker Selection 1 1: On, 0: Off Headset Mode 2 0: Spe
PAGE 773
DEFAULT VALUES B-29 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT STATION PORT DATA STATION PORT ATTRIBUTES II A-26 122 LCD Language Display mode - - 1 00: English English 01: Italian - 02: Finnish - 03: Dutch - 04: Swedish - 05: Danish - 06: Norwegian - 07: Hebrew - 08: Germany - 09: French - 10: Portuguese - 11: Spanish - 12: Korean - 13: Estonian - 1 14: Russian English LCD Date Display Mode 2 1: MMDDYY 0: DDMMYY DDMMYY LCD Time Disp
PAGE 774
DEFAULT VALUES B-30 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT STATION PORT DATA STATION PORT ATTRIBUTES III - - Prime Number 1 01-48 01 Zone Number 2 1-9 1 Automatic Hold 3 1: On, 0: Off Off Enblock Dial Mode 4 1: On, 0: Off Off Intercom Answer Mode 5 1: Handsfree 2: Tone 3: Privacy Tone Data Line Security 6 1: On, 0: Off Off Sending Progress Indicator 7 1: On, 0: Off Off Fax Mode 8 1: On, 0: Off Off DTMF Confirmation Tone When Redial 9
PAGE 775
DEFAULT VALUES B-31 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT STATION PORT DATA Off-Hook On Paged A-28 7 0: Paged 1: Dial Tone Preferred Line Answer 8 1: ON, 0: OFF Pick-Up By DSS Button 9 0: Disable 1: Group Pick-Up 2: Direct Pick-Up CTI IP Address 10 0.0.0.0 FLEXIBLE BUTTON ASSIGNMENT A-30 Button Type Button Type 126 Paged ON Direct Pick-Up 0.0.0.
PAGE 776
DEFAULT VALUES B-32 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT STATION PORT DATA Button Access Type A-30 126 3 0: Changeable 1: Unchangeable In case Button Type is Directory Number: All Call Dial after Seizure Incoming Only STATION NUMBER DATA STATION DN ASSIGNMENT A-32 130 1 - - 1: SADN Normal 2: MADN 3: SADN-Hotdesk - 2 - - - - - Station Name 1 - - Tenant Group 2 1-9 (MBX IP-300) 1-5 (MBX IP-100) 1 Digit Conversion Table 3 1-9 1 Password 4
PAGE 777
DEFAULT VALUES B-33 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT STATION NUMBER DATA DND Access 4 EN/DIS Enable Intrusion Access 5 EN/DIS Disable Mobile Extension Access 6 EN/DIS Enable Hook Flash Mode 7 0: Flash Normal 1: Flash Ignore 2: Flash Drop 3: Hold Release Auto Pick-Up 8 EN/DIS Disable CO Queue Access 1 EN/DIS Enable Conference Access 2 EN/DIS Enable Wake-Up Access 3 EN/DIS Enable Station Call Back Access 4 EN/DIS Enable ACNR Access
PAGE 778
DEFAULT VALUES B-34 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT STATION NUMBER DATA Repeat Wake-Up 9 1: On, 0: Off Off Branch Line / Bridge Line Mode 10 0: Off 1: Branch 2: Bridge 3: Bridge-Softphone Off Auto Privacy 11 1: On, 0: Off Off CLIP Display 1 En/Dis Enable COLP Display 2 En/Dis Enable CLI Redirect 3 CLI/Redirect CLIP When Outgoing 4 En/Dis Disable COLP When Incoming Answer 5 En/Dis Disable CLI Number 6 - Call Forward CLI / Redirect
PAGE 779
DEFAULT VALUES B-35 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT STATION NUMBER DATA PRESET CALL FORWARD A-41 - - - Internal Unconditional 1 - - Internal Busy 2 - - Internal No-Answer 3 - - External Unconditional 4 - - External Busy 5 - - External No-Answer 6 - - - - - Forward Type 1 Not Assigned Unconditional Busy No-Answer Busy / No-Answer Forward Number 2 - Forward Apply Time 3 0: All 1: Day 2: Night 3: Timed All Call-Forward No-Ans
PAGE 780
DEFAULT VALUES B-36 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT STATION NUMBER DATA VMIB Message Retrieve Type 8 0: LIFO 1: FIFO LIFO VMIB New Message Number 9 - - VMIB Saved Message Number 10 - - VM MSG-SMTP Mail Server IP Address VM MSG-User Mail Address VM MSG-SMTP Mail Server ID VM MSG-SMTP Mail Server Password VM MSG-Attach Message MOBILE EXTENSION ATTRIBUTE A-44 1: On, 0: Off Off Off 146 Mobile EXT 1 Enable 1 1: On, 0: Off Mobile EXT 1 Number 2 -
PAGE 781
DEFAULT VALUES B-37 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT CO LINE DATA CO LINE ATTRIBUTES I A-47 160 CO Line Type 1 Service Type 2 0: Normal 1: DID Outgoing Group Number 3 01-72 01 Incoming Group Number 4 01-72 01 Tenant Number 5 1-9 (MBX IP-300) 1-5 (MBX IP-100) 1 Digit Conversion Table 6 1-9 1 Signal Type 7 0: No Signal 1: Send Wink 2: Wait Seize Ack 3: Send Wink & Wait Seize Ack 4: Send Sub Answer & Wait Sub Answer 5: Send Wink & Send Sub An
PAGE 782
DEFAULT VALUES B-38 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT CO LINE DATA Metering Usage 160 12 A-48 161 - - VOIP/QSIG Mode 1 Not Assigned SIP/PRI H323 QSIG Drop Type 2 0: Loop 1: Polarity Loop Flash Type 3 0: LOOP 1: Ground Loop Flash Timer 4 000-300 (10msec) 050 Open Loop Timer 5 00-20 (100msec) 00 Line Length 6 0Km 3Km 5Km 7Km Zone Number 7 1-9 VMIB Prompt Language Index 8 First Prompt Second Prompt Third Prompt ISDN CD 9 1: On, 0: O
PAGE 783
DEFAULT VALUES B-39 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT CO LINE DATA CO LINE ATTRIBUTES III A-49 162 Normal CO Line CO Access Mode 1 0: Blocked Line 1: Normal CO Line 2: Dedicated Line Digit Sending Mode 2 Overlap Enblock Max Digit Length 3 00-32 32 Min Digit Length for Overlap Mode 4 00-32 00 Check Password 5 1: On, 0: Off Off R2 Connect Mode 6 0: End-to-End 1: Link-by-Link R2MFC Backward Value 7 01-15 01 Dummy Dial Tone Service 8 1: On,
PAGE 784
DEFAULT VALUES B-40 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT CO LINE DATA INCOMING CO ATTRIBUTES I A-51 165 CO Name 1 - ISDN Screen Indicator 2 0: User Provided, Not Screened 1: User Provided, Verified & Passed Calling Type 3 0: Unknown 1: International 2: National 3: Subscriber 4: Not Used National Calling Numbering Type 4 0: Unknown 1: ISDN Tel No.
PAGE 785
DEFAULT VALUES B-41 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT CO LINE DATA Block After Clear Forward Waiting Time 4 1: On, 0: Off Off CPT Detect 5 1: On, 0: Off On Answer to Waiting Call 6 1: On, 0: Off Off Universal Answer 7 1: On, 0: Off Off Release Guard Time 8 00-15 (1sec) 1 Unsupervised Conference Timer 9 000-255 (1min) 0 Clear Forward Waiting Timer 10 001-300 (1sec) 300 Max Ring Time 11 015-300 (1sec) 120 DISA Supervision Timer 12 1-9
PAGE 786
DEFAULT VALUES B-42 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT CO LINE DATA Night Timed NORMAL/DISA CO ATTRIBUTES Day Release 1.
PAGE 787
DEFAULT VALUES B-43 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT CO LINE DATA Night Timed Release 1.
PAGE 788
DEFAULT VALUES B-44 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT 1 Flex1 - Busy Flex2 - No-Answer Flex3 - Vacant Number Flex4 - Trans No-Answer Flex5 - Recall No-Answer Flex6 - DND Flex7 - Handset Lifted Flex8 - Error 1: Disconnect 2: Attendant 3: CO Ring Assign 4: ALT Ring Table 5: Tone 6: Pilot Hunt Group Disconnect 2 Flex1 - Busy Flex2 - No-Answer Flex3 - Vacant Number Flex4 - Trans No-Answer Flex5 - Recall No-Answer Flex6 - DND Flex7 - Handset Lifted Flex8 - Error 1: D
PAGE 789
DEFAULT VALUES B-45 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT 3 Flex1 - Busy Flex2 - No-Answer Flex3 - Vacant Number Flex4 - Trans No-Answer Flex5 - Recall No-Answer Flex6 - DND Flex7 - Handset Lifted Flex8 - Error 1: Disconnect 2: Attendant 3: CO Ring Assign 4: ALT Ring Table 5: Tone 6: Pilot Hunt Group Disconnect ISDN Screen Indicator 1 User Provided, Not Screened User Provided, Verified and Passed Sending Caller Number 2 1: On, 0: Off 3 0: Unknown 1: Internatio
PAGE 790
DEFAULT VALUES B-46 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT CO LINE DATA Called No. Plan Identification 5 0: Unknown 1: ISDN Telephy No. Plan 2: Data 3: Telex 4: National Standard 5: Private Unknown Bearer Capability 6 0: Speedch 1: Unrestricted 2: Restricted 3: 3.
PAGE 791
DEFAULT VALUES B-47 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT CO LINE DATA OUTGOING CO ATTRIBUTES II A-59 171 CPT Detect 1 1: On, 0: Off On Unsupervised Conference Extend 2 1: On, 0: Off Off Provide Ring-Back Tone 3 1: On, 0: Off Off BLF Usage 4 1: On, 0: Off On Release Guard Timer 5 00-15 (1sec) 2 Unsupervised Conference Timer 6 000-255 (1min) 0 Max Transfer Ring Timer 7 001-300 (sec) 120 Outgoing Time Table Index 8 None, 1-9 Day 1 Flex1
PAGE 792
DEFAULT VALUES B-48 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT 3 Flex1 - Recall No-Answer Flex2 - Transfer No-Ans Flex3 - No-Answer 1: Disconnect 2: Attendant 3: CO Ring Assign 4: ALT Ring Table 5: Tone 6: Pilot Hunt Group Disconnect Seize Wait Time 1 005-200 (100msec) 50 First Digit 2 010-200 (100msec) 100 Second Digit 3 010-200 (100msec) 80 Third Digit 4 010-200 (100msec) 70 Fourth Digit 5 010-200 (100msec) 60 Fifth Digit 6 010-200 (100msec) 50 7
PAGE 793
DEFAULT VALUES B-49 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT CO LINE DATA CO–TO–CO ATTRIBUTES A-63 179 Station Outgoing Call Transfer 1 EN/DIS Enable 2 EN/DIS Enable Outgoing Transfer Release Type 3 0: None 1: Release After Time Outgoing Transfer Release Time 4 000-300 60 Incoming Call Transfer Directly 5 EN/DIS Disable Station Incoming Call Transfer 6 EN/DIS Enable Attendant Incoming Call Transfer 7 EN/DIS Enable Incoming Transfer Release Type
PAGE 794
DEFAULT VALUES B-50 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT CO LINE DATA Feature Code 3 Not Assigned Station Group CCR CCR Drop DISA Tone Digits Feature Delay 4 0 Not Assigned STATION GROUP DATA STATION GROUP ASSIGNMENT A-67 200 1 Group Name 2 Tenant Number 3 1-9 (MBX IP-300) 1-5 (MBX IP-100) 1 Time Table Index 4 1-9 1 Pick-Up Option 5 0: Disable 1: All Call 2: Intercom Call 3: External Call Member Assignment 6 Station Greeting Tone Type 1 0: N
PAGE 795
DEFAULT VALUES B-51 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM Greeting Repeat Count BTN 5 RANGE DEFAULT 000-100 3 0 STATION GROUP DATA Greeting Repeat Delay Timer 6 000-100 (1sec) Queuing Tone Type 7 0: Normal 1: Prompt 2: Announcement 3: Internal MOH 4: External MOH Greeting/Queuing Timeout Timer 8 000-300 (1sec) Queuing Tone Number 9 01-19 Queuing Prompt/Announcement Table No.
PAGE 796
DEFAULT VALUES B-52 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM Busy Index BTN 3 RANGE DEFAULT 1-9 3 STATION GROUP DATA No-Answer Index 4 1-9 4 Disconnect Index 5 1-9 9 SMDI Type 6 0: Type 1 1: Type 2 SMDI CLI Information 7 1: On, 0: Off Pick-Up Condition 1 0: All Call 1: Intercom Call 2: External Call Pick-Up Member Assignment 2 Station 1 Station On Hook Service 1 0: On-Hook 1: Recall One-Way Busy 2 0: Busy 1: Request Queuing 2: Recover Call Busy 3 0: Busy 1:
PAGE 797
DEFAULT VALUES B-53 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP INTERPHONE GROUP PG # PGM A-76 209 Digit ‘1’ Service BTN RANGE - - 1 Station Digit ‘2’ Service Station Digit ‘3’ Service Station Digit ‘4’ Service Station Digit ‘5’ Service Station Digit ‘6’ Service Station Digit ‘7’ Service Station Digit ‘8’ Service Station Digit ‘9’ Service Station PILOT HUNT GROUP I A-76 DEFAULT - 210 Pilot Hunt Call Service 1 0: All Call 1: Intercom Call 2: External Call All Call Service Ty
PAGE 798
DEFAULT VALUES B-54 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN Timed Forward Type 5 Timed Forward Destination 6 RANGE 0: Not Used 1: Unconditional 2: Busy 3: No-Answer 4: Busy/No-Answer DEFAULT Not Used STATION DATA SYSTEM TIMER I A-85 220 CO-to-CO Transfer Timer 1 000-300 (1sec) 30 Hot-Desk Logout Timer 2 00-24 (1hour) 0 ACNR Pause Timer 3 5-300 (1sec) 30 Paging Timeout Timer 4 0-300 (1sec) 15 Pause Timer 5 1-9 (1sec) 3 Voice Mail Pause Timer 6 1-9 (1sec) 3
PAGE 799
DEFAULT VALUES B-55 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT STATION DATA Inter-Digit Timer 3 0-300 (1sec) 15 Incoming CO Inter-Digit Timer 4 1-60 (1sec) 15 Web Admin Password Encryption 1 1: On, 0: Off Off Pulse Dial Break/Make Ratio 2 0: 60/40 1: 66/33 2: 50/50 Voice Mail SMDI Interface 3 1: On, 0: Off Off VMIB SMTP Port 4 0000-9999 25 Network Time/Date 5 0: Disable 1: ISND Clock 2: NTP CLI Print 6 1: On, 0: Off Off TLS for Web 7 1: On, 0:
PAGE 800
DEFAULT VALUES B-56 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT STATION DATA Alarm Signal Mode EXTERNAL CONTROL CONTACT 4 A-90 0: Once 1: Repeat Repeat 228 Not Used LBC Door Open External Paging Not Used 1 NO BGM Internal Music External Music VMIB BGM 1 VMIB BGM 2 VMIB BGM 3 VMIB BGM 4 SLT MOH 1 SLT MOH 2 SLT MOH 3 SLT MOH 4 SLT MOH 5 NO BGM 2 Romance Turkish March Green Sleeves Fur Elise Carmen Waltz Pavane Sichiliano Sonata Spring Campanella Badinerie Blue Danube
PAGE 801
DEFAULT VALUES B-57 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT STATION DATA VMIB MOH 3 Assignment 5 Announcement VMIB MOH 4 Assignment 6 Announcement SLT MOH 1 Assignment 7 Station SLT MOH 2 Assignment 8 Station SLT MOH 3 Assignment 9 Station SLT MOH 4 Assignment 10 Station SLT MOH 5 Assignment 11 Station Baud Rate 1 1: 9600 Baud 2: 19200 Baud 3: 38400 Baud 4: 57600 Baud 5:115200 Baud Page Break 2 1: On, 0: Off Off Line Per Page 3 001-199 66 X
PAGE 802
DEFAULT VALUES B-58 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT STATION DATA SMDI Print 3 0: Serial Port 1: Modu Port 2: TCP 1 3: TCP 2 4: TCP 3 5: TCP 4 6: TCP 5 Serial Port Call Information Print 4 0: Serial Port 1: Modu Port 2: TCP 1 3: TCP 2 4: TCP 3 5: TCP 4 6: TCP 5 Serial Port Traffic Print 5 0: Serial Port 1: Modu Port 2: TCP 1 3: TCP 2 4: TCP 3 5: TCP 4 6: TCP 5 Serial Port 6 0: Serial Port 1: Modu Port 2: TCP 1 3: TCP 2 4: TCP 3 5: TCP 4 6: TCP 5 Seria
PAGE 803
DEFAULT VALUES B-59 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT STATION DATA SMDR ATTRIBUTES A-94 232 SMDR Save Enable 1 1: On, 0: Off Off SMDR Print Enable 2 1: On, 0: Off Off Record Type 3 0: All Call 1: Long Distance Long Distance Call Digit Counter 4 07-15 07 Print Incoming Call 5 1: On, 0: Off Off Print Lost Call 6 1: On, 0: Off Off SMDR Currency Unit 7 SMDR Cost per Metering Pulse 8 SMDR Fraction 9 0-5 SMDR Transfer Charge Mode 10 0: I
PAGE 804
DEFAULT VALUES B-60 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT STATION DATA Not Assign SMDR Mail Send Weekly Set Not Assign Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun SMDR Mail Send Daily Set 00-23 00 SMDR Mail Auto Send Set 1: On, 0: Off Off SMDR Mail Auto Delete Set 1: On, 0: Off Off SYSTEM DATE & TIME A-97 233 System Time 1 (HH:MM) System Date 2 (MMDDYY) DST Enable Mode 3 1: On, 0: Off DST Start Time 4 DST End Timer 5 Network Time / Date Off Disable ISDN Cl
PAGE 805
DEFAULT VALUES B-61 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT STATION DATA [CALL BK] MSG Wait 3 [MUTE] Transmission 4 [MUTE] COS Change 5 [DND] DND 6 [DND] One-Time 7 [DND] Preselect MSG [CALL BK] ACNR [SPK] Speaker Release 1.
PAGE 806
DEFAULT VALUES B-62 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT STATION DATA [SPK] Headset 11 [SPK] Incoming Call 12 [HOLD] Paging 13 [HOLD] Voice Over 14 [HOLD] Reserved 15 [RING] ICM Ring 16 [RING] CO Ring [RING] MSG Wait Release 1.
PAGE 807
DEFAULT VALUES B-63 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT STATION DATA [HEADSET] Headset [HEADSET] Bluetooth [DN] I Use [DN] Other Use [DN] DND [DN] Incoming Call [DN] Hold [DN] Call Forward Release 1.
PAGE 808
DEFAULT VALUES B-64 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT STATION DATA [DN] I Conference [DN] Other Conference [DN] Conf Supervisor [DSS] Incoming Call [DSS] ICM Talk DSS] DND [DSS] Call Forward [DSS] Handset-Lift Release 1.
PAGE 809
DEFAULT VALUES B-65 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT STATION DATA [DSS] Preselected MSG [DSS] Hold [CO] Call Setup [CO] Co Talk [DN] VM Message Wait [DSS] VM Message Wait [CO] Command Group Ring [CO] Command Group Talk Release 1.
PAGE 810
DEFAULT VALUES B-66 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT STATION DATA [CO] I Talk 43 [CO] Hold [CO] Transfer 44 A-98 234 [CO] Recall 45 46 Reserved 1 47 Reserved 2 48 PPP ATTRIBUTES A-102 Flex1: Color Red / Green / Amber Flex2: Flash Flash Off / On / IPM Flex1: Color Red / Green / Amber Flex2: Flash Flash Off / On / IPM Flex1: Color Red / Green / Amber Flex2: Flash Flash Off / On / IPM Flex1: Color Red / Green / Amber Flex2: Flash Flash Off / On / IPM
PAGE 811
DEFAULT VALUES B-67 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT STATION DATA 2 0: Not Assign 1: Call-Back 2: Camp-On 3: Call Wait 4: Voice Over 5: Intrusion 6: Hunt Not Assign 3 0: Not Assign 1: Call-Back 2: Camp-On 3: Call Wait 4: Voice Over 5: Intrusion 6: Hunt Not Assign Digit ‘3’ Service 4 0: Not Assign 1: Call-Back 2: Camp-On 3: Call Wait 4: Voice Over 5: Intrusion 6: Hunt Not Assign Digit ‘4’ Service 5 0: Not Assign 1: Call-Back 2: Camp-On 3: Call Wait 4: Vo
PAGE 812
DEFAULT VALUES B-68 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT STATION DATA 7 0: Not Assign 1: Call-Back 2: Camp-On 3: Call Wait 4: Voice Over 5: Intrusion 6: Hunt Not Assign 8 0: Not Assign 1: Call-Back 2: Camp-On 3: Call Wait 4: Voice Over 5: Intrusion 6: Hunt Not Assign Digit ‘8’ Service 9 0: Not Assign 1: Call-Back 2: Camp-On 3: Call Wait 4: Voice Over 5: Intrusion 6: Hunt Not Assign Digit ‘9’ Service 10 0: Not Assign 1: Call-Back 2: Camp-On 3: Call Wait 4: V
PAGE 813
DEFAULT VALUES B-69 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT STATION DATA Digit ‘*’ Service Digit ‘#’ Service DIAL-TONE DIGIT TABLE 12 0: Not Assign 1: Call-Back 2: Camp-On 3: Call Wait 4: Voice Over 5: Intrusion 6: Hunt Not Assign 0: Not Assign 1: Call-Back 2: Camp-On 3: Call Wait 4: Voice Over 5: Intrusion 6: Hunt Not Assign A-103 237 13 A-104 240 - Dummy Dial-Tone Digit EXECUTIVE / SECRETARY ASSIGN Max 6 Digits A-104 241 - - - - Executive Number 1
PAGE 814
DEFAULT VALUES B-70 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT STATION DATA PPTP Server Address Max 32 Ch PPTP ID Max 24 Ch PPTP Password Max 24 Ch PPTP Service CLI Max 23 Ch TABLE DATA TOLL EXCEPTION TABLE A-106 250 Allow Table (Index 001-100) 1 Max 16 Digits Deny Table (Index 001-100) A-106 250 2 Max 16 Digits - DIGIT CONVERSION TABLE A-107 251 - Digit Conversion Table 1-9 Each Table Index 001-300 - Apply Time Type 1 0: Unconditional 1: FollowDa
PAGE 815
DEFAULT VALUES B-71 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT - Digit Conversion Table 1-9 - Display Conversion Digit 1 1: On, 0: Off Off Print Conversion Digit 2 1: On, 0: Off Off TABLE DATA DIGIT CONVERSION OPTION SYSTEM TIME TABLE A-109 A-110 252 253 System Time Table 1-9 Time Zone Comment 1 Max 32 Chars Time Zone 2 System Time / GNT Time Daylight Saving Time 3 1: On, 0: Off Off Ring Mode 4 0: Day 1: Night 2: Timed Day Auto Ring Mode 5 1
PAGE 816
DEFAULT VALUES B-72 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT TABLE DATA Friday 5 Saturday 6 Sunday LCR TIME TABLE 7 A-112 255 Flex1: Day Start Time Flex2: Night Start Time Flex3: Timed Start Time Flex4: Timed End Time Flex5: Work / Holiday Flex1: Day Start Time Flex2: Night Start Time Flex3: Timed Start Time Flex4: Timed End Time Flex5: Work / Holiday Flex1: Day Start Time Flex2: Night Start Time Flex3: Timed Start Time Flex4: Timed End Time Flex5: Work / Holiday
PAGE 817
DEFAULT VALUES B-73 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT TABLE DATA HOLIDAY TIME TABLE A-113 256 Holiday Table 1-9 Each Table Index 01-50 Lunar Calendar 1 Holiday Date 2 SYSTEM SPEED DIAL A-113 257 Speed Dial Table Index 2000 – 3999 System Speed Dial 1 Max 32 Digits System Speed Name 2 Max 16 Ch Toll Free 3 1: On, 0: Off Tenant Number 4 1-9 (MBX IP-300) 1-5 (MBX IP-100) EMERGENCY CODE TABLE A-114 258 1 Max 16 Digits Changed Digit 2 Max 16
PAGE 818
DEFAULT VALUES B-74 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT TABLE DATA CCR TABLE A-115 260 CCR Table Index 001-100 Digit ‘1’ 1 Not Assign Station Number Station Group CCR CCR Drop System Speed Conference Room Attendant Call VMIB Access Networking Num Digits Not Assign Digit ‘2’ 2 Not Assign Station Number Station Group CCR CCR Drop System Speed Conference Room Attendant Call VMIB Access Networking Num Digits Not Assign 3 Not Assign Station Number Station Grou
PAGE 819
DEFAULT VALUES B-75 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT TABLE DATA Digit ‘4’ 4 Not Assign Station Number Station Group CCR CCR Drop System Speed Conference Room Attendant Call VMIB Access Networking Num Digits Not Assign Digit ‘5’ 5 Not Assign Station Number Station Group CCR CCR Drop System Speed Conference Room Attendant Call VMIB Access Networking Num Digits Not Assign 6 Not Assign Station Number Station Group CCR CCR Drop System Speed Conference Room Atte
PAGE 820
DEFAULT VALUES B-76 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT TABLE DATA Digit ‘7’ 7 Not Assign Station Number Station Group CCR CCR Drop System Speed Conference Room Attendant Call VMIB Access Networking Num Digits Not Assign Digit ‘8’ 8 Not Assign Station Number Station Group CCR CCR Drop System Speed Conference Room Attendant Call VMIB Access Networking Num Digits Not Assign 9 Not Assign Station Number Station Group CCR CCR Drop System Speed Conference Room Atte
PAGE 821
DEFAULT VALUES B-77 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT TABLE DATA Digit ‘0’ 10 Not Assign Station Number Station Group CCR CCR Drop System Speed Conference Room Attendant Call VMIB Access Networking Num Digits Not Assign Digit ‘*’ 11 Not Assign Station Number Station Group CCR CCR Drop System Speed Conference Room Attendant Call VMIB Access Networking Num Digits Not Assign 12 Not Assign Station Number Station Group CCR CCR Drop System Speed Conference Room A
PAGE 822
DEFAULT VALUES B-78 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT TABLE DATA Incoming CO Group Number 3 1-72 Day Index 4 1-80 Night Index 5 1-80 Timed Index 6 1- 80 Tenant Number 7 1-9 (MBX IP-300) 1-5 (MBX IP-100) CLI CONVERSION TABLE A-116 263 CLI Table 1-9 Each Table Index 01-50 Original CLI 1 Max 24 Digits Converted CLI 2 Max 24 Digits TONE FREQUENCY/CADENCE TABLE 1 A-117 264 Web Admin Only A-118 265 Web Admin Only 19 Tone Source is defined
PAGE 823
DEFAULT VALUES B-79 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT TABLE DATA Forward Call Ring (Station) 5 1st: Ring Port 1-15 2nd Ring Port 1-15 3rd Ring Port 1-15 4th Ring Port 1-15 5 6 7 8 Forward Call Ring (CO) 6 1st: Ring Port 1-15 2nd Ring Port 1-15 3rd Ring Port 1-15 4th Ring Port 1-15 9 10 11 12 Transfer Call Ring (Station) 7 1st: Ring Port 1-15 2nd Ring Port 1-15 3rd Ring Port 1-15 4th Ring Port 1-15 5 6 7 8 Transfer Call Ring (CO) 8 1st: Ring Port 1-15 2
PAGE 824
DEFAULT VALUES B-80 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT TABLE DATA Handsfree Answer Ring 13 1st: Ring Port 1-15 2nd Ring Port 1-15 3rd Ring Port 1-15 4th Ring Port 1-15 5 5 5 5 Command Call Ring 14 1st: Ring Port 1-15 2nd Ring Port 1-15 3rd Ring Port 1-15 4th Ring Port 1-15 5 5 5 5 Alert Ring 15 1st: Ring Port 1-15 2nd Ring Port 1-15 3rd Ring Port 1-15 4th Ring Port 1-15 1 1 1 1 Alarm Ring 16 1st: Ring Port 1-15 2nd Ring Port 1-15 3rd Ring Port 1-15 4th
PAGE 825
DEFAULT VALUES B-81 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT TABLE DATA Voice Mail 5 – Error 5 1:Prefix: 2:Suffix P#*5P Voice Mail 6 – DND 6 1:Prefix: 2:Suffix P#*6P Voice Mail 7 7 1:Prefix: 2:Suffix - Voice Mail 8 8 1:Prefix: 2:Suffix - Voice Mail 9 - Disconnect 9 **** TENANT DATA ATD GROUP ASSIGNMENT A-121 270 Terminal Group Type 1 0: Terminal 1: Circular 2: Ring 3: Longest Idle Group Name 2 Max 16 Ch - CO Attendant Number 3 Station - Mem
PAGE 826
DEFAULT VALUES B-82 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT TENANT DATA Int MOH Queuing Tone Type 7 0: Normal 1: Prompt 2: Annc 3: Int MOH 4: Ext MOH Greeting/Queuing Timeout Timer 8 010-300 (1sec) Queuing Tone No. 9 01-19 Queuing Prompt/Announcement Table No.
PAGE 827
DEFAULT VALUES B-83 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT TENANT DATA Group Name A-126 275 2 Max 16 Ch 3 Station Greeting Tone Type 1 0: Normal 1: Prompt 2: Annc 3: Int MOH 4: Ext MOH Greeting Play Timer 2 000-180 (1sec) 0 Greeting Tone No 3 01-19 4 Greeting Prompt/Announcement Table No.
PAGE 828
DEFAULT VALUES B-84 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT TENANT DATA Apply Time Type A-130 277 4 0: All 1: Day 2: Night 3: Timed All Forward Destination 5 Wrap-Up Timer 6 000-600 (100msec) 10 Member No-Answer Timer 7 50-600 (100msec) 150 Tenant Name 1 Max 16 Ch Tenant Name Display 2 1: On, 0: Off Tenant Time Table Index 3 1-9 1 ACNR Retry Count 4 0-5 3 Wake Up Retry Count 5 0-5 3 Wake Up Retry Time 6 00-20 1 Auth Retry Count 7 0-
PAGE 829
DEFAULT VALUES B-85 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT TENANT DATA Backlight Option TENANT GROUP ACCESS A-132 281 A-134 283 7 Between Tenant Group Access 0: All Off 1: Day On 2: Night On 3: Timed On 4: D/N On 5: D/T On 6: N/T On 7: All On EN/DIS CO CALL RESTRICTION I A-135 All Off All DISABLE 284 Restriction (Normal CO Line) 1 0: No Restriction 1: All Call 2: Long / International Call No Restriction Restriction (Dedicated CO Line) 2 0: No Restric
PAGE 830
DEFAULT VALUES B-86 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT TENANT DATA Tone Repeat Time (Dedicated Call) 4 10-254 (1sec) 20 5 10-60 (1sec) 15 Forced Disconnection Time (Long Call) 6 10-60 (1sec) 15 Forced Disconnection Time (Intl Call) 7 10-60 (1sec) 15 Forced Disconnection Time (Dedicated Call) 8 10-60 (1sec) 15 Call Restriction Time (Local Call) 9 1-100 (1min) 3 Call Restriction Time (Long Call) 10 1-100 (1min) 3 Call Restriction Time (Intern
PAGE 831
DEFAULT VALUES B-87 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT TENANT DATA 2 Tone Type Time Tone Number Normal 10 sec 11 3 Tone Type Time Tone Number Normal 10 sec 17 DISA Dial Tone 4 Tone Type Time Tone Number Normal 10 sec 10 LCR Virtual Tone 5 Tone Type Time Tone Number Normal 10 sec 17 Digit Conversion Virtual Tone 6 Tone Type Time Tone Number Normal 10 sec 17 Password Dial Tone 7 Tone Type Time Tone Number Prompt 10 sec 10 Internal Busy Tone 8 To
PAGE 832
DEFAULT VALUES B-88 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT TENANT DATA 13 Tone Type Time Tone Number Prompt 20 sec 15 14 Tone Type Time Tone Number Prompt 20 sec 15 Internal Vacant Error Tone 15 Tone Type Time Tone Number Prompt 20 sec 54 External Vacant Error Tone 16 Tone Type Time Tone Number Prompt 20 sec 54 Call Duration Restriction Tone 17 Tone Type Time Tone Number Normal 20 sec 1 Anonymous Call Restriction Tone 18 Tone Type Time Tone Number No
PAGE 833
DEFAULT VALUES B-89 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT TENANT DATA 24 Tone Type Time Tone Number Normal 20 sec 1 25 Tone Type Time Tone Number Normal 20 sec 1 External Relative Outgoing Restriction 26 Tone Type Time Tone Number Normal 20 sec 1 Relative Hot Desk Logout 27 Tone Type Time Tone Number Normal 20 sec 1 Howling Tone 28 Tone Type Time Tone Number Normal 30 sec 19 1st Ring Back Tone 29 Tone Type Time Tone Number Normal 10 sec 4 2nd Ring
PAGE 834
DEFAULT VALUES B-90 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT TENANT DATA 35 Tone Type Time Tone Number Normal 5 sec 11 36 Tone Type Time Tone Number Normal 5 sec 11 Alert Call Forward 37 Tone Type Time Tone Number Normal 5 sec 11 Alert Absence 38 Tone Type Time Tone Number Normal 5 sec 11 Camp on Alarm 39 Tone Type Time Tone Number Normal 1 sec 13 Conference Alarm 40 Tone Type Time Tone Number Normal 1 sec 13 Conference Join 41 Tone Type Time Tone N
PAGE 835
DEFAULT VALUES B-91 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT TENANT DATA 46 Tone Type Time Tone Number Normal 1 sec 13 47 Tone Type Time Tone Number Normal 1 sec 8 Single Error Tone 48 Tone Type Time Tone Number Normal 3 sec 9 Transfer Hold Tone 49 Tone Type Time Tone Number Internal MOH 30 sec Transfer Hold Tone (Station) 50 Tone Type Time Tone Number Internal MOH 30 sec Camp On Hold Tone (CO) 51 Tone Type Time Tone Number Normal 30 sec 14 Camp On Ho
PAGE 836
DEFAULT VALUES B-92 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT TENANT DATA 57 Tone Type Time Tone Number Internal MOH 30 sec 58 Tone Type Time Tone Number Normal 120 sec 14 Call Park Hold Tone (Station) 59 Tone Type Time Tone Number Normal 120 sec 14 IC Auto Hold Tone 60 Tone Type Time Tone Number Normal 30 sec 14 IC Auto Hold Tone (Attendant) 61 Tone Type Time Tone Number Normal 30 sec 14 Command Call Answer Tone 62 Tone Type Time Tone Number Normal 10
PAGE 837
DEFAULT VALUES B-93 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT TENANT DATA 68 Tone Type Time Tone Number Normal 10 sec 1 69 Tone Type Time Tone Number Normal 1 sec 13 VM Interaction Confirm Tone 70 Tone Type Time Tone Number Normal 1 sec 8 Authorization Code Dial Tone 71 Tone Type Time Tone Number Prompt 10 sec 10 Tenant Dial Tone 72 Tone Type Time Tone Number Normal 10 sec 10 Two-way Record Warning Tone 73 Tone Type Time Tone Number Normal 1 sec 13 Ena
PAGE 838
DEFAULT VALUES B-94 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT BOARD DATA Subnet Mask 3 IP Address DHCP Usage 4 0: OFF / 1: ON OFF T38 Usage 5 0: OFF / 1: ON OFF RTP Security 6 0: OFF / 1: ON OFF 7 0-4096, none none Priority 8 0-7 0 Diffserv 9 0-63 0 VLAN A-144 305 255.255.255.
PAGE 839
DEFAULT VALUES B-95 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT BOARD DATA BLF Destination System Port 9 0000-9999 Firewall Routing 10 0: OFF / 1: ON 9500 ON T-NET DATA ...
PAGE 840
DEFAULT VALUES B-96 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT H.324 DATA H.323 CALL ATTRIBUTE A-151 361 H.323 Setup Mode 1 0: Normal / 1: Fast H.323 Tunneling Mode 2 0: OFF / 1: ON H.323 DTMF Path 3 0: Inband / 1: RFC2833 / 2:out DiffServ 4 0-63 First Codec Type 5 Not Use / G.711U / G.711A / G.729 / G.723A G.711A Second Codec Type 6 Not Use / G.711U / G.711A / G.729 / G.723A Not Use 7 Not Use / G.711U / G.711A / G.729 / G.
PAGE 841
DEFAULT VALUES B-97 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT SIP CO DATA SIP CO BASIC REGISTRATION WEB ONLY - - - Main Proxy Address - - - Main Proxy Port - 1024-9999 Main Domain Name - - Proxy Type Normal / Dacom / KT SIP CO ADDITIONAL REGISTRATION Normal - - - User ID Start Index - - - User ID End Index - - - Main Outbound Proxy Address - - - Main Outbound Proxy Port - 1024 – 9999 5060 Sub Proxy Address - 1024 – 9999 5060 Sub Dom
PAGE 842
DEFAULT VALUES B-98 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT SIP CO DATA Third Codec Type Not Use / 711U/A/729/723A Not Use Fourth Codec Type Not Use / 711U/A/729/723A Not Use SIP CO USER ID TABLE WEB ONLY - - - Registration User ID Authentication User ID Authentication User Password Registration YES / NO NO Usage YES / NO NO SIP STATION DATA SIP STA BASIC REGISTRATION WEB ONLY - WEB ONLY - - - User ID Authentication ID Password SIP STA ADDITIONAL R
PAGE 843
DEFAULT VALUES B-99 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT SIP STATION DATA Retry Count 3-10 5 407 Authentication ON/OFF OFF 100rel Support ON/OFF OFF Session Timer Support ON/OFF OFF Max Session Timer 180-3600 1800 Min Session Timer 60-150 90 ZONE DATA ZONE ATTRIBUTE - - Nation Code - Same with system nation Memo - Codec Type Tenant Codec / G.711 / G.723 / G.729 / G.
PAGE 844
DEFAULT VALUES B-100 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT ZONE DATA RTP Relay Group N/A, 01-15 Codec Type Follow Zone / G.711 / G.723 / G.729 / G.
PAGE 845
DEFAULT VALUES B-101 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT GAIN AND CADENCE CONTROL TONE 9 00-63 32/38/37/32/37/3 2/32/32 MUSIC 10 00-63 29/40/29/29/37/3 2/32/32 DTMF/A 1 00-63 32 DTMF/D 2 00-63 32 CPT 3 00-63 32 CID/FSK 4 00-63 32 CID/D 5 00-63 32 CID/RUS 6 00-63 32 SMS/TRK 7 00-63 32 SMS/SLT 8 00-63 32 SLTM 1 00-63 34/34/34/34/34/3 4/34 DTIM (HF) 2 00-63 34/34/34/34/34/3 4/34 DTIM (HS) 3 00-63 34/34/34/34/34/3 4/34 I
PAGE 846
DEFAULT VALUES B-102 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT GAIN AND CADENCE CONTROL DEVICE (SLTM/DTIM(HS)/DTIM(HF)/IP-PHONE(HS)/ IP-PHONE(HF)/WIT/VOIB) TX RTP GAIN A-163 430436 SLTM 1 00-63 34/34/34/34/34/3 4/34 DTIM (HF) 2 00-63 34/34/34/34/34/3 4/34 3 00-63 34/34/34/34/34/3 4/34 IP-Phone (HS) 4 00-63 34/34/34/34/34/3 4/34 IP-Phone (HF) 5 00-63 34/34/34/34/34/3 4/34 WIT 6 00-63 34/34/34/34/34/3 4/34 VOIB 7 00-63 34/34/34/34/34/3 4/34 CO Rin
PAGE 847
DEFAULT VALUES B-103 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT DECT DATA PARK (view) 4 Wtu User Authenticate 5 Park 6 Wtu Subs All Data Erase 7 Wtu Subscription Erase 8 Wtu (Un)Subscription Range (view) 9 DECT Mobility 10 Station Number Auto Call Rls 1 ON/OFF Base Fault Alarm 2 Enable/Disable Disable Enable/Disable Disable WTIM DECT ATTRIBUTE A-168 Station Number Station Number 492 OFF GREEN MODE GREEN MODE ACTIVATION WEB Only Power Save Mode
PAGE 848
DEFAULT VALUES B-104 Appendix B: Quick Reference PROGRAM GROUP PG # PGM BTN RANGE DEFAULT INITIALIZATION Station Group Data 6 System Data 7 SMDR Data 8 System Timer 9 Table Data 10 Tenant Data 11 Networking Data 12 SIP Data 13 Hotdesk Logout 14 Release 1.
PAGE 849
USER ENTRY GUIDES B-105 Appendix B: Quick Reference USER ENTRY GUIDES Alphanumeric Entry Chart The following guide may be used to enter Customized Messages, Speed Dial Numbers, or User Names: Release 1.
PAGE 850
Alternate Alphanumeric Entry Chart B-106 Appendix B: Quick Reference Alternate Alphanumeric Entry Chart Graphical LCD phones (ex., LKD-30DH) may use the following table for entering alphanumeric characters. Letter Type Dial Pad Button Uppercase (ABC) Lowercase (abc) Num Button Depressions Release 1.
PAGE 851
Index A ACD Agent Log-in / Log-out Default Setting, 7-39 Agent State, 7-33 Basic Feature, 7-1 Call Distribution by Priority, 7-16 Call Indication, 7-44 Call Queuing Service, 7-21 Group Call Traffic, 7-59 Group Service Status, 7-9 Group Supervisor Functions, 7-50 Alternate Incoming CO Service, 5-19 Outgoing CO Service, 5-25 Alternative Route Selection, 5-1 Answering Machine Emulation (AME), 6-31 Attendant Group, 7-1 Recall, 7-30 Station Program Codes, 7-32 Automatic Network Dialing, 5-2 Automatic Speaker Se
PAGE 852
Index IND-2 G Mute, 6-13 Greeting/Queuing Tone Service, 7-15 Group Listening, 6-10 N H O H.
PAGE 853
Index IND-3 Message Wait/Call Back, 4-12 Station Flexible Buttons, 6-21 Station Flexible LED Flash Rates, 6-23 Station User Programming & Codes, 6-25 System Capacities, 1-2 System Clock Set, 7-42 T Two-Way Record, 6-28 U USB DB Up/Download From/To USB, 7-45 USB Upgrade, 7-44 V VM Paging, 4-21 Voice Over, 6-33 Release 1.
PAGE 854
Index Release 1.